Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn, New York
BID SET
Specifications
July 28, 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ROOSEVELT HALL INTERIOR RENOVATION
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION
010000
011116
012600
013000
013100
013119
013300
013524
013529
013530
013553
014000
014100
014200
014500
015100
015213
015219
015316
015423
015716
016000
016500
016600
016619
017123
017133
017329
017413
017416
017419
017423
017713
017719
017813
Contract Documents
Summary of Work
Modification Procedures
Administration of Contracts and Project Procedures
Project Coordination
Project Meetings
Submissions
Site Safety
Site Security
Protection of Rights, Persons and Property
Security – General Provisions
Quality Requirements
Regulatory Requirements
Definitions and Omissions
Quality Control
Temporary Services
Construction Field Office
Temporary Toilets
Sidewalk Bridge
Scaffolding and Hoisting
Temporary Pest Control
Product Requirements
Removals and Delivery
Storage
Materials and Equipment
Field Engineering
Protection of Adjacent Property
Cutting and Patching
Cleaning
Site Maintenance
Construction Waste Management and Disposal
Final Cleaning
Substantial Completion
Contract Closeout
Punch List
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
TOC-1
Table of Contents
July 28, 2010
017823
017836
017839
Operation and Maintenance Data
Guarantees and Warranties
Project Record Documents
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION
042000
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
SECTION
081113
081416
083473
087100
088000
Steel Doors and Frames
Wood Doors
Sound Control Door Assemblies
Finish Hardware
Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION
092900
095113
097723
099000
Gypsum Drywall
Acoustic Panel Ceilings
Fabric Wrapped Acoustic Wall Panels
Painting and Finishing
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION
230500
230513
230529
230548
230553
230593
230700
230993
233113
233300
233416
233713
238216
Common Work Results for HVAC
Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
Hangers and Support for HVAC Equipment
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment
Identification for HVAC Equipment
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
HVAC Insulation
Sequence of Operations
Metal Ducts
Air Duct Accessories
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
Air Coils
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
TOC-2
Table of Contents
July 28, 2010
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION
260500
260519
260529
260533
260548
260553
262200
262416
262726
262813
262816
262913
264313
Common Work Results for Electrical
Low Voltage Electric Power Conductors and Cables
Hangers & Supports for Electrical Systems
Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
Identification for Electrical Systems
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
Panelboards
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Controllers
Transient Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
TOC-3
Table of Contents
July 28, 2010
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 00 00
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. The Contract Documents are for the renovation of Roosevelt Hall to create temporary
office, practice and classroom spaces for the Music Department. Building is occupied
however all spaces to be renovated will be vacant.
2. The Contract Documents include: the “Roosevelt Hall Renovation Drawings from Pfeiffer
Partners Architects (PPA shown hereafter as AE), dated July 28, 2010”; "Contract
Specifications"; "Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions"; the "Form of
Proposal", and all amendments and addenda, all of which govern the Work of this
Agreement.
3. These Contract Documents provide required specifications for Architectural, Mechanical,
Electrical, and Plumbing work. Any variation, discrepancy or conflicting information
found by Contractor shall be brought to the attention of Hill International, Inc. (shown
hereafter as Hill or CM), acting on behalf of “The City University of New York” (CUNY),
specifically CUNY Department of Design, Construction, and Management (CUNY
DDCM).
4. Contractor is responsible for all items of Work included in the specifications and on the
drawings.
5. Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordination between all of his/her
subcontractors.
a. The Specifications that follow define the Work as follows:
General Construction
Division 1 – General Requirements
Divisions 4, 8, 9, 23, 26
6. The scope of work for each trade is listed below and described in detail in the Project
specifications. All items included in Specifications are considered part of Contractor’s
Project scope of Work. Any discrepancies in the Specifications shall promptly be
brought to the attention of the CM.
7. Note that all provisions listed in Div. 1 General Requirements of the Specifications herein
apply to Contractor and subcontractors except where noted.
B.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. Hill International, Inc. is acting as Construction Manager (CM) on behalf of CUNY DDCM
with regard to the procurement and management of subcontractor(s) for this work.
Throughout this document, all references to Hill and/or CM are as CUNY’s
representative. Unless specified, all communication and documentation will be through
Hill.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 1 of 53
2. Bidders are cautioned to read carefully the Specifications for all Work included in this
Agreement. Bidders are responsible for ascertaining that the Specifications have the
correct number of pages. The prospective bidder must visit the Site to ascertain the full
nature and extent of the Work required.
3. Contractor's Base Bid as accepted by the CM includes the total cost to CUNY of all Work
required by the Contract Documents. Prior to commencing construction Work, verify
dimensions and existing conditions at the job Site. Contractor shall report to the CM any
conditions which will prevent proper performance of Work. Contractor shall immediately
notify the CM in writing of any discrepancies between the Contract Documents and field
conditions which affect the Work.
4. Contractor and subcontractors shall take whatever precautions necessary to protect the
property of CUNY and its Occupants from damage or loss arising out of their execution
of this contract. Contractor shall assume responsibility for any such damage or loss
caused by them and shall, at his/her own expense, repair or replace any property that
becomes damaged or destroyed. Together with the CM, the CUNY DDCM Construction
Project Manager shall determine whether affected property has been damaged to such
an extent that it cannot be restored to its original condition and must be replaced.
5. All Work at the Site shall be done in a neat and clean manner by experienced and
capable workers. Workmanship shall be of superior quality. Work will be controlled by
the Hill Construction Project Manager and work that is performed improperly, poorly
made construction and non-approved changes in specified materials will be rejected and
satisfactory corrections shall be made at Contractor's sole cost and expense.
6. Neither the Contractors staff nor the subcontractors staff are allowed to discuss any
aspects of the Project, their work, or the scheduling of work with any College Personnel,
without permission of the CM; all discussions shall be directed to the CM. Any violation
of this will result in the removal of the offending party from the project for the duration of
the project.
7. No work shall be scheduled or performed in such a manner that New York City Building
Department and Fire Department Code requirements for building occupant emergency
egress are violated.
8. The Contractor, its workers and agents, shall at all times maintain their work areas in a
clean and orderly manner to safeguard the College Population. Upon completion of the
day’s work, the area shall be free of debris with the floor swept and the area left dust
free. The Contractor is responsible for removal and proper placement of their debris
within containers. If the Contractor is found to be placing debris in an unsafe manner,
they will be notified to immediately correct the unsafe condition. If notification is left
unheeded, the Contractor shall be back=charged for correcting the condition.
9. For the health and safety of the Contractor and all other personnel, the Contractor shall
take all necessary precautions and measures to control and minimize the spread of dust
and debris in the building. The Contractor shall install additional temporary enclosures
or modify existing enclosures in order to limit any such debris or dust entering occupied
spaces at the direction of the CM.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 2 of 53
10. The Contractor shall produce their own Site Specific Safety Program and submit it to the
CM for review and acceptance. Each Site Specific Safety Program shall meet, at a
minimum, the requirements of the Project Site Safety Plan adopted by the CM. The
Contractor shall execute the requirements of the Site Safety Plan and address the
violations noted by the Site Safety Manager.
11. Comply with applicable federal and State of New York Right-to-Know Law provisions
and supply copies of the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the CM.
12. Contractor will supply the CM with a telephone number or method to contact the
supervisor for the Work in case of an emergency after work hours, including weekends
and holidays.
13. Work hours shall be as established by the CM. No work may be performed at any other
time without written authorization from the CM.
14. Workers are required to be dressed in accordance with OSHA and Construction Industry
Standards. No sleeveless shirts, shorts, sneakers, etc. shall be worn at any time.
15. The Contractor and its workforce shall promptly arrive at the Campus at the beginning of
each workday and directly proceed into the construction site area. Loitering at anytime
within the other areas or other campus buildings is prohibited.
16. The Contractor and its workforce shall promptly leave the Campus at the end of the
workday.
17. There shall be NO smoking in any College building or tunnel in accordance with CUNY
policy and NYS Law. All smoking materials must be properly disposed.
18. No worker is permitted to fraternize with or otherwise engage the student population.
Doing so shall result in the immediate removal of the worker by the Campus Security
Force.
19. Anyone removed by the College Security Force will be BANNED FROM THE JOB SITE
for the duration of the Project.
20. Contractor or Sub-Contractors shall possess the appropriate licenses for all the Work of
their trades that require licenses by any Federal, State or Local Law or Agency having
jurisdiction there of.
21. Electrical work shall be done by or under the Supervision of an electrician possessing a
master electrician’s license issued by the City of New York.
22. Plumbing work shall be done by or under the supervision of a plumber possessing a
master plumber’s license issued by the City of New York.
23. Welding work if required shall be done by NYC DOB Certified welder.
24. Project Coordination: It is essential that the General Contractor coordinate the work of
the subcontractors of the various trades, General Construction; Mechanical (HVAC);
Plumbing; and Electrical to create the least possible hardship to all parties involved.
Major areas of concern include storage of materials, use of Site, access to areas of
work, etc. The specification sections address most foreseeable areas of conflict but do
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 3 of 53
not necessarily mention every condition requiring coordination. Contractor shall fully
cooperate and coordinate the Work of this Agreement with activities of CUNY and other
contractors working at the Site, at no additional cost to CUNY.
25. Prior to proceeding with any Work, obtain all necessary work permits from the NYC
Department of Buildings and other public agencies which have jurisdiction. Prepare, file
and submit to such agencies for their approval all required plans and applications; obtain
all necessary work permits and certificates of compliance and deliver same to CUNY.
These documents shall be posted as required.
26. It is Contractor’s responsibility to take field measurements and verify all dimensions and
field conditions upon which the new work is in any way dependent for accurate and
correct workmanship. Contractor's Base Bid, as accepted by CUNY, includes the total
cost to CUNY of all the Work of all trades required by the Contract Documents. There
will be no adjustments of the contract price due to field measurements and conditions
differing from those specified in contract specifications.
27. The apparent silence of the contract documents regarding any detail of the specified
Work or the apparent omission of a detailed description of Work to be done or materials
furnished shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to be used
and interpretation of these documents shall be made upon that basis. Should any
conflict occur in the contract Specifications, Contractor shall be deemed to have bid on
the most expensive way of doing the Work unless he/she has asked for and obtained a
written decision from the CM resolving the conflict prior to the bid closing date.
28. Contractor shall start duly authorized Work and continue on a full time work program
until completed. Failure to maintain a full time work schedule will be considered grounds
for the denial of requests for extensions to the time for completion of the Work under the
Agreement.
SECTION 01 11 16
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 4 of 53
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
A.
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Identification: Roosevelt Hall Renovation
1.
B.
Work by Owner.
Access to site.
Coordination with occupants.
Work restrictions.
Specification and drawing conventions.
Miscellaneous provisions.
Project Location:
11210
Brooklyn College
2900 Bedford Ave. Brooklyn, New York
Owner: The City University of New York
1.
Owner's Representative: CUNY Dept. of Design, Construction & Management
555 West 57th Street, 10th Floor New York City, New York 10019
C.
Architect: Pfeiffer Partners Architects, P.C.: 62 White Street, Ste. 5E, New York, New
York 10013 (212) 625-3911
D.
Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals
who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
E.
1.
MEP / Acoustical Engineering: Arup 155 Avenue of the Americas New York
City, New York 10013 (212) 897-1411.
2.
Matrix / New World Engineering, Inc.: 120 Eagle Rock Ave., Ste. 207 East
Hanover, New Jersey 07936 (973) 240-1800
Construction Manager (CM): Hill International, Inc. One Penn Plaza Suite 3415 New
York, NY 10119 (212) 244-3700.
1.
F.
Construction Manager has been engaged for this Project pursuant to a
Construction Management/Build Services Agreement between the Owner and
the CM.
Document Control: Document Control will be provided and administered by the
Construction Manager for purposes of managing communication and documents
during the Project. There is no cost to the Contractor.
1.
Upon award of the Agreement for General Construction, the CM will provide
further information on the Document Control System that will be utilized during
the Project. Document Control for managing communication and documents will
be provided and administered by the CM at no cost to the Contractor.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 5 of 53
1.4
A.
B.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the
following:
1.
General Scope: The project includes renovation of limited areas within existing
Roosevelt Hall on the Brooklyn College campus and includes construction of new
partitions, doors and hardware. Limited electrical and mechanical work is
included to provide for use of the newly configured spaces for classroom
instruction. Limited remediation of asbestos and other hazardous materials will
be required.
2.
Demolition: Limited removal of hazardous materials will be required as described
in the report attached to the specifications. Wherever possible, finishes are left in
place to avoid disturbing adhesives and backing containing hazardous materials.
3.
Build spaces for new Recording Studio, Choral / Opera Rehearsal, Music
Rehearsal, large music classrooms, and individual and small ensemble music
practice rooms.
4.
Interior partitions, painting, and acoustical finishes where noted.
5.
Suspended acoustical ceilings
6.
New hollow metal doors and frames, hardware and acoustical seals
7.
No structural work required
8.
New HVAC work limited to transfer ducts, grilles and diffusers to redirect air flow
9.
Salvage and reuse existing light fixtures, provide new fixtures to match where
required.
10.
Provide electrical outlets, switching to meet code and control new lighting.
11.
Modification of fire alarm system to reflect new room layouts.
12.
New signage.
Type of Agreement:
1.
1.5
A.
Project will be constructed under a single prime agreement.
WORK BY OWNER
General: Cooperate fully with Owner and CM so work may be carried out smoothly,
without interfering with or delaying work under this Agreement or work by Owner.
Coordinate the Work of this Agreement with work performed by Owner.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 6 of 53
B.
Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at the
Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work
under this Agreement begins.
1.
C.
D.
Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at the
Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this
Agreement.
1.
Owner will require coordination of construction to minimize disruption of ongoing
use of adjacent areas of this and surrounding buildings.
2.
Owner will provide IT installations for all telephone, fax, and computer / data
requirements.
Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after
Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion
of preparatory work under this Agreement.
1.
1.6
Owner will deliver the area clear and free of obstructions and other stored
materials..
Owner will coordinate move of program activities from other parts of the campus
into the renovated areas of Roosevelt Hall.
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site, as directed by the CM, for
construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of the Project site
is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on
portions of Project.
B.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations
as indicated on Construction Documents, the Agreement, and the limits and as
indicated by requirements of this Section.
C.
Use of Site: Limited use of the Project site to work in areas within the Agreement
limits as indicated in the plans and specifications. Do not disturb portions of Project
site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
Limits: Confine construction operations to interior portions of existing Roosevelt
Hall.
Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving
premises clear and available to CM, Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
Schedule all deliveries through the CM; minimize use of driveways and
entrances by construction operations.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 7 of 53
D.
1.7
A.
Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by
construction operations in a weather tight condition throughout construction period.
Repair damage caused by construction operations.
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner and/or CM will occupy the building and premises
during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction.
Cooperate with Owner and CM during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with CM’s and Owner's
operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the
right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work,
prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not
interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited
occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
A.
Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific
portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed
Work.
Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed.
On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical
systems serving occupied portions of Work.
On final sign-off, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial
service for occupied portions of Work.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
B.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or
used facilities without written permission from CM or Owner and authorities
having jurisdiction.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to CM of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working
hours of 7 a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Weekend Hours: Only as approved by CM and CUNY with minimum 48 hours
notice to CM.
Early Morning Hours: No noise before 7:00 AM under any circumstances.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 8 of 53
3.
4.
C.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
D.
Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As coordinated with CM and not to affect student
activities on campus.
Hours for Core Drilling As coordinated with CM and not to affect student
activities on campus.
Notify Construction Manager in writing not less two (2) days in advance of
proposed utility interruptions.
Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with utility
interruptions.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of
noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with CM.
1.
2.
Notify Construction Manager in writing not less than two (2) days in advance of
proposed disruptive operations.
Obtain CM’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet
(8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. All smoking materials
must be disposed of in appropriate trash receptacles.
F.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances is
not permitted, except in designated smoking areas.
G.
Employee Identification: Brooklyn College will provide identification tags for Contractor
personnel working on the Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at
all times.
H.
Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for any and all drug and
background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.
1.
1.9
A.
Maintain list of approved screened personnel with CM and Owner's
representative.
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the
Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending
on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically
stated otherwise.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 9 of 53
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to
the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination:
Requirements for materials and products identified on
Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are
used on Drawings to identify materials and products:
1.
2.
3.
1.10
A.
1.11
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms
used in the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published
as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
Keynoting:
Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes
referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
In the event that additional storage is required, permission may be obtained through
proper, advance notification through the CM. Contractor may be required to provide
fenced-in enclosure per requirements set forth in the General Requirements. All costs
and/or expenses thereof shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
COORDINATION OF TRADES
General: Contractor is responsible for coordination between all of his subcontractors.
Contractor shall do the following work:
Cores and other necessary penetrations in vertical or horizontal built surfaces for ducts,
sleeves, pipes, conduits, and other such elements.
All required insulation and/or firestopping around all ducts, pipes, conduits etc.
Installation and connection of all devices and equipment.
Final surface finishes upon completion of work, including but not limited to final painting
of all surfaces.
1.12.
ADDITIONAL SCOPE OF WORK REQUIREMENTS
1. Scaffold Design Drawing: A "Scaffold Design Drawing" as per Section BC 3314 of the
2008 New York City Building Code shall be made available to the Building
Commissioner at the job Site, and submitted as specified.
2. Contractor shall provide sidewalk shed drawing and other protection for pedestrians as
required by Section BC 3307 of the 2008 NYC Building Code.
3. Contractor shall provide a Noise Reduction Plan and noise reduction barriers as required
by the NYC DEP and NYC Local Law 113.
4. Contractor shall submit a Final Contract Progress Schedule in the form of a critical path
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 10 of 53
chart, outlining phases and critical dates involved for completion of the Work, showing
the sequence in which the Work will progress.
5. As per Article 42.6 of the Agreement, Contractor shall submit a final Detailed Bid
Breakdown of Contract Price outlining all material and labor costs for the Work including
accurate materials list from subcontractors in a format approved by the CM.
SECTION 01 26 00
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. Instructions to Bidders`
B. MODIFICATIONS
1. Authorization for additional or deleted Work shall be by written direction or bulletin only.
C. REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (Prior to Bid)
1. Contract Documents shall be thoroughly reviewed by all bidders prior to submitting bids
and any conflicts or inadequacies of the Contract Documents should be brought
immediately to the attention of the CM in writing. No adjustment of the contract price will
be made due to the failure of Contractor to familiarize himself/herself with ALL Contract
Documents or to request information in writing prior to the bid date.
2. Contractor shall attend the mandatory Pre-Bid meeting for further information on the
Project. All questions must be sent in writing to Hill and answers will be issued to all
parties in a bid addendum.
3. The form to request information is provided in Section IX, Attachment C of the Invitation
to Bid.
D. REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (Subsequent to Bid)
1. Before submitting a request for information, Contractor shall review all relevant Contract
Drawings and Specifications carefully, in order to avoid unnecessary delays due to
unseen or unread information. This shall include all addenda, bulletins, and previously
issued replies to requests for information or clarification.
2. Requests for Information (“RFI”) by Contractor subsequent to the opening of bids shall
be submitted in writing to the CM.
3. All Requests for Information shall be submitted in a timely manner so as not to cause
delays to the Work of any of the four contracts.
4. No orders shall be placed by Contractor unless Contractor has received approval of all
necessary and required shop drawings and submittals. No compensation shall be made
to Contractor for losses due to a failure on his/her part to request the information
necessary to place a correct order.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 11 of 53
5. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to incorporate into the work the information
received in a reply to an RFI..
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACTS
AND PROJECT PROCEDURES
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 26 00 Modification Procedures
2. 01 31 19 Project Meetings
B. ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACTS
1. The Work shall be under the direction and supervision of Hill as a representative of
CUNY’s Department of Design, Construction, and Management, Construction Division.
Contractor shall notify Hill, in writing of the date the Work shall begin. Such notification
to be received by Hill at least five (5) business days prior to commencement of Work.
Correspondence shall be addressed to:
Joseph Rhoades
Hill International, Inc.
One Penn Plaza, Suite 3415
New York, NY 10119
(T) 212-244-3700
josephrhoades@hillintl.com
C. PROJECT PROCEDURES
1.
Contractor must commence work within three (3) days after the date specified in a
written Notice to Proceed from the CM and continue on a full-time work program. The
Work shall be fully complete in the time set forth in the Bid Documents.
2. Each work day, Contractor and subcontractors shall sign Contractor Log upon arrival
and before leaving the Project grounds and provide a list of all employees and titles and
the last four digits of the SSN, and their work location for the day. At the start of each
day Contractor and subcontractors shall inform the CM Construction Project Manager as
to the location and scope of Work planned. Any condition which might adversely affect
college occupants whether during the workday or after close of operations shall be
reported to the CM Construction Project Manager promptly.
3. Conduct operations under this Agreement in such a manner as to allow, at all times
during the performance of the Work, ingress and egress for the occupants and public
with CUNY’s cooperation. Contractor, through the CM, shall notify and cooperate with
the CUNY’s representatives to coordinate his/her work to meet this condition.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 12 of 53
4.
Contractor shall be responsible to provide the CM with a two-week look ahead
schedule; in addition, the Contractor will notify the CM Construction Project Manager on
his/her arrival at the Project with his/her field force and/or equipment prepared to
perform the work, and every day thereafter that he/she intends to perform work until this
Agreement is completed. Any Work done without previous notification to the CM
Construction Project Manager may be rejected. Any deviation from the two-week look
ahead schedule must be approved by the CM.
5. Contractor shall be prepared to coordinate work so as to minimize disruption to the
College.
6. Work shall be provided without disruption of services to any portion of the College.
Where existing utilities serving the buildings are required to be shut off, notify CUNY
through the CM in writing at least 7 days in advance. It shall be the responsibility of
Contractor to notify and make all arrangements with the Utility Company or other
authorities having jurisdiction over such utility.
D. CONTRACTOR USE OF THE PREMISES
1. During the construction period Contractor shall have full use of the premises within
Construction Limits shown on the Contract Drawings for construction operations.
Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by Project phasing, egress, CUNY's right
to perform Work, or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project.
2. Contractor may not use or disturb any portions of the Site beyond Construction Limits
specified without specific written permission of CUNY DDCM.
3. Contractor shall be responsible to keep all existing entrances and exits serving occupied
buildings clear with an unobstructed path to the nearest street.
SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT COORDINATION
A.
GENERAL
1. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to formulate a schedule of work and coordinate the
work on this schedule with the subcontractors, including sequence in which the work will
progress throughout this project.
2. The Contractor shall prepare a baseline schedule showing milestones and sequence of
work. In addition, the contractor shall prepare update/progress schedules for review at
the project meetings. These schedules will be in two parts: work completed and 2 week
look ahead.
3. If through no fault of a Contractor or Sub-contractor the approved progress schedule is
not adhered to, the affected Contractor shall promptly notify the CM in writing of the
effects of such condition. Failure to do so shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of any
and all claims for damage or delay arising therefrom.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 13 of 53
B.
PRIMAVERA
1. WORK INCLUDED
a. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for the
scheduling and reporting progress of the work.
b. The Preliminary Construction Schedule is included in the submission requirements of
the Contract under Section 01 32 13 General Requirements.
(a) CPM SCHEDULE DETAIL: Contractor shall provide a schedule with
sufficient detail and clarity of form; and so they shall utilize the CPM schedule
to properly control, monitor and follow progress for all portions of the work.
The CPM schedule shall comply with the various limits imposed by the scope
of work and any contractually specified intermediate milestone dates and
completion dates, including milestone inspections and sign-offs by CUNY and
other agencies having jurisdiction. The degree of detail shall be to the
satisfaction of the CM. This will be the baseline schedule for the project.
2. PROJECT SCHEDULES:
a.
At each Project Job Meeting, Contractor shall be responsible to provide the CM with
a two-week look ahead schedule. In addition, the Contractor will notify the CM
Construction Project Manager on his/her arrival at the Project with his/her field force
and/or equipment prepared to perform the work, and every day thereafter that
he/she intends to perform work until this Contract is completed. Any work done
without previous notification to the CM Construction Project Manager may be
rejected. Any deviation from the two-week look ahead schedule must be approved
by the CM.
b.
At each bi-weekly update meeting, Contractor shall submit a list of each activity that
was worked on in the previous period, including the date the activity started, the
percentage complete as of the update, the date the activity was completed, and the
status of any associated long lead items. This information will be reviewed, and
corrected as necessary, at the meeting to insure that it accurately reflects the
actual progress of the work. Contractor will report on areas completed, areas
losing time, and areas picking up time. For any area losing time, give the amount
of time lost, the reason, the resolution, and the plan for making up the lost time.
An updated baseline schedule will be needed:
(1) When a change or delay significantly affects specified immediate milestone dates
or completion dates or the sequence of activities.
(2) When Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities affecting the critical
path or to significantly change the previous approved work plan.
(3) When in the opinion of the CM the status of the work is such that the schedule is
no longer representative for planning and evaluation of the work.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 14 of 53
Responsibility of Contractor: Contractor is advised that acceptance of the baseline schedule by
the CM does not relieve Contractor of any contractual obligations for scheduling of work or
construction procedures or any other requirements of the contract, and that the schedule shall
not be utilized for the purpose of making claims for delay or other claims against the CM or
CUNY for any reason whatsoever. Contractor is bound to the completion dates established in
their Agreement with the CM.
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 30 00 Administration of Contracts and Projection Procedures
B. Pre-Construction Kick-Off Meeting: Contractor and subcontractors shall attend a kick-off
job-Site meeting with the CM and attended by the stakeholders prior to commencing any
work. All Contract Documents shall be reviewed at this meeting.
C. Job Meetings: Separate Weekly job meeting shall be held at the job Site between the CM,
Contractor and subcontractors. CM shall fix the time for the meeting in consultation with
Contractor. The job meeting schedule may be changed to bi-weekly at the discretion of the
CM. All requirements for the weekly meetings would apply.
D. During the course of the Contract Work the Contractor and all subcontractors shall attend
jobsite meetings with the CM.
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMISSIONS
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 77 19 Contract Closeout
B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
1.
Contractor shall submit a preliminary list of submittals and schedule of dates for
submission as stipulated in the Contract Documents and as required for the execution of
the Work. (See attached sample in paragraph I. herein.) All submissions must be
transmitted to the CM in a timely manner to ensure that the AE has adequate time to
review without impacting the schedule. Contractor will submit the list and schedule on
hard copy and electronically, with submission numbers clearly noted. The CM will
review proposed lists and schedules for acceptance and submit any revisions
necessary. Time frames are to be given in consecutive calendar days, not number of
working days. Such schedules shall be submitted at the Project Pre-Construction
conference.
2. The following guidelines shall apply:
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 15 of 53
a. Phase 1 Submissions: Long lead items, preparatory work items and other items
required for the Work to start, shall be submitted within fourteen (14) days after
Notice to Proceed:
1. Work permits
2. Temporary facilities/utilities drawings and permits
3. Storage area location(s)
4. Project schedules, procedures, and phasing plan
5. Scaffolding (if required): drawings, specifications and permit(s)
6. Security and Site utilization plan
7. Pest control plan
8. Preliminary coordination drawings
b. Phase 2 Submissions: All technical and product data, shop drawings, samples, ongoing submittals such as monthly progress reports, progress photographs, and
submission items which are not required for the Work to start, will be submitted
according to the approved submittal schedule.
c. Phase 3 Submissions: Items such as guarantees, warrantees, as-built drawings,
reports, installation certificates, operation or maintenance manuals, quality control
testing, lab reports, and permits (including all Agency approvals and sign-offs) will be
accepted no later than thirty (30) days prior to the approved Project date of final
completion, or as mandated by time frames set by any Agency having jurisdiction
over the Project.
3. The submission schedules shall indicate dates when each item will be sent by
Contractor to the CM/AE for their review and approval.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for strict adherence to approved schedules unless a
written request for deviation from the schedule is made to the CM. The request shall not
be valid until approved.
5. Submit all shop drawings, samples and product data from each specification section at
the same time, unless otherwise noted in the approved Submissions schedule.
6. Final payment to Contractor will not be released until all approved submissions of all
phases are received, checked and approved.
7. Submissions returned for corrections shall be resubmitted with the required corrections
made within ten (10) consecutive calendar days, calculated from the date of receipt of
the returned submission(s) by Contractor. The procedure shall be repeated as many
times as required, until final submissions are obtained that require no further correction.
8. Rejected submissions shall be resubmitted with the required corrections made within ten
(10) consecutive calendar days, calculated from the date of receipt of the returned
submission(s) by Contractor. The procedure shall be repeated as many times as
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 16 of 53
required until final submissions are obtained that require no further correction.
C. DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMISSIONS
1. Distribution of all submissions shall be as indicated below.
D. LOCATIONS:
Manager.
Submissions and/or transmittals are to be delivered to the CM Project
E. DISTRIBUTION OF PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
1. General Construction Submissions
a. Contractors shall submit product data, samples and shop drawings to CM Project
Manager.
b. Product Data: a total of seven (7) copies shall be submitted.
c. Samples: a total of three (3) samples shall be provided.
F. SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
1. Contractor must be prepared to submit documents electronically if that method is found
to be in the best interest of the Project.
2. Contractor submissions shall be accompanied with a dated transmittal letter, indicating
the contract number, Facility name, and the applicable specifications section number.
Submittals not accompanied by a clear transmittal will not be accepted.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for the pickup of all unacceptable or rejected
submissions.
4. Contractor shall check all submittals for accuracy, completeness, dimensions,
clearances, connections, accessibility, servicing, maintenance, and compliance with the
Contract Documents, including changes by addenda, change orders, and coordination
drawings of related trades. In addition, Contractor shall verify all field measurements
and conditions. Submissions shall bear Contractor’s stamp of approval as evidence that
they have been so reviewed. Contractor shall then transmit the submission(s) for
review. Submissions that do not fully comply with these requirements will not be
accepted.
5. Duplication or tracing of contract drawing details will not be accepted and will be rejected
without comment or notations. Shop drawings prepared by a fabricator are a contract
requirement and the fabricator shall be obligated to Contractor as to the accuracy of all
work. All costs incurred to meet this requirement shall be borne by Contractor and shall
be included in the base bid.
6. All shop drawings prepared by the fabricator shall be based on field dimensions taken by
the fabricator.
7. The shop drawing(s) shall show in detail all components, finishes, fabrication and
installation methods, relationship to adjoining work on shop drawing(s), sizes,
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 17 of 53
dimensions, sections, gauges, connections and anchors. Include on each sheet
information as to vendor's name, drawing(s) number, date drawn, revision number and
revision date. Contract Drawings submitted as shop drawings WILL NOT BE
ACCEPTED
8. Shop drawings, product data etc. shall be submitted either in paper form or electronically
as directed by the CM. Submissions by fax shall not be accepted.
9. Acceptance of a separate item shall not be interpreted as acceptance of an assembly in
which the item functions. The right is reserved by the CM to require submissions of
details, shop erection, coordination or setting drawings, and of any schedules for any
part of the Work, whether or not specifically mentioned in Specification Sections, where
substitutions or modifications are proposed by any Contractor or where such information
is essential to the proper assembly, coordination or execution of the work under the
Agreement.
10. The items listed in Contractor’s submissions list do not limit Contractor’s responsibility
from submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for all equipment, accessories
and operations that are to be provided under this contract. There will be no adjustment
to the contract price to compensate Contractor for submissions requested which are not
specifically listed.
11. All substitutions requested by Contractor shall be supported by comparison sheets for
both the specified item and the proposed substitution, showing all necessary equivalent
information for both.
Submissions including only information on the proposed
substitution will not be accepted.
12. All shop drawings shall be printed to scale, and the scale identified in the title block of
the drawing.
13. All items of related equipment in a system shall be the product of one manufacturer, and
shall be submitted together at one time, unless otherwise noted in the schedule. The
submissions for a system shall consist of original catalog cuts accompanied by an
enclosed table of contents. This table of contents shall contain a list of all equipment
proposed to be used, giving the manufacturer’s name, trade name, catalog number or
other positive means of identification for each item.
14. The term "w/color chart" refers to the submittal of a manufacturer's full assortment of
colors available for the specified product. Submittals shall be in color. Black and white
copies are not acceptable.
15. Where physical samples are required, two samples shall be submitted for each item
except in the case of finishes (flooring, paint, exposed masonry, paving, etc.), in which
three samples shall be submitted.
16. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be clearly marked, indicating component
and system variations, additions, deletions, revised equipment locations, construction
detail variations, substitutions, and similar changes. Include a written description of the
reason for the deviation, indicating headroom heights, ceiling heights, clearances, and
other dimensions affected by the proposed deviations. All variations from the Contract
Documents not brought to the attention of the CM in this manner shall be the sole
responsibility of Contractor even when such submittal has been accepted.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 18 of 53
17. Contractor's Responsibility: The CM/AE review and acceptance shall not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for error in shop drawings or for proper coordination and
assembly of materials and equipment with other work; nor from the responsibility of
furnishing materials and labor not indicated on the shop drawings, but required by the
Contract Documents for completion of the Work.
18. Equivalent Quality of Materials: All materials and equipment which are designated in the
Specifications by a number in the trade name are designated for the purpose of
describing the article and fixing the standard of the quality and finish. Materials and
equipment which are, in the opinion of CUNY DDCM, the equivalent to that specified, will
be accepted. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with
providing any substitute material and/or equipment.
19. No Work shall be fabricated, or materials delivered to the Site, until final approval of all
shop drawing(s) and other required submissions for that work has been obtained. Final
approved copies of all shop drawing(s) must be completed without added corrections,
notes or comments, in pencil or ink on the white prints or blueprints. At the time of
submission, Contractor shall call to the attention of the CM, in writing, to any deviations
from the Contract Documents contained on the Shop Drawing(s). The approval of the
Drawing(s) containing deviations not specifically brought to the attention of the CM or
containing errors or omissions of any sort, shall not relieve Contractor of the
responsibility for executing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
20. Final payment to any Contractor will not be released until all approved submissions of all
phases are received, checked, and approved.
21. In submittals requiring manufacturer's literature, provide complete installation
instructions for specified product and any associated miscellaneous material required to
complete installation.
22. The submission of any material, or article, as the equal of the materials or articles set
forth in the specifications as a standard shall be accompanied by illustrations, drawings,
descriptions, catalogs, records of tests, samples and any other information for both the
specified item and the potential substitute item essential for judging, the quality and the
materials, finish and durability of that specified as standard, as well as information
indicating satisfactory use under similar operating conditions.
23. Where contractor is submitting a commodity exactly as specified, i.e. identical
manufacturer / model, and a catalog cut is not necessary for color selection or other
specified purpose, Contractor may submit a letter on the company’s letterhead, signed
by a principal of the company, attesting to this fact, in lieu of the catalog cut.
24. Identify each submission by the Submission Control Number assigned on the
Submission List. The control number shall be clearly written on the upper right hand
corner of each catalog cut, incorporated into the title block of all shop drawings, included
on all transmittals, and on identifying labels affixed to all samples. Items not submitted
in this format will be rejected without review.
25. In the event that all or any portion of a submission is rejected due to nonconformance
with the CMs packaging and labeling requirements, or for any other reason, Contractor
shall tender a new submission conforming to contract requirements within (10) ten
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 19 of 53
consecutive calendar days, calculated from the submission’s rejection date. In no event
shall a Contractor be permitted to tender submissions beyond the dates contained in the
approved Submissions schedule without written approval of the CM.
26. Rejected submissions are to be returned to Contractors directly.
27. No work shall be fabricated, manufactured, or installed from shop drawings stamped
"Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", and such shop drawings shall be corrected and
resubmitted by the Contractor until accepted by the Architect. At least one complete set
of "No Exceptions Taken and/or Make Corrections Noted" shop drawings shall be kept
at the site in the Contractor's field office for reference at all times. "Revise and
Resubmit" or "Rejected" shop drawings shall not be permitted at the site.
28. Submittals marked “No Exceptions Taken”:
Submittals which require no corrections by the Architect will be marked "No Exceptions
Taken".
29. Submittals marked "Make Corrections Noted":
Submittals which require only a minor amount of correcting shall be marked "Make
Corrections Noted". This mark shall mean that checking is complete and all corrections
are obvious without ambiguity. Fabrication will be allowed on work marked "Make
Corrections Noted" provided such action will expedite construction and noted
corrections are adhered to. If fabrication is not made strictly in accordance with
corrections noted, the item shall be rejected in the field, and the Contractor will be
required to replace such work in accordance with corrected submittals.
30. Submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected":
When submittals are contrary to contract requirements or too many corrections are
required, they shall be marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected". No work shall be
fabricated under this mark. The Architect shall list his reasons for rejection on the
submittals or in the transmittal letter accompanying their return. The submittals must be
corrected and resubmitted for approval.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 20 of 53
I.
SAMPLE SUBMISSION SCHEDULES
SUBMISSIONS LIST
Brooklyn College Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Contractor Name:
Address:
Phone:
Fax:
CSI
Section
HILL
Control
No.
Item Description
L
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 21 of 53
D
S
Submission
Phase
(I, II, or III)
SECTION 01 35 29
SITE SECURITY
A.
GENERAL SECURITY
1. Any personnel working on this Project shall not bring or consume alcoholic beverages or
controlled substances at the factory and the Site and shall not be under the influence of
drugs or alcohol during operating hours.
2. Any personnel working on this Project employed by Contractor and/or Sub-contractor
shall wear a Worker I.D. Badge at all times.
3. Any personnel working on this Project shall not remove scrap or salvage material or
grant any third party access to do so without the permission of the CM Construction
Project Manager.
4. Scrap or waste material scheduled to be removed shall be removed only during
designated times and under supervision of those stated above.
5. The Contractor shall protect all property from damage, and the public against hazard or
injury.
6. The Contractor shall provide and maintain fencing, footbridges, warning lights, signs,
watchers, flaggers, or other personnel as required by 2008 NYC Building code, Section
BC 3307, for the maintenance of the Site and adjacent areas to the extent required by
law.
7. The Contractor shall maintain access to firefighting facilities at the Site at all times.
8. Contractor shall protect and be responsible for existing buildings, new construction, and
areas of the facility affected by the Project. Should any portion of the Site be damaged,
disturbed or otherwise affected due to work of the Contractor, Contractor shall report the
conditions and circumstances to the CM Construction Project Manager and make all
necessary repairs and replacements to such damaged work at his/her own expense and
with new materials to match existing work in every respect, as approved by the CM
Construction Project Manager.
9. Contractor shall properly and completely protect all apparatus included in this
Agreement against dirt and damage. Contractor shall be held fully responsible for all
damage to apparatus, regardless of ownership, until final acceptance. Any equipment
furnished under the Agreement and any property of CUNY damaged or destroyed by
Contractor or his/her employees shall be repaired or replaced as necessary without
additional cost to CUNY.
10. Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as it accumulates on the sidewalks within the
contract limit lines.
11. Contractor shall provide all necessary safety equipment, materials and personnel to
protect public walks and grounds within the work areas of this contract so pedestrians,
occupants and the public are protected at all times.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 22 of 53
12. Contractor is responsible for the security of the Work Site and shall provide suitable Site
protection to prevent unauthorized entry onto the Site, until final acceptance by CUNY.
13. Contractor shall locate all existing utilities and service lines prior to demolition or
construction. Notify the utility company or city agency affected, the CM, and CUNY
DDCM at least 72 hours in advance, for any removal, relocation, or interruption in
services required. Cap all existing utilities as directed.
B.
BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
1. Contractor shall adequately enclose and protect areas against the weather where the
installation is incomplete at the end of the working day, and shall be responsible for any
damage or inconvenience resulting from a failure to do so. Such protection shall be
done to the complete satisfaction of the CM.
2. Provide temporary barricades, including noise reduction barriers, as required. Post
signs for safety and provide dust controls as described in Section 01 74 13. Signage
must be in place 24 hours prior to the commencement of construction activity.
3. Provide enclosures around piles of separated materials. Locate enclosures out of the
way of construction traffic. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and
convenience to subcontractors.
SECTION 013530
PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A. Accident Prevention
1. The Contractor shall, at all times, take every precaution against injuries to persons or
damage to property and for the safety of persons on or about the Site or engaged in the
performance of the Work.
B. Safety Programs
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
2. The Construction Manager shall provide the Contractor with copies of the safety
orientation booklet. The Contractor shall provide copies of the booklet to each of its
workers and to each worker of its Subcontractors prior to each worker starting Work. The
Contractor shall maintain documentation that each worker received a copy of the safety
orientation booklet prior to the worker starting Work.
C. Protection of Work and Property
1. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner’s property from injury or loss in
connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the
Contractor’s Work, and adjacent property. The Contractor shall replace or make good
any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 23 of 53
2. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to protect and maintain all materials and
supplies on or off Site in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good
any damage thereto until construction completion. The Contractor shall maintain an
inventory of all materials and supplies for the Project that are delivered to the Site or
approved for off-Site storage facilities.
3. The Contractor shall report any loss, theft, burglary, vandalism or damage of materials or
installed Work to the Owner by phone and facsimile as soon as it is discovered. If
vandalism, theft, or burglary is suspected as the cause of the loss, the Contractor shall
notify Site security personnel and the municipal police. The Contractor shall also protect
the place of loss until released from protection by the Owner or the Owner’s
Representative. The Contractor shall insure that no potential evidence relating to the
loss is removed from the place of loss.
4. Should the Contractor feel there is a claim for recovery under the CM builders risk
insurance, a fully documented claim must be submitted to the CM within thirty (30) days
of discovery. The claim must at least include the following:
a. A copy of a police report (if applicable).
b. A complete inventory of damaged or lost items including:
(1). Description of each item.
(2). Purchase date and proof of delivery of each item.
(3). Supplier from whom purchased.
(4). Serial number (if applicable).
(5). Price of each item.
(6). Total number of pieces and cost of all lost or damaged items.
c. The name, address and telephone number of the person who controlled the lost or
damaged items immediately before the loss or damage.
d. The name, address and telephone number of the person who discovered the loss
or damage.
e. A written description of how the loss or damage occurred.
The Owner may refuse any claim from the Contractor for loss or damage unless all of the items
required in this section are provided to the Owner, and are to the satisfaction of the Owner.
D. Adjoining Property
1. The Contractor shall protect all adjoining property and shall repair or replace any said
property damaged or destroyed during progress of the Work.
E. Risks Assumed by the Contractor
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 24 of 53
1. The Contractor solely assumes the following distinct and several risks whether said risks
arise from acts or omissions, whether supervisory or otherwise, of the Owner, of the
Client, of the CM, of any Subcontractor, of third persons or from any other cause,
including difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, whether
said risks are within or beyond the control of the Contractor and whether said risks
involve any legal duty, primary or otherwise, imposed upon the Owner, excepting only
risks which arise from faulty designs as shown by the plans and specifications,
unforeseen obstacles or from the negligence of the Owner or Owner’s members,
officers, representatives or employees that caused the loss, damage or injuries
hereinafter set forth:
a. The risk of loss or damage, includes direct or indirect damage or loss, of whatever
nature to the Work or to any plant, equipment, tools, materials or property
furnished, used, installed or received by the Owner, the Construction Manager, the
Contractor or any Subcontractor, material men or workmen performing services or
furnishing materials for the Work. The Contractor shall bear said risk of loss or
damage until construction completion or until completion or removal of said plant,
equipment, tools, materials or property from the Site and the vicinity thereof,
whichever event occurs last. In the event of said loss or damage, the Contractor
immediately shall repair, replace or make good any said loss or damage.
b. The risks of claims, just or unjust, by third persons against the Contractor or the
Owner, the Client, and the Construction Manager on account of wrongful death,
bodily injuries and property damage, direct or consequential, loss or damage of
any kind whatsoever arising or alleged to arise out of or as a result of or in
connection with the performance by the Contractor of the Work, whether actually
caused by or resulting from the performance of the Work, or out of or in connection
with the Contractor’s operations or presence at or in the vicinity of the Site. The
Contractor shall bear the risk for all deaths, injuries, damages or losses sustained
or alleged to have been sustained prior to the construction completion of the Work.
The Contractor shall bear the risk for all deaths, injuries, damages or losses
sustained or alleged to have been sustained resulting from the Contractor’s
negligence or alleged negligence which is discovered, appears, or is manifested
after acceptance by the Owner.
c. The Contractor assumes entire responsibility and liability for any and all damage or
injury of any kind or nature whatsoever, including death resulting there from, to all
persons, whether employees of the Contractor or otherwise, and to all property,
caused by, resulting from, arising out of, or occurring in connection with the
execution of the Work. If any person shall make said claim for any damage or
injury, including death resulting there from, or any alleged breach of any statutory
duty or obligation on the part of the Owner, the Client, the Owner’s Representative,
Construction Manager, servants and employees, the Contractor shall assume the
defense and pay on behalf of the Owner, the Client, the Owner’s Representative,
the Construction Manager, servants and employees, any and all loss, expense,
damage or injury that the Owner, the Client, the Owner’s Representative,
Construction Manager, servants and employees may sustain as the result of any
claim, provided however, the Contractor shall not be obligated to indemnify the
Owner, the Client, the Owner’s Representative, Construction Manager, servants
and employees for their own negligence, if any. The Contractor agrees to assume,
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 25 of 53
and pay on behalf of the Owner, the Client, and the Owner’s Representative,
Construction Manager, servants and employees, the defense of any action at law
or equity which may be brought against the Owner, the Client and the Owner’s
Representative, Construction Manager, servants and employees. The assumption
of defense and liability by the Contractor includes, but is not limited to the amount
of any legal fees associated with defending, all costs of investigation, expert
evaluation and any other costs including any judgment or interest or penalty that
may be entered against the Owner, the Client, and the Owner’s Representative,
Construction Manager, servants and employees, in any said action.
d. The Contractor is advised that the Work required under this contract may impose
certain obligations and requirements mandated by the U.S. Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations, Title 29 CFR Part
1926.62 Lead Exposure in Construction, relative to the potential exposure to lead
by its employees. The Contractor assumes entire responsibility and liability for
complying fully in all respects with these regulations.
2. The Contractor’s obligations under this Article shall not be deemed waived, limited or
discharged by the enumeration or procurement of any insurance for liability for damages.
The Contractor shall notify its insurance carrier within twenty-four (24) hours after
receiving a notice of loss or damage or claim from the Owner or Owner’s Client. The
Contractor shall make a claim on its insurer specifically under the provisions of the
contractual liability coverage and any other coverage afforded the Owner or the Client
including those of being an additional insured where applicable.
3. Neither Final Acceptance of the Work nor making any payment shall release the
Contractor from the Contractor’s obligations under this Article. The enumeration
elsewhere in the Agreement of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular
claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of
the provisions of this Article or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is responsible for
only risks or claims of the type enumerated; and neither the enumeration in this Article
nor the enumeration elsewhere in the Agreement of particular risks assumed by the
Contractor of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall be deemed
to limit the risks which the Contractor would assume or the claims for which the
Contractor would be responsible in the absence of said enumerations.
Upon the conclusion of any action, proceeding or lawsuit, should a final binding
determination of responsibility be made which allocates responsibility to the Owner, the
Client, or the Owner’s members, officers, employees, or representatives, the Owner
agrees that the obligation to indemnify and hold harmless shall not be applicable to the
portion of any uninsured money judgment for which the Owner is responsible, and the
Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the percentage of uninsured defense costs which
the Contractor incurred based upon an apportionment of the Owner’s allocated
responsibility.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 26 of 53
SECTION 01 35 24
SITE SAFETY
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 41 00 Safety Requirements
2. 01 54 23 Scaffolding and Hoisting
3. 01 65 00 Removals and Delivery
B. General: In addition to complying with Exhibit H of the Agreement, the Contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring that all construction operations are performed in a safe and lawful
manner, in full conformance with the NYC Building Code, OSHA regulations, and all other
Local, State, and Federal Regulatory Agencies as well as accepted industry standards for
worker and public safety. This requirement shall include, but not be limited to, Contractors’
compliance with regulations governing the use of scaffolding, sidewalk sheds, temporary
shoring, barricades, Fire Department requirements for Work procedures, and sequencing
which affect public or worker safety. Contractor is to submit a Site Specific Safety Work Plan
at the initial progress meeting.
C. Contractor shall conduct operations under this Agreement in such a manner as to allow
continuous access for the occupants and public to their locations and the public spaces of
the college at all times during the performance of the Work. Contractor shall conduct all
operations as required to minimize disruptions of basic services within occupied buildings
and to avoid inconvenience and danger to the occupier’s body.
D. Any scheduled activities that will result in interruptions of basic services or utilities or may
cause inconvenience to college staff and students shall be reported to the CM Construction
Project Manager at least one week (seven calendar days) prior to the anticipated date. It
shall be the responsibility of Contractor to notify and make all arrangements with the Utility
Company or other authorities having jurisdiction whenever utility shutdowns are required.
That Contractor shall provide and distribute/post notices of any service interruptions or other
inconveniences to the occupants as required by the CM Construction Project Manager at
least 48 hours prior to the shut down. Under no circumstances shall interruption of any
service, utility, or area of the facility be allowed without prior notification by Contractor and
written approval from the CM.
E. Contractor shall allow unrestricted access to all areas under Contractor’s control to CUNY
employees and emergency personnel in the performance of their duties.
F. Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as it accumulates on all sidewalks and roads within
the contract limit lines and shall keep the sidewalks and roads clear and salted at all times
as necessary.
G. At the start of each workday, contractor shall inform the CM as to the location and scope of
Work planned. Any condition which might adversely affect the college, whether during the
workday or after close of operations, shall be reported promptly to the CM, who will report it
to the College Facilities.
H. Contractor shall take every precaution necessary to avoid damaging any existing pipe
insulation, since it may contain asbestos. When any such insulation is encountered,
Contractor discovering it shall immediately notify the CM in order that samples may be taken
and tested for the presence of asbestos. Should the pipe insulation be damaged resulting in
asbestos being released into the surroundings, Contractor who damaged the insulation shall
be held liable for the cost of all remedial work mandated by the Department of
Environmental Protection regulations.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 27 of 53
I.
Contractor shall have a licensed electrician on the premises during all demolition work
affecting electrical wiring, outlets, or fixtures.
J. Safety Precautions for Electric Circuits: Electrical circuits, the failure of which will cause a
hazard to life and property, shall comply with Bulletin No. 8 of the Bureau of Gas and
Electricity, dated March 5, 1963.
K. Site Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for all general features of Site and worker
safety, including but not limited to scaffolding, sidewalk sheds, perimeter barriers, and
danger signage.
L. Worker Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for enforcing all safety aspects for
workers within and stemming from their scope of Work, including but not limited to
prevention of loose wiring, exposed scrap material or debris, wet walking surfaces, etc.
M. Contractor shall, for their own workforce, College employees and all their associated sub
contractors, enforce any and all required or accepted worker safety features, including but
not limited to wearing hard hats, dust masks, respirators, work gloves, safety boots, safety
vests, and goggles.
N. Other Safety Equipment: Provide first-aid medical kit and safety harness to be kept in the
CM Site office.
O. In the event of conflict between this Section and Exhibit H, Exhibit H shall control.
SECTION 01 35 53
SECURITY – GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. Section 01 56 34 - Guard Service
2. Section 01 56 35 - Security Lighting
B. Contractor is responsible for the security of the Work Site until final acceptance by CUNY
DDCM. Contractor shall be responsible to provide suitable Site protection to prevent
unauthorized entry onto the Site and shall be responsible for any loss or damage for the
duration of the contract until final acceptance by CUNY DDCM.
C. Contractor shall carefully protect and minimize damage to any existing Work that is to be
retained. Contractor shall properly and completely protect all apparatus included in this
Agreement against dirt, damage and vandalism. Any equipment furnished under the
Agreement and any property of CUNY damaged or destroyed by Contractor or his/her
employees shall be restored to its original condition or replaced without additional cost to
CUNY.
D. Contractor shall adequately enclose and protect areas against the weather where the
installation is incomplete at the end of the working day, and shall be responsible for any
damage or inconvenience due to his/her failure to do so. Such protection shall be done to
the complete satisfaction of the CM.
E. Contractor shall provide all necessary safety equipment, materials and personnel, to protect
the public walks, entrances to the buildings, grounds within the work areas of this contract in
order that pedestrians, College staff and students and the public be protected at all times.
F. Contractor shall provide temporary barricades as required, post signs for safety, and provide
dust controls.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 28 of 53
G. Contractor shall provide temporary, secure entrance doors when new entrance installation
cannot be completed before the end of the working day at no additional cost to CUNY.
Section 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
RELATED sections
Submittals – Section 013300.
See Specification Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and
during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that
proposed construction complies with requirements.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and
after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with
requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
DELEGATED DESIGN
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
indicated.
.1.A.1.a.1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification
required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
SUBMITTALS
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the
form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
authority.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be
designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 29 of 53
are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes,
loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
.1.A.1.a.2.
Specification Section number and title.
.1.A.1.a.3.
Description of test and inspection.
.1.A.1.a.4.
Identification of applicable standards.
.1.A.1.a.5.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
.1.A.1.a.6.
Number of tests and inspections required.
.1.A.1.a.7.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
.1.A.1.a.8.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
.1.A.1.a.9.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
.1.A.1.a.10. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
.1.A.1.a.11. Date of issue.
.1.A.1.a.12. Project title and number.
.1.A.1.a.13. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
.1.A.1.a.14. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
.1.A.1.a.15. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
.1.A.1.a.16. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
.1.A.1.a.17. Identification of product and Specification Section.
.1.A.1.a.18. Complete test or inspection data.
.1.A.1.a.19. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
.1.A.1.a.20. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
.1.A.1.a.21. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work
complies with the Contract Document requirements.
.1.A.1.a.22. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
.1.A.1.a.23. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 30 of 53
documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on
performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those
indicated for this Project.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the State of New York and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations.
Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for
the activities indicated.
.1.A.1.a.24. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and
similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union
jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes
in types of tests and inspections to be performed.
Preconstruction Testing:
Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for
compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.
.1.A.1.a.25. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately
demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same
tasks for Project.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 31 of 53
When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
.1.A.1.a.26. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each
test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to
Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
part 2
EXECUTION
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
.1.A.1.a.27. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in
other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend
restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
SECTION 01 41 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
GENERAL
1. All Work shall be done as hereinafter specified and in accordance with the latest rules
and regulations of all regulatory and public agencies having jurisdiction in the Work of
this contract.
2. Only the latest editions or revisions of reference standards, New York City Building
Code, and specifications in force at the date the Work being performed shall be
applicable unless otherwise specifically noted.
3. The Specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest
edition, shall apply to any and all for which the ASTM Standard has been established,
unless otherwise specified. Each manufacturer or supplier of each material shall certify
that their material conforms to the applicable ASTM Specification.
4. If Work under this contract requires street excavation, notify the NEW YORK CITY ONE
CALL CENTER at 1-800-272-4480 prior to performing any such excavation, notification
to be made at least two but no more than ten working days prior to start of excavation.
5. Contractor shall be responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirementsFederal, State and Local- pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition
waste materials.
6. All Work shall conform to the minimum accessibility standards set by New York City
Local Law 58 and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, 1984.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 32 of 53
B.
PERMITS, APPLICATIONS AND CERTIFICATES
1. Contractor shall be responsible, at no additional cost to CUNY, for the filing of all
required applications, reports and forms with all Governmental Agencies having
jurisdiction. Contractor shall obtain all work permits and certificates as required
according to the final Contract Drawings and Amendments, as approved by the Building
Department.
2. Contractor shall obtain all required Building Department and Bureau of Electrical Control
approvals and sign-offs for the Work of the Heating and Ventilation, Electrical Work and
Plumbing required to obtain the required Certificates of Occupancy.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 33 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
SECTION 01 42 00
DEFINITIONS AND OMISSIONS
A.
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified the following are definitions of terms used in these technical
specifications:
1. "Addendum" and "Addenda" refer to written or graphic documents issued by CUNY prior
to the start of the Agreement, which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by
addition, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Upon issuance, Addenda become part
of the Contract documents.
2. "Adequate" or "sufficient" shall mean adequate or sufficient in the opinion of CUNY or its
Authorized Representative.
3. “AE” means Pfeiffer Partners Architects and their subconsultants.
4. "Approved" or words of similar import shall mean approved in writing by any
governmental agency having jurisdiction or CUNY or its Authorized Representative.
5. "CUNY" means The City University of New York City.
6. "Certification" refers to the submittal of any and all certified mill or laboratory test reports
indicating that the material submitted complies with the requirements specified and is
intended generally for the applications shown.
7. "Color chart" refers to the submittal of a manufacturer's full assortment of colors
available for the specified product. Submittals shall be in color, black and white copies
or reproductions are not acceptable.
8. “DDCM” means CUNY Department of Design, Construction and Management.
9. "Equal" shall mean equivalent in the opinion of CUNY or its Authorized Representative.
10. "Furnish" shall mean procure, supply, and deliver the article required for the completion
of that portion of Work.
11. "Indicated" is a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the
drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of
recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown", "noted",
"scheduled", and "specified" are used instead of "indicated", it is for the purpose of
helping the reader locate the cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended
except as may be specifically noted.
12. "Install" shall mean build-in, set, or place the article into assembly.
13. “Occupants” shall mean faculty, staff, students, and visitors of the campus.
14. "Provide" shall mean furnish and install.
15. "Remove" shall mean to extract in an orderly manner, an article or assembly, and to
dispose of that item in an approved manner, off Site.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 34 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
16. Material or equipment designated by specification number shall mean the latest revision
of that Specification.
17. All equipment furnished and installed under the Agreement shall be as Specified or its
Equal as approved by CUNY and be new and of the latest model or design.
B.
WORD OMISSIONS
1. Omissions in the sections of the Specifications following such words as "the Contractor
shall," "shall be," "shall consist of," "the" etc., are intentional. Such words and phrases
shall be applied where a colon occurs or by inference as is done in the case of a note on
the Drawings. Wherever instructions are given in the Drawings or Specifications
they are directed to Contractor unless otherwise noted. Where clarity of intent
requires it, the long form is used.
SECTION 01 45 00
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1. Field Measurements: Contractor shall verify that field measurements are as indicated on
construction and shop drawings before confirming product orders or proceeding with
Work, to minimize waste due to excessive materials.
2. Metals in contact with dissimilar metals or materials that can cause deterioration shall be
separated from these materials through the use of protective coatings such as
bituminous paint etc., platings, plastic shims, sleeves, gaskets or other isolators.
Compatible fasteners shall be used to reduce galvanic action.
B.
PACKING AND SHIPPING
1. Shipping: Coordinate the schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas to
minimize Site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
2. Packing: Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where
economically feasible.
C.
PREPARATION (see also 01 66 00)
1. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming material to be delivered according to
installation schedule.
D.
INSTALLATION
1. Install product(s) according to manufacturer's recommendations
SECTION 01 51 00
TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. GENERAL
1. All temporary services (as outlined below) shall be provided by Contractor at his/her own
expense
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 35 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
a.
Temporary Lighting and Electrical:
Owner shall provide electricity. Contractor to provide all routing necessary to
bring power from building sources to work locations as necessary. No power is
to be taken from individual rooms in any fashion.
Contractor shall provide temporary lighting as required to maintain a minimum of
10 foot candles in the work areas.
Contractor shall provide ground-fault protection for personnel on single phase 15
and 20 ampere receptacle outlets.
Receptacle outlets and portable cord connectors shall have standard NEMA
configuration.
Make necessary arrangements and hookup location for temporary electrical
services. Furnish and install all required cut off switches, panels, wiring, meters,
etc and maintain until no longer required. Turn off all power at the end of each
working day. Remove all temporary electric supplies and equipment when no
longer required. .
b.
Temporary Water
Temporary water will be made available for the work without charge at source or
sources directed within the limits of the existing supply and usage. Contractor
shall make arrangement with the CM for hookup. Contractor is responsible for
maintenance and for shutting off service at the end of each working day.
c.
Temporary Use of Existing Permanent Elevator
The Contractor will be permitted to use the freight elevator designated by the CM
for transportation of workers, tools, materials, and equipment.
Contractor to provide protective pads for the cab, masonite for the floors, and any
other appropriate protective measures for the car and entrance doors and
frames.
At the end of construction, the elevator must be restored to the condition in which
it was found prior to construction.
d.
Temporary Ventilation
The Contractor shall provide and pay for ventilation of the enclosed space for
workers in accordance with applicable laws. It shall also provide ventilation of
the enclosed space as required to facilitate drying of plaster or taping compound,
or other materials requiring ventilation in accordance with manufacturer’s
directions and as required to maintain proper moisture levels within building
including materials, surface and ambient air for installation and application of
interior materials and equipment.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 36 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
SECTION 01 52 13
CONSTRUCTION FIELD OFFICE
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 30 00 Administration of Contracts & Project Procedures
2. 01 31 00 Project Coordination
3. 01 35 29 Site Security
General Contractor shall be required to provide the following within fifteen (15) days of the
start of work until final acceptance of the project:
A.
Office build out and contents for Construction Manager: The office area will be
located on the first floor as indicated on Drawing A-101.00 / Office 100 RE. For
complete work see Drawings.
a. The Contractor will carry an allowance of $45,000 for selective demolition,
minor construction, and provision of furniture, fixtures, and equipment as
follows.
b. Provide three (3) private offices each a minimum of 150 sf.
c. For security purposes, existing hardware will be modified and/or replaced to
accommodate locking of the offices. Copies of keys will be issued to
requisite CUNY and Brooklyn College representatives.
d. Provide conference room / area large enough to accommodate up to 20
persons.
e. Provide complete interior furnishings including five (5) desks and eight (8)
chairs for the offices and reception area. Finishes must be of good quality
and in good condition.
f. Toilet facility.
g. Toiletries, paper towels, toilet paper and soap.
h. Include eight (8) wastepaper baskets and two large waste receptacles for
separation of paper waste and common trash per LEED requirements.
i. One (1) Plan Desk (minimum 3’ x 6’) with storage plan boxes for rolled up
drawings
j. One (1) Conference Table with seating for sixteen (16)
k. Twenty (20) Chairs for Conference Table
l. Five (5) - four drawer Filing Cabinets with capacity for legal size hanging files
m. Two (2) 4 level Book Shelving for contracts, Project Manuals, and supplies.
n. 8 Mailbox Slots for Contractors
o. Water Cooler (5 gallon) with hot/cold ports with water delivery service for the
duration of Roosevelt Interior project.
p. Microwave Oven
q. Coffee Machine
r. Refrigerator 3’ x 4’
s. One (1) minimum 8 megapixel digital camera with 3x optical zoom, water and
shock resistant, with two (2) minimum 256 mb storage card.
t. Contractor will be required to clean the office once per week, which includes
removal of all trash as often as needed.
u. One (1) 200 GB external hard drive USB 2.0 for data backup storage.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 37 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
B.
Additional Equipment for Resident Engineer
The following items (See Diagram 1) are to be included and must be maintained
for the Project duration through final completion. Notes: 1. Equipment shall be
provided at the direction of the Construction Manager, and any equipment not
provided, shall be credited back to the CUCF. 2. After completion of the Project
all purchased equipment will become the property of CUNY and will remain in the
Office.
Office must be provided with at least 15 120v outlets (inclusive of existing outlets)
in addition to all required telephone outlets (minimum 5) and necessary computer
network jacks including wireless network router. Contractor is to coordinate the
work and pay for all associated costs to connect and route the phones, fax,
computers, and copier per the direction of Brooklyn College Facilities
Management / University Engineer.
No.
[1]
001
Items
[2]
Telephones
Units
[3]
See [4]
002
Internet Connection
See [4]
003
Windows 2003
Server:
1
004
Switch: 12-Port
1
005
Network Printer
1
006
Network Copy
Machine
1
007
Fax Machine
1
Description
[4]
Three phone lines (Separate phone numbers) for voice and one Fax
dedicated phone line. Provide 5 phones as follows; One phone will
have dedicated phone number/lines and the other four phones will
share the other two lines. Insure that all phones are working properly.
Provide repairs/maintenance as needed.
Provide DSL high speed connection to the Wireless Office Network
(LAN) and maintain functional through project completion.
This server will be connected to six users at peak and will include all
required / necessary software, licenses, (wireless) connections, etc.
and is a part of this contract. It must have a minimum of a 2.8 GHz
processor, Windows Server 2003 Std, Internal Tape Drive for backup
with backup software, RAM capacity of 512 MB and HD capacity of
80 GB. Licenses for at least 6 users must be included. 17” Monitor,
key board and optical mouse should be included. Provide training for
the staff members on back-up. Include all maintenance/repair as
required to provide operational network at all times.
At least an Ethernet 10/100 Auto-Sensing
Color Laser Printer with wireless network capability (includes access
to laser printers from all work stations) 25ppm, 2400 x 600 dpi, Input
paper capacity 600, Output paper capacity 500, max. paper size 11 x
17, memory 64MB. (Note: Items 009, 010, & 011 may be supplied as
a single multi-function unit with wireless / network capability.)
Provide a lease for the benefit of the project including all supplies and
maintenance. Multi Function (MFP) – Wireless Network Printing,
Scanning, Faxing, and Finishing capable. Minimum 60 ppm for black
and white copies and minimum 600 dpi. Separate paper supply trays
for multiple paper sizes of at least 300 sheets. The copier shall have a
max media/sheet size of 11 inch x 17 inch, and finisher with stapler.
Separate Fax 2920 high speed Laser fax with 33.6k Bps Super G3 Fax
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 38 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
008
X1 wall outlet
connection and
wiring.
C.
1
Modem, 30 Page ADF, 16 MB Memory, Dual Access, 250 Sheet
Input Capacity.
Additional Communication Outlet for a visiting staff member Laptop
(Provide The Outlet ONLY , Computer is not required) Must be
ready for use by a staff member. Software License for the Server
must be included.
A complete set of contract documents and construction sketches shall be kept at
the Site in the field office at all times, in an organized manner for the use of
CM/CUNY.
SECTION 01 52 19
TEMPORARY TOILETS
A. The building is presently occupied and operational with available toilet facilities; the
Contractor may use the existing facilities as directed by Hill. However, it will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to designate and maintain these rooms. Any damage
caused by the Contractor will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to remedy. The
Contractor shall provide, at the beginning of Work, and shall maintain temporary toilets,
wash facilities, and potable drinking water. Comply with regulations and health codes for
the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
SECTION 01 53 16
SIDEWALK BRIDGE
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 35 33 Site Safety
2. 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements
B. Contractor shall secure permits for any sidewalk bridges and shall adhere to Local Law
33/91 requirements. Applicants for the permit must state why the bridge is required and why
permit should be renewed at time of expiration. Installation shall be by licensed contractor.
1. Any sidewalk bridges shall conform to the Section BC 3307 of 2008 NYC Building Code,
OSHA regulations, and to all requirements of public agencies having jurisdiction thereof.
2.
Contractor shall notify the CM Construction Project Manager 48 hours prior to the
erection of any sidewalk bridges, and shall coordinate his/her efforts so as not to
interfere with normal activities of the Campus.
3. The Sidewalks bridge(s) shall be safe, secure, and properly maintained at all time. All
necessary provisions shall be made to protect the workers and the public against any
hazard or injury, and all property from damage. Contractor shall be held fully and solely
liable for any harm, injury or damage resulting from faulty, damaged, or weak
construction of sidewalk bridges.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 39 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
SECTION 01 54 23
SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTING
A.
RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 35 33 Site Safety
2. 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements
B. SCAFFOLDING
1. If required, erect adequate scaffolding for this Work. Contractor shall make the
necessary arrangements for, and obtain all permits required for his/her work, paying the
costs and expenses thereof.
2. Erect and operate all scaffolding by or under the supervision of a licensed rigger.
Present original rigger’s license to the CM for verification prior to installation.
3. Scaffolding shall conform to the Section BC 3314 of 2008 NYC Building Code, OSHA
regulations, and to all requirements of public agencies having jurisdiction thereof.
4. Scaffolding shall be erected in such a manner as not to disturb any parts of the building
under construction, or in any way affect the guarantee of the roofing, exterior cladding,
or any other material and/or equipment being installed as part of the Work.
5. Contractor shall notify the CM 48 hours prior to the erection of any scaffolding, and shall
coordinate his/her efforts so as not to interfere with normal activities of the campus.
6.
Scaffolding shall be safe, secure, and properly maintained at all time. All necessary
provisions shall be made to protect the workers and the public against any hazard or
injury, and all property from damage. Contractor shall be held fully and solely liable for
any harm, injury or damage resulting from faulty, damaged, or weak scaffolding.
C. HOISTING AND LIFTING
1. Not applicable
SECTION 01 57 16
TEMPORARY PEST CONTROL
A.
RODENT AND INSECT CONTROL
1. Furnish and pay for the services of a licensed exterminating company approved by
Brooklyn College, from the time the Work is started until final acceptance for the
purpose of control of all rodents and insects. The exterminating company shall provide
all labor, material and equipment necessary to maintain complete exterminating
services in the building under construction and the surrounding ground areas within the
boundary lines of the Site, including all temporary toilets, field office, and storage areas.
2. Qualifications: The exterminating company must submit satisfactory evidence of at
least ten (10) years experience in this class of Work, including names and addresses of
at least five (5) business concerns for whom similar services have been performed by
the company within the past five (5) years. The service operators must be fully
uniformed when making regular scheduled or emergency service visits to the job Site.
3. Materials, chemicals and equipment used for exterminating purposes shall comply with
all rules and regulations of all applicable City, State and Federal agencies, including,
but not limited to, the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation,
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 40 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
Bureau of Pesticides and Radiation. The exterminating company shall provide copies of
all MSDS
4. At the pre-construction stage, Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the construction Site,
staging areas, and contiguous areas for any signs of rodent or pest presence. If
required tamper-proof bait stations for rodents shall be placed at minimum 20’ intervals
around the perimeter. Traps shall be checked regularly and if active cleaned and
replaced daily.
5. As part of the construction set-up, Contractor shall implement all preventive methods for
pest control, including but not limited to the following:
a. At eating areas for Site workers, provide rodent proof waste containers in sufficient
number to accommodate all waste without overflow between collection days.
b. All dumpsters shall be rodent proof and covered. At a minimum, dumpsters shall be
emptied weekly and waste containers daily.
c. Store all materials on racks a minimum of 18” a.f.f.
6. Inspections and treatments by service operators of the Site are to be made on a set day
once each week during regular work day hours for rats, mice, roaches, water beetles
and all other pests, with special attention given to the following conditions and/or areas.
a. Wet areas inside and/or outside the building, including all temporary structures.
b. Temporary toilet facility areas.
c. Field Office.
d. Wherever there is evidence of food waste and discarded food or drink containers in
quantity that would cause breeding of rodents or the insects herein specified.
e. Any other portion of the premises requiring such special attention.
7. Service operators shall report to the CM upon service completion of each scheduled or
emergency service visit to the Site, and shall furnish the CM Construction Project
Manager with a written detailed report of that area served and the conditions found in
that area.
8. Contractor shall use the least toxic treatments and materials for the duration of the
Project for rodent, termite, and vegetation control. All areas that receive treatment shall
have signs clearly posted inside and outside the facility. If an exterminating service is
engaged Contractor it shall be approved by the CM and apply methods as stated
above.
9. Use only soil treatments which are not injurious to plants.
10. It will be the responsibility of Contractor to see that the entire Site conforms to the
above regulations and that all subcontractors abide by the pest control requirements
listed herein.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 41 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
SECTION 01 65 00
REMOVALS AND DELIVERY
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1.
01 35 33 Site Safety
2.
01 54 23 Scaffolding and Hoisting
3.
01 74 13 Cleaning
B. REMOVALS & DELIVERY
1.
Contractor shall be responsible for removal and legal disposal of construction debris.
2.
Contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning up of his/her work area, including
surplus materials and the depositing of it in the containers at the completion of each shift
of Work.
3.
Debris resulting from construction activity will not be permitted to drop free from
openings but shall be removed only by the use of materials hoist, or closed, dust-tight
type rubbish chutes or other method approved by the CM. Hoists and chutes shall be so
protected as to prevent damage, staining or marring of any permanent work. Rubbish
dirt and other dust producing materials shall be wetted down to minimize air borne
particles.
4.
No debris or materials shall be passed through the finished openings of the exterior
walls, without proper protection of the openings in a manner approved by the CM.
5.
All materials shall be delivered to the work Site within a building by the stairs, ramps,
materials hoist, or other method approved by the CM.
SECTION 01 66 00
STORAGE
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Store and handle materials in a manner that prevents loss from weather and other
damage. Keep materials covered and off the ground, and store in a dry secure area.
2. Protect all materials and installations from damage by activities of other trades.
3. Materials stored on the floors of a building during construction or demolition operations
shall comply with Sections 3303.4.5.1 and 3303.4.5.2 of 2008 NYC Building Code.
SECTION 01 66 19
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
11. Manufactured materials shall be delivered to the Project Site in their original packages
and containers. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall not be used or stored on the
Site.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 42 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
12. All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,
connected, erected, used, and cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer' directions
unless otherwise specified.
13. Materials shall be new, best quality, free from defects and shall conform to the
specification list for that item.
14. Materials shall fully comply with all applicable reference standards and municipal
regulations.
B. TRANSPORTATION
1. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product or littering of
surrounding areas.
2. Driveways and parking lots may be used by Contractor only with the expressed
permission of CUNY in coordination with the CM Construction Project Manager, in
compliance with requirements of CUNY and municipal regulations. Any and all damage
to driveways and parking lots must be repaired by Contractor at Contractor’s expense to
the satisfaction of CUNY DDCM.
3. Do not drive any delivery vehicle over any un-paved or landscaped area of the Site. Any
damage to landscaped areas incurred during delivery of materials ore equipment shall
be repaired by Contractor at no expense to CUNY.
SECTION 01 71 23
FIELD ENGINEERING
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 77 19 Contract Closeout Procedures
B. EXISTING PROPERTY SURVEY
1. Identification: Contractor will be responsible to identify existing control points and
property line corner stakes.
2. Verify layout information shown on the Consultant’s drawings, in relation to the property
survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the work. Locate and
protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
a. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to
relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
b. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the
original Survey control points.
SECTION 01 71 33
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 74 16 Site Maintenance
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 43 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
B. Contractor shall protect adjoining public and private property from damage during
construction or demolition as per Section BC 3309 of 2008 NYC Building Code.
B. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect adjacent buildings, property of
CUNY, its occupants at the facility and property adjacent to the work Site from damage or
loss arising out of execution of this contract. Contractor shall assume responsibility for any
such damage or loss caused by them and shall, at his/her own expense, repair or replace
any property that becomes damaged or destroyed. The CM with the CUNY DDCM
Construction Project Manager shall determine whether affected property has been damaged
to such an extent that it can not be restored to its original condition and must be replaced.
C. Contractor shall be responsible to protect all Site work including all existing plantings and
trees within and adjacent to the work Site. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage
or loss to any plantings, lawn or open areas, and trees within or adjacent to the work Site
and shall, at his/her own expense, replace with same species and size any plantings and
trees which in the opinion of the CM become damaged.
SECTION 01 73 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 31 00 Project Coordination
B. CUTTING
1. Contractor and their subcontractors shall execute their removals in an accurate and
professional manner, with minimal damage to the adjacent finishes while observing
approved dust control procedures and all governmental regulations regarding the
removal and disposal of hazardous materials.
2. No cutting of beams, bearing walls or other structural parts of the building shall be done
without prior approval of the CM.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting of walls, floors, ceilings, etc., necessary for
installation of the Work
4. Contractor shall do all cutting necessary whether it is masonry cutting or steel cutting
(burning) to free all items to be removed with minimal damage to adjacent finishes. All
new work shall be fitted neatly into the existing. If removals expose poorly finished
surfaces or surfaces structurally deficient for attaching new equipment or items, the
exposed surface shall be structurally reinforced or refinished in an approved manner at
no additional cost to CUNY. Such conditions shall be brought to the attention of the CM
prior to remediation.
5. Drilling for expansion bolts, hangers and supports shall be done by Contractor subject to
the conditions stated in this Section.
6. Cut construction-using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining
construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with original installer and
comply with original installer's recommendations.
C. PATCHING
1.
Contractor shall patch and finish all adjacent surfaces left missing, damaged or
unfinished by the normal execution of the Work that makes up this Project. Completed
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 44 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
repairs shall match existing adjacent surfaces and shall include painting where
necessary.
2.
Contractor shall patch, repair and restore to their undamaged condition, all surfaces,
materials and equipment damaged through the course of construction and transportation
negligence of Contractor or his/her forces or suppliers. Completed repairs shall match
existing adjacent surfaces and shall include painting where necessary.
3.
All patching shall be done in a neat and careful manner, leaving the finished work free
from cracks, stains and defects in a condition acceptable to the CM. Contractor shall be
responsible to patch and finish all walls, floors, ceilings, and all other surfaces to match
the surrounding surfaces in all areas affected by the Work of this contract.
4.
Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface, restoring surface to a uniform color and sheen.
SECTION 01 74 13
CLEANING
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 74 16 Site Maintenance
2. 01 74 23 Final Cleaning
B. CLEANING – General
1.
Upon completion of the Work and/or at the end of each working day, each Contractor
shall remove from the premises all hazardous or flammable materials and assume
ownership of all debris resulting from the Work, and legally dispose of it unless otherwise
specified by the CM.
2.
As the Work in various areas is completed, they shall be broom cleaned and all rubbish,
debris, excess materials and tools and scaffolding shall be removed. In these areas,
Contractor shall thoroughly clean all surfaces, including all adjacent exterior areas.
3.
Contractor shall clean all paint spots, oils, plaster and stains from floors, walls,
woodwork, glass, hardware metal work and all similar items upon completion of any area
of Work.
4.
Dust control procedures as specified herein shall be employed throughout all Work. Wet
down dust with water spray where necessary.
5.
Finished surfaces, installed flooring, and equipment shall be protected with drop cloths,
plastic sheeting, or other appropriate protective devices. Drop cloths and other
protective devices shall be kept clean at all times. Plaster dust shall be removed daily
by commercial type vacuum cleaners.
6.
Plumbing fixtures, waste pipes, chases, pits, etc., shall not be used for the disposal of
any waste, paints, oils or other materials. Such areas shall be kept clean of all debris
and waste materials at all times.
7.
Contractor shall leave the premises broom clean at end of each day. Keep dirt and
debris to a minimum in the construction repair areas.
SECTION 01 74 16
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 45 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
SITE MAINTENANCE
A. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 01 35 33 -- Site Safety
2. 01 57 16 – Rodent and Insect Control
3. 01 71 33 -- Protection of Adjacent Property
4. 01 74 13 -- Cleaning
B. MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE
1. Contractor shall provide all necessary safety equipment, materials and personnel, to
protect the public walks, entrances to the buildings, grounds within the work areas of this
contract in order that pedestrians, College staff and students and the public be protected
at all times and shall post signs for safety as required by the NYC Building Code and all
other applicable regulations or as directed by the CM.
2. Contractor shall adequately enclose and protect areas against the weather where the
installation is incomplete at the end of the working day, and shall be responsible for any
damage or inconvenience due to his/her failure to do so. Such protection shall be done
to the complete satisfaction of the CM.
3. Contractor shall properly and completely protect all apparatus included in their
Agreement against dirt and damage. Contractor shall be held fully responsible for all
damage to apparatus, regardless of whether provided by him/her or belonging to CUNY,
until final acceptance. Any equipment furnished under the Agreement and any property
of CUNY damaged or destroyed by any Contractor or his/her employees shall be
restored to its original condition or replaced without cost to CUNY.
C. Contractor shall carefully protect and minimize damage to any existing Work that is to be
retained. Contractor shall be responsible for providing for a secured closed dust-tight
connection between existing and new construction, subject to approval by the CM.
D. Contractor shall protect and be responsible for the existing buildings, facilities, on-going
construction, and improvements within the areas of his/her operation under this contract.
Should any portion of the area be damaged, disturbed or otherwise affected due to the Work
of the Agreement, Contractor whose work was responsible shall report the conditions and
circumstances to the CM and shall make all necessary repairs and replacements to such
damaged work at his/her own expense and with new materials to match the existing Work in
every respect, as approved by the CM. Contractor shall restore or replace to their former
conditions and to the satisfaction of the CM, all existing or new construction, finishes, lawns,
plantings, and other improvements that are to remain and that have been damaged as a
result of his/her operation at his/her own expense.
E. Where existing Site assets, such as street lights, signs, hydrants, curbs, and any utility
services, public or private are to be retained, they shall be properly protected before and
during construction.
F. Contractor is to acquaint himself/herself with the existence and location of any surfaces or
sub-surface structures and utilities within the Project area, and is warned against the use of
heavy equipment over these utilities.
G. Should Contractor encounter any utilities or services during the performance of the Work,
he/she shall notify the Municipal Agency or Company owning or controlling services, to
disconnect these services if so required. Any services cut off or interrupted by Contractor’s
operation shall be restored at Contractor’s expense.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 46 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
H. Demolition and Removals shall be defined as the removal and disposal of such features as
accumulated debris, overburden, trees, curbs, walls of all kinds, abandoned utilities,
telephone poles and light poles, pavements and foundations and footings for same. All
materials shall be properly disposed of off the Site at no additional cost to CUNY DDCM.
SECTION 01 74 23 (01710)
FINAL CLEANING
A. Contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning upon completion of all Work. The premises
shall be cleaned to a neat and perfect condition satisfactory to the CM. This work shall
include washing of all windows and surfaces and mopping of all floors.
B. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface
or unit to the condition expected in normal residential building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions when finish materials require special
treatment.
C. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
D. Clean transparent and reflective materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable visionobscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent
materials.
E. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, equipment, cabinets, shelving,
etc., to a dust-free condition, free of joint compound, stains, film and similar foreign
substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition.
F. Broom clean concrete floors. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. Mechanically clean and polish
resilient floor tile. Clean ceramic tile, removing grout material left from installation, dirt and
grime.
G. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and
other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and
lamps.
H. Clean the Site of rubbish, litter, and other foreign materials. Remove any stains, spills, or
other foreign deposits from paved areas and sweep broom clean.
I.
Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards
for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the
Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage
systems. Remove waste materials from the Site and dispose of lawfully.
SECTION 01 77 13
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 47 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
A. General: This Section shall supplement the Substantial Completion requirements set forth
in the Agreement. In case of conflict, the Agreement shall control.
B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion, Contractor must complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial
Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed
as substantially complete.
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract
Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract
Price.
b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the
value of incomplete construction, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise the CM of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final Project photographs, if required,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the CM. Advise the
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
7. Complete startup testing systems and instruction of the CUNY's operation and
maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the Site,
along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.
9. Complete final cleanup requirements.
C. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of request for inspection, the CM and the AE will either
proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
D. The AE will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certification will be
issued.
E. The CM with the AE will repeat inspection when assured that the Work is substantially
complete. Results of the complete inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
acceptance.
SECTION 01 77 19
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A.
SUMMARY
1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including inspection procedures.
2. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate
Specification Sections.
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 48 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
B.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
1. This Section shall supplement the Final Acceptance requirements set forth in the
Agreement. In case of conflict, the Agreement shall control.
2. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final
acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
a. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and
completed operations where required.
b. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the
Contract Sum.
c. Submit a certified copy of the AE’s final inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected, endorsed and dated by the CM. The certified copy shall state that each
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
d. Submit final meter readings for utilities, if applicable, a measured record of stored
fuel, if applicable, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when
CUNY took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of
the Work.
e. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
f.
Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
g. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
3. Re-inspection Procedure: The CM and the AE will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of
notice that the Work, including inspection list items form earlier inspections, has been
completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances
acceptable to CUNY.
a. Upon completion of re-inspection, the CM will prepare a certificate of final
acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the CM will advise Contractor of Work that is
incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final
acceptance.
b. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated.
C.
COMPLETION PAYMENTS
a.
Upon receipt of all required items, the AE will issue a Substantial Completion
Letter.
b.
Contractor may then request Substantial Completion Payment (the “Final Voucher”)
after issuance of substantial completion letter by the AE. In such Final Voucher,
Contractor shall include the substantial completion letter and all such documents
and information as the CM requires as specified in this above sections.
c.
Contractor shall turn the Work over to CUNY in new condition, in proper repair and
in full adjustment, ready for use and occupancy.
d.
The CM will make Final Payment only after all such obligations of Contractor which
are listed in detail above are discharged; including specifically guarantees,
warrantees, as built drawings, waste manifests if any and Operations and
Maintenance Manuals. The CM shall not make final payment nor release remaining
retainage unless all required documents are turned over to the CM
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 49 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
D.
e.
The CM reserves the right to correct Partial Payments previously made before
issuing both Substantial Completion Payment and Final Payment.
f.
Acceptance by Contractor, or by Contractor's agent, of Final Payment, whether
such payment be made pursuant to any judgment of any court or otherwise, shall
constitute and operate as a release of CUNY and CM from any and all claims of
and liability to Contractor for anything done or furnished for or relating to or arising
out of Agreement, and for any prior act, neglect or default on the part of CUNY or
any of its officers, agents or employees excepting only a claim against its officers,
agents or employees for the amounts deducted or retained in accordance with the
terms and provisions of this Agreement or by law, and excepting a claim, not
otherwise waived, which is contained in the Verified Statement filed pursuant to
Section 11 above.
g.
Nothing in this Section shall be deemed to relieve Contractor of any obligation to
complete the requirements of the Contract Documents.
h.
Nothing in this Section shall be deemed to relieve the Contractor from the
obligation of giving timely notice of claim pursuant to any other provision of this
Agreement.
PARTIAL PAYMENTS
a.
Contractor may submit a requisition for a Partial Payment not more than once each
month.
b.
Such requisitions shall be in a form approved by the CM.
c.
Invoices shall certify that Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and Vendors have
been paid to date.
d.
The CM reserves the right to deny payment for Materials and Equipment in
advance of their actual incorporation into, or use in, the Work.
e.
The CM will retain five percent (5%) from each invoice until Completion.
SECTION 01 78 13
PUNCH LIST
A. PUNCH LIST
1. Contractor shall notify the CM in writing when all Work is completed. The notification
shall include a joint statement from each trade that they have closely inspected the Work
and that all offices, public spaces, classrooms, storage areas, toilets and all other interior
and exterior areas have been complete and/or restored in accordance with the contract,
that all damaged items have been replaced or repaired as per contract requirements,
and the entire building and grounds are ready for Punch List review by the CM and the
AE. The CM will then review the condition of the building and grounds at that time to
determine acceptability of the Work and will develop a Punch List of items requiring
correction.
2. The CM will deliver the Punch List to Contractor of uncompleted and/or unsatisfactory
Work. Contractor shall work expeditiously to complete all Punch List items within fifteen
(15) working days after receiving the Punch List from the CM. If Contractor fail to correct
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 50 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
all Punch List work within the specified fifteen (15) day period, the CM may complete the
Work with its own forces and shall withhold payment to Contractor in the amount of one
and one half (1-1/2) times the estimated cost of the work as determined by the CM.
Such withheld monies shall be backcharged against Contractor’s next Partial Payment
Requisition due and shall be deducted from the Final Payment in the form of a Credit
Change Order.
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals
1. Contractor shall submit three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual for all
operating equipment. Manuals shall consist of plastic covered three ring binders with
Project name lettered on the front. If possible, sheets shall be 8 1/2" x 11". When larger
sheets must be used, they shall be neatly folded to 8 1/2" x 11" and inserted as a
pullout. Each manual shall include:
a. Name, address, and trade of all subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers who
participated in the construction or furnished materials and equipment.
b. Complete maintenance instruction, name, address, telephone number of installing
Subcontractor and manufacturer's Local representative for each piece of operative
equipment and finish material.
c. Catalog data bearing the Architect's action stamp on all product data submittals.
Manufacturer's advertising or promotional literature will not be acceptable.
d. Manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, spare parts lists, and
descriptive literature for all components.
e. Preventive maintenance instructions and schedules for all major equipment.
f.
Instruction for starting and operating the actual system as installed.
g. Field test reports.
h. Copies of all guarantees and warranties issued by any manufacturer or
subcontractor for material or equipment installed as part of the Work.
i.
Any other information necessary for proper maintenance of any operating equipment.
B. Bulletins, Operating And Service Manuals
1. Submit three (3) sets of prints in the form of technical bulletins, operating and service
manuals, or other printed matter as a shop drawing, having diagrams or drawings
thereon of a material or equipment installed in the Work.
SECTION 01 78 36
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. GUARANTEES
1. Contractor and subcontractors shall make any required or directed adjustments, repairs
and replacement which are necessary because of faulty work or defective material upon
48 hours notice by the CM during construction, and by CUNY DDCM for a period set
forth in the individual specifications for each trade but not less than one (1) year after
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 51 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
completion of the entire job or until all permits and approvals have been received,
whichever is later. In the event that any portion of the Site is taken over by CUNY prior
to Final Acceptance, the guarantees for this portion only shall commence from the time
of takeover.
2. Guarantee the Work to be free of all defects. Replace or repair defective materials or
workmanship, and all damage to the work of other trades resulting from the replacement
or repairs during guarantee periods.
3. The acceptance shall be the date of final payment of the Work or the date of a formal
notice of acceptance, whichever is earlier.
B. WARRANTIES
1. Provide a special Project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer,
agreeing to replace, and/or restore defective materials and workmanship of mechanical
systems during the warranty period. "Defective" includes, but is not limited to, operation
or system failures, but is not limited to, operation or system failures, performance below
required levels, unsafe conditions, finishes, need for excessive maintenance, abnormal
noise or vibration, and similar, unusual, unexpected or unsatisfactory conditions.
2. The warranty period is for twelve (12) months, starting on the date of final acceptance of
the building by CUNY.
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Section 01 77 13 – Substantial Completion
2. Section 01 77 19 – Contract Closeout
3. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data
4. Section 01 78 36 – Guarantees and Warranties
B. RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS ( Contractor)
1. The CM at the Design/Construction kick-off meeting will furnish to Contractor and
subcontractors at no cost a complete set of existing drawings pertaining to the Work to
be performed under his/her Agreement. It is the responsibility of Contractor to modify
the drawings to indicate all changes and corrections, if any, occurring in the Work as
actually installed. Contractor is required to furnish all other drawings, such as addenda
drawings and supplementary drawings, as may be necessary to indicate all Work in
detail as actually completed.
2. All professional seals must be blocked out. Title box complete with Project title and
Consultants names will remain.
3. Contractor shall maintain, during the progress of the Work, an accurate record of the
Work as actually installed, on record drawings. These drawings shall be revised and
updated as necessary on an on-going basis, and shall be made available to the CM
upon request.
4. Contractor's attention is particularly directed to the necessity of keeping accurate records
of all subsurface and concealed work, so that the record drawings may contain this
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 52 of 53
Roosevelt Hall Renovation Project
Brooklyn College
information in exact detail and location. Drawings should also show all connections,
valves, gates, switches, cutouts and similar operating equipment.
5. Before substantial completion payment, Contractor shall furnish to the CM three (3)
complete set of record (as-built) drawings, in ink, indicating all of the work and locations
as actually installed, plus one (1) electronic copy.
6. Record (As-Built) drawings shall be of the same size as the Consultant’s Drawings, with
a 1/2-inch margin space on three sides and a 2-inch margin space on the left side
7. Each record drawing shall bear the legend "RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWING" in heavy
block lettering, 1/2-inch high and shall contain the following data:
RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS
Contractor’s Name
Contractor’s Address
Drawn by
Checked by
Date
Date
8. Record (As-Built) Drawing Title Sheet: Contractor shall prepare a title sheet of the same
size as Record (As-Built) Drawings and containing the following:
a. Name of the Project and Location
b. Contractor's Name.
c. Record of changes: a caption description of work affected, and the date and
recorded number of Change Order or other authorization of the change(s).
d. List of Record (As-Built) Drawings.
9. All changes from contract drawings shall be conspicuously encircled and identified by
change order number correlating to changes listed on "Title Sheet." Contractor shall
show within the encircled areas the Work as actually installed.
10. Bulletins, Operating And Service Manuals - Where Contractor has submitted prints in
the form of technical bulletins, operating and service manuals, or other printed matter as
a shop drawing, having diagrams or drawings thereon of a material or equipment
installed in the Work, he/she shall furnish three (3) sets thereof.
C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of
miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the
Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete
miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and
bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit for the CUNY's records.
D. FLOW AND WIRING DIAGRAMS
1. Provide detailed and simplified type, one-line, color-coded flow and wiring diagrams.
Provide to the CM in a frame with Plexiglas front. Mount on wall where directed by the
CM.
E. PERMITS, GUARANTEES, BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
1. Deliver to CM originals of all permits obtained by Contractor, including the Certificate of
Occupancy, and originals of all Contractors' guarantees, warranties, bonds and
Certificates of Controlled Inspections.
END OF DIVISION 01
Div. 01 General Requirements
Page 53 of 53
SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the unit masonry work as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
Concrete block walls and partitions.
2.
Metal joint reinforcing, anchors, ties, weeps, closures and related accessories for
masonry.
3.
Control and expansion joints in masonry, filled with joint fillers.
4.
Chases, recesses, pockets and openings in masonry as required for installation of
work by others.
5.
Building in of items furnished by others into masonry, including access doors,
door frames, anchors, sleeves and inserts, and other similar items to be embedded
in masonry.
6.
Grouting in of metal items built into masonry work.
7.
Protection, pointing and cleaning of masonry.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit Shop Drawings for the following:
1.
Anchoring details.
2.
Control and expansion joint locations and details.
Submit Samples for the following:
1.
Joint reinforcing, each type, width and proposed location (labeled).
2.
Anchors, wedges and ties, each type, width and proposed location (labeled).
3.
Joint filler, each type.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-1
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
C.
D.
Submit technical and installation information for the following:
1.
Mortar materials, each material and mortar type.
2.
Certification of mortar mix.
3.
Flashing material, descriptive literature.
4.
Concrete block, joint reinforcing, anchors, ties and joint filler; submit
manufacturer's technical and descriptive literature.
5.
Block manufacturer shall submit certifications of compliance with ASTM C 90, C
331 and UL 618 prior to any job site delivery. Field sampling of concrete block
may be tested by an Independent Testing Laboratory retained by the Owner
according to the requirements of ASTM C 140.
Construction Procedures (Submit the following)
1.
1.4
Procedures and materials for cleaning masonry work; including certification that
cleaner will not adversely affect stone, gaskets, sealants, etc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to the following non-cumulative tolerances (any masonry work not meeting
these standards shall be re-built as directed by the Architect).
1.
Variation from the plumb:
a.
2.
C.
Minus
Plus
1/8"
1/8"
Variation in dimensions of masonry openings:
a.
b.
B.
1/8"
Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls:
a.
b.
3.
In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises:
1).
In 10 feet
Horizontal dimension
Vertical dimension
-0" + 1/16"
+0" - 1/16"
Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the following:
1.
2005 ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures.
2.
2005 ACI 530-1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures.
Pre-Construction Conference: Prior to installation of masonry and associated work,
Contractor shall arrange a meeting with Masonry Subcontractor, installers of related
work, and other entities concerned with masonry wall performance, including the
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-2
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
Architect and Owner. Contractor shall record discussions and agreements and furnish
copy to each participant. Provide at least seventy-two (72) hours' advance notice to
participants prior to convening conference. Review methods and procedures related to
masonry work, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.5
1.
Review masonry requirements (drawings, specifications and other Contract
Documents).
2.
Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
3.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to masonry work and verify
availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to
make progress and avoid delays.
4.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting
procedures.
5.
Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping
with unfavorable conditions.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
General: Deliver, store, handle and protect all materials from damage, moisture, dirt
and intrusion of foreign matter. Store all masonry units and mortar materials on raised
platforms and under ventilated and waterproof cover. Store packaged materials in
manufacturer's unopened containers, marked with manufacturer's name and product
brand name. Immediately reseal containers after partial use. Remove and replace
damaged materials.
B.
Masonry Units: Pack, deliver and store to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping,
spalling or other damage. Store, protect and ventilate units at project site.
C.
Aggregate: Store with provisions for good drainage.
D.
Reinforcement and Anchors:
Store and protect so that when placed, joint
reinforcement and anchors will be free of soil, dirt, ice, loose rust, scale, or other
coatings which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar, and will not be disfigured or
bent out of shape.
1.6
CODE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Work of this Section shall conform to all applicable requirements of the New York City
Building Code.
1.
Concrete block shall comply with Reference Standard RS-10.
2.
Concrete blocks shall be type approved by the Board of Standards and Appeals.
a.
Concrete blocks used for fireproofing shall conform to New York City
Building Code requirements and shall provide ratings required by the
Contract Documents.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-3
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
3.
For special inspection of masonry construction, refer to Section 014100, "Testing
and Inspection."
B.
Fire rated masonry partitions shall have MEA number.
C.
Conform to New York City Local Law 17-95 for Seismic Requirements.
D.
Comply with New York City Section 32-05 of Chapter 32 of Title 1 of the Official
Compilation of the Rules of the City of New York regarding “Impact Resistant Stair
and Elevator Enclosures” when such enclosures are of masonry construction.
1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
In cold weather, when the outside temperature is below forty (40) degrees F., conform
to the requirements of "Cold Weather Masonry Construction and Protection
Recommendations" publication by Brick Industry Association (BIA). No anti-freeze
admixtures are permitted.
B.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and
humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout.
Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg. F. and above.
C.
Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry
when construction is not in progress.
D.
1.
Extend cover a minimum of 24" down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2.
Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other
wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24" down face next to unconstructed wythe
and hold cover in place.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to
be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in
contact with such masonry.
1.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings
spread on ground and over wall surface.
2.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-4
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Standard Concrete Block
1.
Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1, one source.
2.
Aggregates, ASTM C 331, lightweight expanded shale, clay or slate aggregates,
manufactured by the rotary kiln process equal to "Solite," "Norlite" or "Haydite."
a.
3.
All block shall be from one aggregate type and from one manufacturer.
Concrete Masonry Units: Load bearing lightweight aggregate concrete masonry
units conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 90.
a.
b.
Block at stair and elevator enclosurees block requiring acoustic separation,
and block for rated walls shall be 75% solid units.
All other block may be hollow units.
4.
The producer of the concrete masonry units shall furnish certification from an
independent testing laboratory confirming that all 8" or larger masonry units meet
all of the UL 618 requirements for two (2) hours or better (as required),
referencing full scale fire test reports (ASTM E 119). All 4" and 6" units shall
conform to "National Bureau of Standards" and "National Research Council" full
scale fire tests.
5.
Sizes and Shapes: Nominal face size 8" x 16" by thickness as indicated on
drawings, with stretcher units, jamb units, header units, square corner units (at
ends and corners of exposed or painted work), sash units (at control joints within
masonry wall), lintel units and other special shapes and sizes required to complete
the work.
6.
Finish: For exposed or painted block surfaces, in addition to ASTM requirements,
block shall have uniformly dense, flat, fine grain texture, with no cracks, chips,
spalls, or other defects which would impair appearance. For concealed CMU,
surfaces shall be free from deleterious materials that would stain plaster or corrode
metal.
7.
Curing: All concrete block shall be steam cured, and air dried for not less than
thirty (30) days before delivery.
8.
Density of concrete block shall not exceed one hundred and five (105) lbs. per
cubic foot.
9.
Shrinkage: Shrinkage of concrete blocks shall not exceed 0.065% when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 426-99.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-5
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
10. Water Content
a.
b.
B.
Joint Reinforcing for Masonry Walls
1.
For interior block walls and partitions, provide standard reinforcing fabricated of 9
ga. side and cross rods, truss or ladder design, no ties, spaced every other block
course. Provide prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections of walls or
partitions. Reinforcing shall be mill galvanized conforming to ASTM A 641,
Class B-1, applied after fabrication.
2.
Wire used in assemblies noted above shall be cold drawn steel wire conforming to
ASTM A 82.
3.
Approved Joint Reinforcing Manufacturers
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Hohmann & Barnard
Dur-O-Wal
Heckmann Building Products
National Wire Products Industries, Inc.
Anchors and Ties
1.
For anchoring masonry to structural steel, provide hot-dip galvanized steel anchors
as listed made by Hohmann & Barnard or approved equal manufacturer noted
above. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 153, with zinc coating of 1.5 oz. of
zinc per sq. ft.
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
At the time of delivery to the job site, concrete masonry units shall have a
value, in weight of contained water, of not more than thirty (30) percent of
the fully saturated content for the unit tested.
Ship all units from the factory, and store at the job site, with all necessary
protection to prevent increase of water content from rain and other sources.
No. 355 column anchors.
No. 356 column anchors.
No. 357 beam anchors.
No. 359 F anchor straps with VWT tie.
2.
For anchoring CMU interior partitions to underside of steel beams, provide
hot-dip galvanized steel tube anchor equal to No. PTA-420 made by Hohmann &
Barnard or approved equal.
3.
For anchoring CMU interior partitions to underside of structural deck, provide 4"
x 4" x 1/4" galvanized steel angles (ASTM A 36), 3'-0" long spaced 3'-0" o.c.
alternately on each side of partition. Anchor partition securely to structural deck
Reinforcing Bars and Rods: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. See Drawings for size.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-6
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
E.
Control and Expansion Joint Fillers
1.
Vertical Installation Within Concrete Masonry Wall: Extruded high grade
neoprene rubber, cross shape, for use with concrete masonry sash units, which
shall provide a force fit in the grooves of the sash block, and shall have 1/2"
diameter tubular ends (compressed 25% when installed in 3/8" wide joint).
a.
b.
2.
2.2
Provide the following sizes:
1).
2-5/8" wide control joint fillers for 4" block walls.
2).
4-5/8" wide for 6" block walls.
3).
6-5/8" wide for 8", 10" and 12" block walls.
Provide backer rod and sealant joint over joint filler as per drawings.
Isolation Joint Filler at Abutting Construction and at Intersecting CMU Walls:
Compressible and resilient closed cell neoprene gasket with pressure sensitive
adhesive backing, thickness 30% greater than thickness of joint. Acceptable joint
filler shall be "Everlastic, Type NN-1" by Williams Products, Inc., or approved
equal. Recess joint filler and install backer rod and sealant as per drawings and
Section 079200 of these specifications.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, standard color, one source.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S, as manufactured by Corsons, or approved
equal.
C.
Sand: Clean, washed, buff colored sand, graded per ASTM C 144.
D.
Water: Clean, fresh and suitable for drinking.
2.3
MORTAR MIX
A.
Interior Masonry Construction: Provide Portland cement/lime mortar conforming to
ASTM C 270, Type N, for load bearing conditions, mortar shall conform to ASTM C
270, Type M.
B.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction
of unit masonry. Use grout of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which
will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
C.
Mixing
1.
General: Add cement just before mixing and mix dry. Use sufficient amount of
water as necessary to produce workable mix. Mix in small batches to make plastic
mass.
2.
Mixing: Machine mix all mortars in approved type mixer with device to
accurately and uniformly control water. Add hydrated lime dry. Mix dry
materials not less than two (2) minutes. Add water, then mix not less than three
(3) minutes. Mix only amount of mortar that can be used before initial set. Do not
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-7
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
use mortar which has reached its initial set or two (2) hours after initial mixing,
whichever comes earlier. Mortar may not be re-tempered. Clean mixer for each
batch, whenever mortar type is changed, and at end of each day's work.
D.
3.
Acceleration or other admixtures not permitted.
4.
Mortar shall have a flow after suction of not less than seventy-five (75) percent of
that immediately after mixing as determined by ASTM C 91.
Admixtures
1.
No air-entraining admixtures or cementitious
air-entraining admixtures shall be used in the mortar.
materials
containing
2.
No antifreeze compounds or other substances shall be used in the mortar to lower
the freezing point.
3.
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used in
mortar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
3.2
Inspection
1.
Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation
may properly commence.
2.
Verify that masonry may be completed in accordance with all pertinent codes and
regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design.
3.
Do not start any work until mock-ups are approved by the Architect.
Discrepancies
1.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect in writing.
2.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
COORDINATION
A.
3.3
Carefully coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the
work of other trades with the work of this Section.
PREPARATION
A.
Concrete Block: Do not wet concrete block units.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-8
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General
1.
Build walls to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual
thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown.
2.
Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades.
3.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work.
After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work
immediately adjacent to the opening.
4.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with
uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement type joints,
returns and off-sets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs
and wherever possible.
5.
Lay up walls plumb and true with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated
with other work.
6.
Provide templates made of steel studs for plumbing of two story masonry
openings.
7.
Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry patterns as noted on drawings. If not shown,
provide running bond. Lay concealed concrete block with all units in a wythe
bonded by lapping not less than two (2) inches. Bond and interlock each course of
each wythe at corners. Do not use units of less than four (4) inches horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
8.
Where possible, masonry walls and partitions shall be built after all overhead
ducts, pipes and conduits are in place and tested. Masonry shall be neatly built
around the items above. Walls and partitions shall be plumb, true to line and free
from defects such as open cells, voids, dry joints and other similar defects. In
rooms and spaces scheduled to have concrete block finish, all such surfaces
including upper wall surfaces up to termination of structural ceiling in spaces
without suspended ceilings, shall be made suitable for paint application. Cutting
of openings in walls and partitions in place shall be done only with the approval of
the Architect.
Mortar Bedding and Jointing
1.
Lay concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical
face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on exterior walls and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, where solid CMU is used and where
adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout.
a.
2.
To ensure alignment of brick and block coursing, adjust block back-up by
cutting block to insure alignment of coursing or use adjustable anchorage.
Lay masonry walls with 3/8" joints unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-9
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
3.
Tool exposed joints of CMU slightly concave. Concealed joints shall be struck
flush.
4.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do
not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
C.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 1/2 block length in each course; do not
tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and
remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
D.
Built-In Work
1.
As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
2.
Mortar in door frames, access doors, louvers and other metal items embedded or
built into masonry work solidly with mortar as the masonry units are laid up.
3.
Grout under lintels, bearing plates, and steel bearing on masonry with solid bed
grout.
4.
Sleeves, pipes, ducts and all other items which pass through masonry walls shall
be caulked with interior grade sealant, so as to be air tight and prevent air leakage.
Pack voids in rated masonry walls with mineral fiber insulation.
5.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with grout which have anchoring,
reinforcing rods, supporting or hanging devices embedded in the cell including
stone anchors and window or curtain wall anchors.
6.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar on each side of door frames to
sixteen (16) inches beyond.
7.
Unless otherwise noted, fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with grout which
are below steel bearing plates, steel beams, and ends of lintels, to eight (8) inches
beyond bearing and from floor to bearing.
8.
Place wire mesh in horizontal joint below masonry unit cells to be filled with
mortar, to prevent mortar from dropping into unfilled cells below.
9.
Masonry indicated as being reinforced shall have all voids filled solid with grout.
Grout shall be consolidated in place by vibration or other methods which insure
complete filling of cells. When the least clear dimension of the grouted cell is less
than two (2) inches, the maximum height of grout pour shall not exceed twelve
(12) inches. When the least clear dimension is two (2) inches or more, maximum
height of grout pour shall not exceed forty-eight (48) inches. When grouting is
stopped for one (1) hour or longer, the grout pour shall be stopped 1-1/2" below
the top of a masonry unit. Vertical bar reinforcing shall be accurately placed and
held in position while being grouted, and shall be in place before grouting starts.
All such reinforcing shall have a minimum clear cover of 5/8". Lap all bars a
minimum of forty (40) bar diameters and provide steel spacer ties (not to exceed
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-10
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
192 bar diameter) to secure and position all vertical steel and prevent displacement
during grouting. Provide continuous horizontal reinforcement embedded in mortar
joints every second course.
10. Masonry walls to be fully grouted include 8” CMU walls designated for acoustic
separation, 10” CMU walls enclosing stairs and elevator shafts and any other
CMU walls noted on drawings to be fully grouted.
E.
F.
G.
Cutting and Patching
1.
All exposed masonry which requires cutting or fitting shall be cut accurately to
size with motorized carborundum or diamond saw, producing cut edges.
2.
Do not saw cut any masonry openings in face brick construction without
Architect's approval and after a procedure has been reviewed and approved.
3.
Holes made in exposed masonry units for attachment of handrail brackets and
similar items shall be neatly drilled to proper size.
4.
All masonry which requires patching in exposed work, if approved by Architect,
shall be patched neatly with mortar to match appearance of masonry as closely as
possible and to the Architect's satisfaction. Rake back joints and use pointing
mortar to match as required.
Solid Wall Construction
1.
Fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly with mortar by parging
the in-place wythe and shoving units into the parging.
2.
Tie wythes with continuous horizontal reinforcement embedded in mortar joints
sixteen (16) inches o.c. vertically.
Interior Block Partitions
1.
Build to full height unless otherwise shown on drawings. At non-rated partitions
fill void between CMU and structural deck with continuous neoprene filler. At
fire rated partitions, fill void with mineral fiber fire stop material. Fasten to
structure at top of partition using steel angles as specified herein.
2.
Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing every other block course, except as
otherwise noted. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire
length with a minimum cover of 5/8". Lap reinforcement a minimum of six (6)
inches at ends of units.
3.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L"
and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
4.
Corners
a.
Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-11
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
b.
5.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls
a.
H.
1.
Provide ties and anchors as shown or specified, but not less than one metal tie,
spaced not to exceed sixteen (16) inches o.c. horizontally and/or vertically.
Provide additional ties within 1'-0" of all openings and spaced not more than 24"
apart around perimeter of openings.
2.
Anchor masonry to structure complying with the following:
Provide an open space not less than 1/2" in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar
or other rigid materials.
Control and Expansion Joints
1.
Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry as shown.
Build in related items as the masonry work progresses.
2.
CMU Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place
vertical joints spaced not to exceed 20'-0" o.c. In addition, locate joints at points
of natural weakness in the masonry work, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.5
Unless vertical control joints are shown as part of structural frame, provide
interlocking masonry bond. Provide starters and special shapes as shown on
the drawings to bond these horizontal reinforcement using prefabricated "T"
units at interior partitions.
Ties and Anchors for Masonry Construction
a.
I.
Provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" reinforcement units, in
addition to masonry bonding.
At structural column or joint between bay.
Above control joints in the supporting structure.
Above major openings at end of lintels upward and below at ends of sills
downward. Place at one side of jamb for openings not less than 7'-0" wide
and at both sides for openings over 6'-0" wide.
At reduction of wall thickness.
Where masonry abuts supporting structure.
If additional joints are required, indicate same on approved shop drawings.
CLEANING, PROTECTION, ADJUSTMENT
A.
Protection
1.
The Contractor shall take adequate precautions for the protection of all surfaces
against mortar spatter, and shall immediately remove any such spatter should it
inadvertently occur, leaving no stain or discoloration.
2.
Excess mortar shall be wiped off the masonry surfaces as the work progresses.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-12
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
B.
3.
Wood coverings shall be placed over all such masonry surfaces as are likely to be
damaged during the progress of the entire project.
4.
Protective measures shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.
5.
Damaged masonry units shall be replaced to satisfaction of the Architect.
6.
Exterior masonry walls shall be draped with waterproof covering until copings are
in place, to prevent water penetration in cavity.
Clean-Up
1.
C.
Upon completion, all exposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned following
recommendations of the IMI Technical Note No. 20. Before applying any
cleaning agent to the entire wall, it shall be applied to a sample wall area of
approximately 4' x 4' in a location approved by the Architect. No further cleaning
work may proceed until the sample area has been approved by the Architect, after
which time the same cleaning materials and method shall be used on the remaining
wall area. If stiff brushes and water do not suffice, the surface shall be thoroughly
saturated with clear water and then scrubbed with a solution of an approved
detergent masonry cleaner, equal to "Vana Trol" made by ProSoCo Inc. or equal
made by Diedrich or approved equal, mixed as per manufacturer's directions,
followed immediately by a thorough rinsing with clear water. All lintels and other
corrodible parts shall be thoroughly protected during cleaning.
Pointing: Point any defective joint with mortar identical with that specified for that
joint.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
042000-13
Unit Masonry
July 28, 2010
SECTION 081113
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the steel doors and frames work as shown on the drawings and/or specified
herein, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Interior hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated and unrated door openings.
2.
Interior hollow metal vision panels.
3.
Preparation of metal doors and frames to receive finish hardware, including
reinforcements, drilling and tapping necessary.
4.
Preparation of hollow metal doors to receive glazing where required.
5.
Furnishing anchors for building into masonry and drywall.
6.
Factory prime painting of work of this Section.
7.
Doors and frames scheduled as smoke separations.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Wood Doors – Section 081416.
B.
Finish hardware – Section 087100.
C.
Glass and glazing – Section 088000.
D.
Gypsum drywall – Section 092900.
E.
Painting – Section 099000.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions,
label compliance, compliance with standards referenced herein, sound and
fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-1
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of doors and frames. Include details
of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of
construction, reinforcement for surface applied hardware, dimensions of profiles and
hardware preparation, location and installation requirements of door and frame
hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage
and accessories.
C.
Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers
for details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.
1.5
Coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing custom steel doors
and frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM
E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain custom steel doors and frames through one source from a
single manufacturer.
D.
Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
1.
Test Pressure: Test according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. After 5 minutes into the
test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40" or less above
the sill.
2.
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for
tested and labeled fire-protection-rated door assemblies except for size.
3.
Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a
temperature-rise rating of 250 deg. F. (or greater if required by Code) maximum in
30 minutes of fire exposure.
E.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80
that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
F.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
G.
Fire rated assemblies must have M.E.A. approval with UL label.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-2
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
H.
1.6
Work of this Section must meet the minimum standards of ANSI 250.4 and SDI-100
(Steel Door Institute); where more stringent requirements are specified herein, such
requirements shall apply.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B.
Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Minor damage may be repaired
provided refinished items match new work and are approved by Architect; otherwise,
remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C.
Store doors and frames under cover at building site. Conform to the requirements of
ANSI A 250-11-2001 for site storage unless more stringent requirements are noted
herein. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented
plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If wrappers on doors
become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between
stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FABRICATION – GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of
steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
B.
Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp
or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Weld exposed joints
continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to
conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
D.
Prepare hollow metal units to receive finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing,
drilling and tapping in accordance with Finish Hardware Schedule and templates
provided by hardware suppliers. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115
"Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware."
E.
Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings in accordance with locations
noted herein.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide products manufactured by Steelcraft, Curries, Ceco Door Products, or
approved equal meeting these specifications.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-3
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
2.3
FRAMES
A.
Materials
1.
B.
Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade cold-rolled steel
conforming to ASTM A 1008/A, Type B or commercial grade hot-rolled steel
conforming to ASTM A 1011/A, Commercial Steel, Type B. Metal thickness
shall be not less than sixteen (16) ga. for frames in openings 4'-0" or less in width;
not less than fourteen (14) ga. for frames in openings over 4'-0" in width.
Design and Construction
1.
All frames shall be welded units with integral trim, of the sizes and shapes shown
on approved shop drawings.
2.
All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and
free of defects, warp or buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and
of uniform profile throughout their lengths.
3.
Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on drawings.
a.
Frames at drywall partitions shall be formed with double return backbends to
prevent cutting into drywall surface.
4.
Welded frames shall have corners mitered and reinforced and faces of welded
frames shall be continuously back welded full depth and width of frame
conforming to NAAMM Standard HMMA-820; face joints shall be hairline.
5.
Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8".
6.
Frames for multiple or special openings shall have mullion and/or rail members
which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. All joints
between faces of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth.
a.
7.
Mullions shall have 16 ga. internal steel stiffeners welded not less than 4”
o.c.
Hardware Reinforcements
a.
Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for
fully-templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved
hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where
surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing
plates.
b.
Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
1).
Hinge and pivot reinforcements - seven (7) ga., 1-1/4" x 10"
minimum size.
2).
Strike reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-4
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
3).
4).
5).
8.
Floor Anchors
a.
b.
9.
Flush bolt reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge
Closer reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge
Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware - twelve (12) gauge.
Provide adjustable floor anchors, providing not less than two (2) inch height
adjustment.
Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be fourteen (14) gauge.
Jamb Anchors
a.
b.
Frames for installation in stud partitions shall be provided with steel anchors
of suitable design, not less than eighteen (18) gauge thickness, securely
welded inside each jamb as follows:
1).
Frames up to 7'-6" height - four (4) anchors.
2).
Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height - five (5) anchors.
3).
Frames over 8'-0" height - five (5) anchors plus one additional for
each 2'-0" or fraction thereof over 8'-0".
Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be
provided with minimum 3/8" concealed bolts set into expansion shields or
inserts at six (6) inches from top and bottom and twenty-four (24) inches o.c.
Reinforce frames at anchor locations with sixteen (16) gauge sheet steel
stiffeners welded to frame at each anchor.
10. Anchors in exterior frames and in masonry walls shall be hot dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153.
11. Frames for installation in masonry wall openings more than 4'-0" in width shall
have an angle or channel stiffener factory welded into the head. Such stiffeners
shall be not less than twelve (12) gauge steel and not longer than the opening
width, and shall not be used as lintels or load bearing members.
12. Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than twenty-six (26) gauge
steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or
plaster partitions.
13. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 3/8" thick x 2" wide steel.
14. All frames shall be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet
of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
15. Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than twenty (20) gauge
thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk
cadmium-or zinc-plated screws. Interior frames may be provided with snap-on
glazing stops.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-5
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
16. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on
strike jambs of single door frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double-door
frames.
17. Grout frames where scheduled. Acceptable Product: Gypsolite by US Gypsum
C.
Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed,
and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth. Frames shall then be
chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated on all
surfaces with one coat of rust-inhibitive baked-on alkyd primer standard with the
manufacturer which is fully cured before shipment to a dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
1.
2.4
Frames set in masonry walls shall be grouted in as described in Section
04800 – Unit Masonry. These frames shall have surfaces in contact with grout
shop coated with epoxy coating equal to Series 27 FC Typoxy made by Tnemec or
approved equal spray applied at 4 to 6 mils, passing NFPA 101, Class A for smoke
and flame spread, tested per ASTM E 84.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
B.
Materials: Doors shall be made of commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel
conforming to ASTM A 1008/A, Commercial Steel, Type B and free of scale, pitting or
other surface defects.
1.
Face sheets for interior doors shall be sixteen (16) gauge. Face sheets for exterior
doors shall be not less than sixteen (16) gauge and shall have a hot dipped
galvannealed coating conforming to ASTM A 924 and A 653, A-60 coating. The
zinc alloy coating shall be a dull matte surface treated for paint adhesion.
2.
Include mineral fiber or fiberglass core where specified, with minimum density 3.5
lb/ft3. Acceptable products: Roxul RockBoard 35.
Design and Construction
1.
All doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown on the approved
shop drawings, and shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible
seams or joints on their faces or vertical edges. Minimum door thickness shall be
1-3/4".
2.
All doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage or
buckles. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for the
gauge of metal used.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-6
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
3.
Face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous vertical formed steel sections
spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These
stiffeners shall be not less than twenty two (22) gauge spaced not more than six (6)
inches apart and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds not more than five
(5) inches o.c. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound deadened and thermal
insulated the full height of the door with an inorganic non-combustible batt type
material.
4.
Door faces shall be joined at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending
the full height of the door. All such welds shall be ground, filled and dressed
smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface.
5.
Top and bottom edges of all doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel
channel not less than fourteen (14) gauge, extending the full width of the door and
spot welded to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush closing
channel at their top edges and, where required for attachment of weatherstripping,
a flush closure also at their bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the
bottom closure of exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture.
6.
Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Hardware Reinforcements
a.
b.
8.
Single-acting swing doors - beveled 1/8" in two (2) inches.
Double acting swing doors - rounded on 2-1/8" radius.
No square edge doors permitted.
Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for
fully templated hardware only in accord with the approved hardware
schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where
surface-mounted hardware (or hardware, the interrelation of which is to be
adjusted upon installation - such as top and bottom pivots, floor closers, etc.)
is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates.
Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
1).
Hinge and pivot reinforcement - seven (7) gauge.
2).
Reinforcement for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders,
concealed or surface mounted closers - twelve (12) gauge.
3).
Reinforcements for all other surface mounted hardware - sixteen
(16) gauge.
Glass Moldings and Stops
a.
b.
Where specified or scheduled, doors shall be provided with hollow metal
moldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass opening sizes
shown on drawings.
Fixed moldings shall be securely welded to the door on the security side.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-7
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
c.
Loose stops shall be not less than twenty (20) gauge steel, with mitered
corner joints, secured to the framed opening by cadmium or zinc-coated
countersunk screws spaced eight (8) inches o.c. Snap-on attachments will
not be permitted. Stops shall be flush with face of door. Set glazing stops in
a continuous bead of sealant. U-shaped neoprene glazing gaskets shall be
continuous around perimeter forming an airtight seal.
C.
Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed,
filled and sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, level and free
of all irregularities. Doors shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint
adhesion and shall be coated, on all exposed surfaces, with manufacturer's standard
rust-inhibitive alkyd primer as specified for frames which shall be fully cured before
shipment.
D.
Flatness: Doors shall maintain a flatness tolerance of 1/16" maximum, in any direction,
including in a diagonal direction.
2.5
LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection
ratings as scheduled on drawings. Such doors and frames shall be labeled by
Underwriters' Laboratories or other nationally recognized agency having a factory
inspection service.
B.
If any door or frame specified by the Architect to be fire-rated cannot qualify for
appropriate labeling because of its design, size, hardware or any other reason, the
Architect shall be so advised before fabricating work on that item is started.
2.6
HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A.
2.7
The location of hardware on doors and frames shall be as noted in “Recommended
Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” of the
Door Hardware Institute unless otherwise required by prevailing Handicap Codes.
CLEARANCES
A.
B.
Fabricate doors and frames to meet edge clearances as follows:
1.
Jambs and Head: 1/8" plus or minus 1/16".
2.
Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8" Plus or minus 1/16".
3.
Bottom: 3/4", if no threshold.
4.
Bottom: 3/8", at threshold.
Fire rated doors shall have clearances as required by NFPA 80.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-8
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
2.8
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
A.
Manufacturing tolerance shall be maintained within the following limits:
1.
Frames for Single Door or Pair of Doors
a.
b.
c.
2.
Doors
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.9
Width, Measured Between Rabbets at the Head
1).
Nominal opening width +1/16", -1/32"
Height (total length of jamb rabbet):
1).
Nominal opening height + 3/64"
Cross Sectional Profile Dimensions
1).
Face: + 1/32"
2).
Stop: + 1/32"
3).
Rabbet: + 1/64"
4).
Depth: + 1/32"
5).
Throat: + 1/16". Frames overlapping walls to have throat
dimension 1/8" greater than dimensioned wall thickness to
accommodate irregularities in wall construction.
Width: + 3/64"
Height: + 3/64"
Thickness: + 1/16"
Hardware Cutout Dimensions
1).
Template dimensions +0.015", -0"
Hardware Location: + 1/32"
PREPARATION FOR FINISH HARDWARE
A.
B.
2.10
A.
Prepare door and frames to receive hardware:
1.
Hardware supplier shall furnish hollow metal manufacturer approved hardware
schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical hardware where necessary
to insure correct fitting and installation.
2.
Preparation includes sinkages and cut-outs for mortise and concealed hardware.
Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware:
1.
Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using templates.
2.
Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full
strength of reinforcements.
REJECTION
Hollow metal frames or doors which are defective, have hardware cutouts of improper
size or location, or which prevent proper installation of doors, hardware or work of
other trades, shall be removed and replaced with new at no cost.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-9
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine the areas and conditions where steel doors and frames are to be installed and
correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work.
B.
Preparation
1.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.
2.
Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely
brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the
following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
C.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular
line from head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated mortised and surfacemounted door hardware.
Installation
1.
General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Install frames in accordance with ANSI 250.11-20001, Recommended
Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, unless more stringent requirements
are specified herein.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of
opening.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-10
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
e.
f.
g.
3.
Frames set in masonry walls shall have door silencers installed in frames
before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
a.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
4.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
Solidly fill with grout where indicated on the door schedule. Use Gypsolite by
USG or approved equal.
5.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
6.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with post-installed
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and
fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to
supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other
structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted
anchorage to frame jamb members.
8.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
a.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
1).
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
2).
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-11
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
3).
b.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8
inch.
4).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):
Maximum 3/4 inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
10. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing"
and with standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.
a.
D.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced
uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c., and not more than 2 inches o.c. from
each corner.
Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or
otherwise unacceptable.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081113-12
Steel Doors and Frames
July 28, 2010
SECTION 081416
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the wood doors as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including
but not limited to, the following:
1.
Solid core flush wood doors.
2.
Fire rated flush wood doors.
3.
Doors and frames scheduled as smoke separations.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Hollow metal frames – Section 081113.
B.
Finish hardware – Section 087100.
C.
Glass and glazing – Section 088000.
D.
Field painting – Section 099000.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Submit door manufacturer’s product data, specifications and installation
instructions for each type of wood door.
1.
Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings.
2.
Include factory finish specifications.
3.
Include certifications to show compliance with specifications.
4.
Include certification to show compliance with WDMA TM-7 test for 1 million
slams.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, requirements for finishing and other pertinent data.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081416-1
Wood Doors
July 28, 2010
1.
C.
Submit the following
1.
1.5
Include requirements for veneer matching.
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10
inches for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,
provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be
expected in the finished work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
Illustrated"; latest edition "Premium" grade.
C.
1.
Only manufacturers that are certified and listed by AWI to be QCP qualified are
acceptable for this project.
2.
Provide letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with
requirements of grade specified.
Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with Category A, Positive Pressure or
Neutral Pressure testing standards per UBC 7-2-1997 and UL 10-C (UBC 7-2-1994 and
UL 10B) that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated on Door Schedule, based on
testing according to NFPA 252.
1.
D.
Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single
Conform to prevailing Code requirements to determine which pressure standard
(Positive or Neutral) is required.
The following LEED criteria are required for the products included in this Section:
1.
All composite wood, engineered wood, or agrifiber products (e.g., plywood,
particleboard, medium density fiberboard) shall contain no added ureaformaldehyde resins. Acceptable resins and binders include, but are not limited
to, phenol formaldehyde and methyl diisocyanate (MDI). Certification of these
products shall be in accordance with the Submittal Requirements.
2.
Wood materials shall be "FSC Certified" products (except recycled or salvaged
wood) which have been harvested in accordance with the "FSC Principles and
Criteria" for well managed forests developed by the Forest Stewardship Council
(FSC).
3.
Engineered wood (except FSC Certified or salvaged wood) shall contain a
minimum of 50% (combined) post-industrial/post-consumer recycled content (the
percentage of recycled content is based on the weight of the component materials).
Certification of recycled content shall be in accordance with Substantial
Requirements herein.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081416-2
Wood Doors
July 28, 2010
4.
1.6
Provide evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by a FSC accredited
certification body.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature
and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer,
and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are
defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) in excess of
permitted standard noted in Article 2.5 herein, or show telegraphing of core
construction in face veneers.
1.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to
repair or replacement of defective doors.
2.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of
Substantial Completion:
a.
Solid Core Flush Wood Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A.
Provide AWI PC-5 Premium Grade hot pressed 5-ply solid core particleboard doors, 13/4" thick, conforming to standards specified herein. Subject to meeting standards
specified herein, the following manufacturers are acceptable: Marshfield Door
Systems, Inc., Algoma Hardwoods Inc., or Eggers Hardwood Products Corp.
1.
Core shall consist of a formed flat panel consisting of wood particles bonded
together with synthetic resins or other added binder, with an average density of 30
to 32 lbs. per cubic foot. The material shall meet or exceed the requirements of
ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2 covering mat formed particleboard with face screw
holding of 124 lbs., modulus of rupture of minimum 700 psi and modulus of
elasticity of not less than 148,000 psi.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081416-3
Wood Doors
July 28, 2010
2.
Core shall be capable of satisfying this WDMA TM-7 cycle slam test for 1 million
slams for surface mounted hardware. Where the manufacturer's core does not
meet this criteria, stiles and rails must measure a minimum of 5-1/2" and must be
fabricated of hardwood.
a.
Surface mounted hardware must be installed with 1-1/4" screw penetrations
using threaded to the head screws; coordinate with Section 087100.
B.
Cross Bands: Shall be 1/16" thick hardwood extending full width of door and laid with
grain at right angles to face veneers. Cross bands and faces shall be laminated to the
core with Type I MF or PVA glue.
C.
Stiles, Rails: Stile edge bands shall be a minimum of 1-3/8" solid hardwood or
structural composite lumber (after trimming) laminated to the core. Stiles and rails
must be securely glued to the core with no voids allowed.
D.
Doors with transparent finish to have center balanced, slip matched, quarter sliced,
Select Maple veneer. Veneer to conform to AWI, "AA" grade veneer with 3" wide
leaf. Minimum veneer thickness shall be not less than 1/50" after sanding.
E.
Where glass lites are noted, factory cut openings. Trim openings with solid hardwood
moldings of same type of wood as face veneer. Lite openings in 20 minute rated doors
shall have manufacturer's 20 minute approved hardwood system. Set glazing stops in a
continuous bead of sealant. U-shaped neoprene glazing gaskets shall be continuous
around perimeter forming an airtight seal.
F.
Doors to be field painted shall have MDO or hardboard face.
2.2
FIRE RATED WOOD DOORS ("B" LABEL)
A.
Provide mineral core 1-3/4” thick solid core wood doors conforming to standards
specified herein, manufactured by one of the manufacturers noted above. Stile
construction on both stiles shall conform to the following:
1.
Stile edge screw withdrawals when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1037-78
shall exceed 650 lbs. This applies to both stiles.
2.
Stile edge split resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM D 143-52 (78)
Modified must exceed 950 lbs. This applies to both stiles.
B.
Door to have face finish as specified above in Article 2.1.
C.
Blocking: For surface mounted hardware only, provide composite blocking designed to
maintain fire resistance of door but with improved screw-holding capability of same
thickness as core and with minimum dimensions as follows:
1.
5-inch top rail blocking.
2.
5-inch bottom rail blocking.
3.
1 – 5" x 18" lock block at cylinder or mortise locksets.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081416-4
Wood Doors
July 28, 2010
4.
2 – 5" x 18" lock blocks at exit devices.
D.
Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles that are labeled and listed for
kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.
E.
Set glazing stops in a continuous bead of sealant. U-shaped neoprene glazing gaskets
shall be continuous around perimeter forming an airtight seal.
2.3
SHOP FINISH
A.
Transparent Finish: Finish in the shop with clear satin catalyzed polyurethane finish
conforming to AWI System “Catalyzed Polyurethane Transparent”.
B.
Opaque Finish: For doors to be field painted, shop prime on all surfaces with one coat
of alkyd wood primer applied to a dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Prefit and premachine wood doors at the factory.
B.
Comply with the tolerance requirements specified herein. Machine doors for hardware
requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware scheduled and door frame shop
drawings, and with hardware templates and other essential information required to
ensure proper fit of doors and hardware.
C.
Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in the factory.
D.
Doors shall be factory sized to door opening so that trimming and fitting are not
required in the field.
E.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform
clearances unless otherwise indicated.
F.
1.
Three degree bevel or bevel to suit frame sizes indicated, with 3/16" prefit in
width, +0/-1/32" tolerances. Prefit top of door 1/8" + 1/16"/-0" and undercut as
required by floor condition. Undercut shall not exceed 1/8" from bottom of door
to top of finished floor; where threshold occurs undercut shall not exceed 1/8"
from bottom of door to top of threshold.
2.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to
comply with DHI-WDHS-3 unless otherwise noted. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware
templates.
1.
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
2.
Provide concealed intumescent seals at fire-rated pairs of doors meeting the
requirements of U.L. 10 C.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081416-5
Wood Doors
July 28, 2010
G.
2.5
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable
requirements of referenced standards for kinds of doors required.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Once installed, maximum allowable warp, bow, cut or twist in doors shall be 1/16" as
measured by the 1/16 inch feeler gauge and a straight-edge extending from corner to
corner of the door face at stiles, top and bottom rails and along both diagonals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Wood Doors
1.
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to
hanging.
2.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.
Fit door to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously
worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge.
4.
Clearances: Install doors to meet clearance requirements specified in Section
081113.
5.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with
the requirements of NFPA No. 80. Provide clearances complying with the
limitations of the authority having jurisdiction.
Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or
otherwise unacceptable.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
081416-6
Wood Doors
July 28, 2010
SECTION 083473
SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Acoustical metal door systems, including doors, frames, perimeter seals, cam-lift
hinges, metal thresholds and accessories to maintain door operation and the required
STC ratings indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Perimeter seals and all other hardware for other doors (metal and wood) required are
specified in Section 087100.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sealants – Section 079200.
B.
Finish hardware – Section 087100.
C.
Glass and glazing – Section 088000.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
B.
ASTM E 90: Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
C.
ASTM E 336: Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound
Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings.
D.
ASTM E 413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-1
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Single Responsibility: Assign undivided responsibility of the sound retardant door
work to a single firm specializing in this type of work. The firm and their
personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience
with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and
specified. Do not engage a firm unacceptable to the manufacturers of the primary
materials to be used. The firm shall engage other specialist firms to perform any
part of the work which he is not equipped or qualified to perform properly with his
own personnel. Include the following major items of work in the scope of work for
undivided responsibility:
1.
Doors and frames.
2.
Gasketing and sills.
3.
Door hardware.
4.
Glass and glazing.
Qualifications:
1.
Provide doors and frames manufactured by a firm specializing in the production
of sound control doors.
2.
Provide sound control doors for fire rated openings manufactured by a firm
whose units are inspected, tested and listed by UL for single point hardware for
sizes and profiles shown.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with the label requirements of
NFPA and applicable local codes. Fabricate doors and frames which comply with
the requirements of NFPA Standard Number 80 for the class of door opening shown
and scheduled and which have been tested and rated by a Testing Laboratory
accepted by the local building authority.
1.
Provide Testing Laboratory’s label on each door scheduled or required to be
labeled. Include all information required by the local building authority.
2.
Provide anchors for labeled frames as required by the local building authority.
D.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop
drawings, and prior to fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work.
However, allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking of field measurements
before fabrication might delay work.
E.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built
into other work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer’s Data: Submit two copies of the manufacturer’s detailed technical
data for materials, fabrication, and installation. Include catalog cuts of hardware,
anchors, fastenings, and accessories.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-2
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
B.
Provide illustrations and descriptions of all seals and hardware items which will be
exposed on doors and frames.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of assemblies
which are not fully described by manufacturer’s data. Show all anchorage and
accessory items and finishes.
1.
Submit setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of
anchorage devices built into other work.
2.
Provide installation details applicable to the construction in which the sound
control doors and frames will be installed.
3.
Indicate construction, sizes, thicknesses, reinforcing, anchoring, and finishes of
all materials.
D.
Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each color and finish required. Samples will
be reviewed for color, texture and surface reflectivity only. Compliance with all
other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
E.
Submit certified test reports indicating that the acoustical performance of the door
meets the Sound Transmission Class (STC) performance as indicated in the door
schedule. Test data shall be produced from an accredited independent acoustical
laboratory which is a member of NVLAP (National Volunteer Laboratory
Accreditation Program). Reports shall indicate that the test was performed on the
doors and frames of the type to be supplied, in conformance with the requirements
of test method ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413. Earlier test reports will not be
acceptable. The test results shall be representative of the performance of the
proposed Sound Control Door assembly.
F.
Test reports by an independent Acoustical Engineer certifying a Field Sound
Transmission Class (FSTC) or Noise Isolation Class (NIC) in conformance with the
requirements of test method ASTM E 336, performance of no more than six points
below the laboratory STC performance on similar installations.
G.
Written guarantee that door is constructed in accordance with the laboratory tested
door and free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 3 years after
installation.
H.
Fire label as specified in the door schedule.
1.7
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Rated doors shall have a Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating as scheduled.
B.
Installed door assemblies shall meet Field Sound Transmission Class (FSTC) values
no less than 3 dB points below the specified STC ratings.
C.
Test shall be for proposed door, frame, threshold, seals and hardware. Doors shall
be fully operational at the time of the test.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-3
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
1.8
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Upon award of contract, and before commencement of building construction,
submit to the Architect any special requirements (scheduling, flatness of floor, etc.)
which are necessary to assure successful installation.
B.
Protect door systems during transit, handling, and storage to prevent damage,
soiling, and deterioration.
C.
Deliver frames to General Contractor with complete installation drawings and
instructions for installation by the General Contractor.
D.
Deliver doors to project site only after the building has been closed in. Store doors
in the building in a dry location and stack in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
E.
Protect door assemblies, especially sound gaskets, from damage before, during and
after their installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: The door assemblies shall be configured as indicated on the Contract
Drawings as follows:
1.
The weight of each door shall not be less than 9 psf.
2.
The door hardware shall be sized to support the weight of the door and provide
easy movement by one person.
3.
The gasketing system shall provide an airtight seal around the entire perimeter
of the door when closed. The force to compress the seal shall not exceed
29(ed.) pounds applied to the lockset.
4.
Provide a mechanism, manual or powered, appropriate to the door weight and
mode of operation (sliding or hinged) to release and reapply pressure on the
door seals. No floor track.
B.
Provide all door assemblies with complete frame assemblies, including the extended
frame(s), thresholds and joint covers required for split wall construction (if any).
C.
Provide door assemblies as scheduled, manufactured by Industrial Acoustics
Company, Krieger Steel Products Co., Overly Manufacturing Co., or approved
equal.
D.
Doors shall be 1-3/4" thick flush design of cold-rolled steel construction, 16 gauge
minimum thickness. The core shall be acoustically non-coupling and shall be noncombustible. Vision panels, where indicated, shall be of glazing in accordance with
the acoustically tested product, and be supplied by the door manufacturer.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-4
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
E.
Door and frames shall be factory mortised, reinforced, and fitted for heavy-duty
locksets, strikes, and closers. All hardware shall be supplied by the door
manufacturer as specified in the hardware schedule.
F.
Frames shall be formed to sizes and shapes indicated and shall have full welded
unit-type construction at corners and other joints and packed with glass or mineral
fiber. Frames shall be of cold-rolled steel construction. All contact edges shall be
closed tight. Welds on corners and exposed surfaces shall be pressed flush and
smooth. Steel frame members shall be pre-straightened, free of wind or twist.
Frames shall be factory-aligned to a diagonal tolerance of +/- 1/16".
G.
All doors all have cam-lift action hinges, closers, and aluminum thresholds. The
cam-lift shall lower the door onto the sill as the door is closed, and provide a tight
positive seal with the threshold. When opening, the door shall rise fast enough t o
minimize drag on the threshold.
1.
Surface strap or butt hinges are not acceptable.
H.
The cam-lift seal shall be a full mortised neoprene door bottom and shall close the
entire gag between the door and the floor. The cam-lift seal shall ensure a
continuous, positive seal at the floor with minimum friction, drag and roll of the
assembly on the floor.
I.
All hardware shall be finished as scheduled on the drawings.
J.
Perimeter Treatment:
1.
Clearance between frame and door shall not exceed 1/8". All sills shall be of
aluminum construction to insure a proper bottom seal.
2.
All head and jamb seals shall be magnetic or compression stop in a fully
adjustable retainer assembly.
3.
The door shall be supplied with a bottom closed cell neoprene seal covered in
Teflon type material and felt/neoprene compression seal at jambs and head.
The seal shall be adjustable with flush Phillips head screws, to conform to job
site sill conditions. Automatic drop bottoms will not be permitted. All screws
shall be flush with the door leaf; no surface exposed screw heads or bolts are
acceptable.
4.
Where a double leaf door is specified, the astragal shall be rabbeted or beveled
and contain neoprene compression and/or magnetic seals for the full height of
the door. There shall be no gaps in the seals at the head and sill of the door.
There shall be continuous pressure applied to the astragal to compress the seals
and prevent the leaves from bowing out and disengaging the astragal seals.
Double door acoustic test data shall be submitted. Single leaf test data will not
be acceptable for double doors.
5.
Door shall have an Underwriter’s Laboratory fire label if required (or certificate
if the door exceeds the maximum opening size) as called out in the schedule of
drawings.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-5
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions in which the work of this section is to be
installed, including condition of substrate to which the item is to be attached. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with the recommendations of the manufacturer for secure and
proper installation in accordance with final shop drawings. Install the work in
locations on the drawings, with proper clearances, elevation and anchorage.
Provide accessories indicated and anchors, inserts, and other items required for
installation of items and attachment to adjoining construction.
B.
Install seals so they are in intimate contact with the entire length of the jambs and
head.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF FRAMES
A.
Comply with provisions of SDO-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Place all frames for acoustical doors after all walls are set and in place. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set.
C.
In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
D.
At in-place concrete, masonry or steel construction, set frames and secure t o
adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices in
accordance with all approved shop drawings.
E.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with grout where anchors are to be built-in
to masonry construction.
F.
Grouting of frames complete with any rebar reinforcement and installation of
insulation in the frame, shall be performed by the installing contractor as part of his
work to insure the acoustical and structural integrity of the assembly.
G.
Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80.
H.
Remove spread bars only after frames have been properly set and secured.
3.4
DOOR INSTALLATION
A.
Fit acoustical doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100 and
as herein specified.
B.
Doors must be installed plumb and aligned.
C.
Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Std. No. 80.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-6
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
D.
3.5
Adjust all automatic or adjustable acoustical perimeter and drop seals to insure a
tight fit per manufacturer’s recommendation.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
B.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items and
acoustical seals, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and
proper operation condition. Check for any air, light (and sound) gaps at door
jambs, heads and sills, and adjust seals as necessary.
C.
Upon completion of the installation, put each operating component through at
least 10 operating cycles. Adjust to achieve optimum operation.
3.6
FIELD SUPERVISION
A.
3.7
The door manufacturer shall provide factory trained supervision personnel during
installation and final adjustment of sound seals. The manufacturer shall issue a
letter of compliance certifying the completion of a successful installation.
FIELD TESTING
A.
If required, the Owner will retain the services of an independent acoustical
consultant to conduct an acoustical test at any designated door locations where
noise transmission is suspected of being below the set criteria. The test shall consist
of a Field Sound Transmission Class (FSTC) or Noise Isolation Class (NIC) test per
ASTM E 336. If such results indicate non-conformance with the established FSTC
or NIC requirements, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and
manufacturer to correct, at their expense, such deficiencies by methods that shall be
approved by the Acoustical Consultant and Owner prior to incorporation.
Acoustical tests shall be repeated and corrective measures devised and incorporated
until the set criteria and performance standards are met. If the Acoustical
Consultant or Architect determines that the materials are not as specified herein, all
costs for the initial acoustical test as well as the cost of all retesting shall be borne
by the Contractor and the Manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
083473-7
Sound Control Door Assemblies
June 25, 2010
SECTION 087100
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
The required hardware items for doors are indicated in hardware sets shown herein.
Should any opening be omitted, hardware shall be provided as specified for other doors
of similar locations, function, quality and design.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: All finish hardware shall conform to all the following standards:
1.
Testing Laboratories: Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and or Warnock Hersey Fire
Laboratories Division: All fire rated doors shall have hardware assemblies
approved by one of the listed laboratories. Panic hardware UL Listed only.
2.
National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA).
4.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5.
American Disabilities Act (ADA).
B.
Supplier: Finish hardware shall be furnished by those having a minimum of 5 years of
builders hardware experience and shall have in their employ at least one certified
Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) to correctly interpret the plans, detailed
drawings and specifications.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the general
contract documents.
B.
Hardware Schedule: Submit three (3) copies of a vertical hardware schedule.
Horizontal schedules will not be accepted. Follow Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
guide lines for scheduling. At the end of the schedule list each door number with
appropriate heading number and hardware set number. Furnish initial draft of schedule
at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work. Furnish
final schedule after samples, manufacturer's data sheets have been approved.
C.
Product Data: Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer's data for each item of
hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with
requirements.
D.
Keying Schedule: A key schedule showing all key numbers and spaces to which each
permits entry, shall be provided. Consult with Owner before submitting final key
schedule. After final approval has been received, the schedule and the key cabinet,
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
along with the key gathering envelopes containing keys for each lock endorsed with
lock number and space designation, shall be turned over to the Owner.
E.
1.05
Samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to delivery of
hardware, submit one (1) sample of each exposed hardware unit. Sample will be
reviewed by the Architect for design, color and texture only. Compliance with other
requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Samples approved by the
Architect shall be turned over to the Owner for attic stock.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Handle, store, distribute, protect and install in accordance with the manufacture's
instructions. Deliver packaged material in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact. Deliver assemblies completely identified and with adequate protection for
storage, handling and installation.
B.
Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware which are not immediately
replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses;
both before and after installation.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with
identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation
instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors
and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated
and as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver packaged hardware items
to the proper locations for installation.
B.
Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory prepared for the installation of hardware.
1.07
A.
WARRANTIES
The hardware manufacturers shall provide full replacement warranty as listed below.
Replacement warranty shall not include any labor cost.
1.
Surface Closers
10 years.
2.
Exit Devices
3 years.
3.
Locksets etc.
1 year
4.
Balance of hardware
1 year
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
A.
Hand of Door: The drawings show the swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each
item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing shown.
B.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated,
using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness but in no
case of lesser quality material.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
C.
Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been
prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws.
D.
Screws: Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Finish exposed
screws to match the hardware finish.
E.
Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed, for the
Owner continued maintenance, removal and replacement of hardware.
F.
Concealed Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units, which are
exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard manufacturer's units
are available with concealed fasteners. Use thru bolts only where necessary to
adequately fasten hardware to the door.
2.02
HINGES
A.
Unless otherwise noted, all hinges shall be full mortise five knuckle ball bearing type
template, with non-rising loose pins. All out swinging doors shall be furnished with
non-removable pins (NRP).
B.
All hinges for 1-3/4" thick doors shall be 4-1/2" wide in the open position. For other
thickness doors hinges shall be of a width to permit unobstructed swing of the doors.
C.
Size and weight of hinges shall conform to the following:
1.
Up to 36"
4-1/2" standard weight
2.
Over 36" to 42"
5" heavy weight
3.
42" and over Zero Continuous Hinge 910DBAA
D.
Quantity of hinges shall be provided to conform to the following:
1.
Doors up to 60" in height
2 hinges
2.
Doors 60" to 90" in height
3 hinges
3.
Doors 90" and over l hinge every 30" in height
E.
All hinges shall be the products of one manufacturer.
2.03
A.
2.04
LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS
Unless otherwise noted, all locksets and latchsets shall be heavy duty mortise type,
function as specified in hardware sets. Furnish wrought steel box strikes. Furnish
curved lip strikes with proper lip lengths as required.
KEYS, KEYING AND CYLINDERS
A.
Keys: shall be nickel silver. All keys shall have visual key control and words "DO
NOT DUPLICATE' embossed on one side. Furnish a quantity of keys as follows.
1.
Grand Master Keys
10
2.
Master Keys
10 each per group
3.
Change Keys
3 each per cylinder
4.
Control Keys
10
5.
Construction Keys
20
B.
Keying: All locks shall be construction keyed and grand master keyed to the existing
Best keying system. Hardware supplier shall meet with Owner to establish keying
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
requirements for this project. All master keys shall be hand delivered to the Owner by
the manufacturer or his representative.
C.
2.05
Cylinders:
All cylinders shall have seven pin removable core with visual key control.
DOOR CLOSING DEVICES
A.
All surface closers shall meet ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 requirements, barrier free.
B.
All closers shall be installed so that closer bodies are positioned on room side of doors
to and from corridors, i.e., in-swing doors shall be regular arm. Out-swing doors shall
have a parallel arm. Regular arm shall be used in connecting doors between rooms.
C.
Furnish all brackets, drop plates and any other necessary hardware required to insure
proper installation.
2.06
FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS
A.
Manual Flush Bolts: Shall be Trimco W3917/3916 series furnish 3910 dustproof strikes
for all bottom bolts. Top bolts shall be furnished with proper extensions to allow for
easy operation.
B.
Self Latching Flush Bolts: Shall be Trimco 3820/3825 series furnish 3910 dustproof
strikes for all bottom bolts. Furnish wear plates as required.
C.
Automatic Flush Bolts: Shall be Trimco 3810/3815 series furnish 3910 dustproof
strikes for all bottom bolts. Furnish wear plates as required.
D.
Coordinators: Shall be Trimco 3094 series. Furnish all fillers, mounting brackets, carry
bars and special cutouts for use with exit devices, as required. Finish shall be PC.
E.
All flush bolts and coordinators shall be the products of one manufacturer.
2.07
PROTECTION PLATES
A.
All kick plates shall be 16” high x 2”less door width x .050 thick x beveled 3 edges.
B.
All mop plates shall be 8” high x 2”less door width x .050 thick x beveled 3 edges.
C.
All armor plates shall be 34” high x 2”less door width x .050 thick x beveled 3 edges.
2.08
A.
2.09
A.
OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
All overhead stops and holders for interior hollow metal doors shall be Dorma 710S series,
and for interior wood doors furnish Dorma 700S series.
DOOR STOPS
All door stops shall be wall type Trimco 1270WV series. Where wall stops will not
function properly, furnish floor stops Trimco W1211.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Approval: As soon as practical after award of Contract and before a hardware schedule
is prepared, and before any hardware is ordered or delivered to the project, the
Contractor shall submit to the Architect for his written approval, copies of sample list,
listing each of the different items of builders hardware and catalog cuts of each item.
B.
Templates: As soon as the hardware schedule is approved the hardware supplier shall
furnish to the various fabricators, required templates for fabrication purposes.
Templates shall be made available not more than (10) days after receipt of the approved
hardware schedule.
C.
Packaging and Marking: All hardware shall be shipped with proper fastenings for
secure application. Each package of hardware shall be legibly marked indicating the
part of the work for which it is intended. Markings shall correspond with the item
numbers shown on the approved hardware schedule. Keys shall be tagged within each
package set and plainly marked on the face of the envelope with the key control
number, door designation and all identification as necessary.
D.
Delivery: Delivery shall be made to the project site to the attention of the Contractor.
Where delivery of special hardware is required at any fabricator’s plant, the hardware
supplier shall make such delivery.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware" by BHMA, unless otherwise noted or directed by the Architect.
B.
Install each hardware unit in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication
recommended by manufacturer. Replace units that cannot be adjusted.
B.
Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance
make a final check, and adjust all hardware items in such space or area. Adjust door
control devices and compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment.
C.
Instruct Owner personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and
hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
3.04
HARDWARE SETS
A.
The following is a general listing of hardware requirements and is not intended for use
as a final hardware schedule. Any items of hardware required by established standards
or practices, or to meet state and local codes or proper door operation shall be furnished
whether or not specifically called out in the following listed groups.
B.
Items as specified in hardware sets are to be the products of the listed manufacturers.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
C.
Note that numbering system used coordinates with set numbers for Brooklyn College
Performing Arts Center new construction to avoid confusion.
HARDWARE SET # 1
Each to have:
1
1
1
3
Hinges
Office Lock
Door Closer w/stop
Kick Plate
Silencers
PBB (as required) x US26D
Sargent 8205 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616IS-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco 1229A
HARDWARE SET # 1B
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
Office Lock
Door Closer
Door Stop
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Saddle
PBB (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8205 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616AF-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 367A
Zero (as detailed)
HARDWARE SET # 1C
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
3
Hinges
Office Lock
Door Closer
Door Stop
Kick Plate
Silencers
PBB (as required) x US26D
Sargent 8205 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616AF-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco 1229A
HARDWARE SET # 1D
Each to have:
1
1
1
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Saddle
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 367A
Zero (as detailed)
HARDWARE SET # 2
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
Storeroom Lock
Door Closer
Mounting Bracket
Door Stop
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Saddle
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
PBB (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8204 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616AF-FC x Alum
Zero 870SPB x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 369A
Zero (as detailed)
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
HARDWARE SET # 2D
Each to have:
1
1
1
Hinges
Storeroom Lock
Door Closer w/stop
Set Smoke Seals
PBB (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8204 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616DS-FC x Alum
Zero 188S-BK @ jambs & head
HARDWARE SET # 3
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
Passage Set
Door Closer
Door Stop
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Saddle
PBB (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8215 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616AF-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 369A
Zero (as detailed)
HARDWARE SET # 5
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
Classroom Lock
Door Closer
Door Stop
Kick Plate
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Saddle
PBB (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8237 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616AF-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 367A
Zero (as detailed)
HARDWARE SET # 5A
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
Classroom Lock
Door Closer w/stop
Kick Plate
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Saddle
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
PBB (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8237 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616IS-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 367A
Zero (as detailed)
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
HARDWARE SET # 5G
Each to have:
1
1
1
Continuous Hinges
Classroom Lock
Door Closer w/stop
Zero 910DBAA x US26D
Sargent 8237 x LNE x US32D
Dorma 8616IS-FC x Alum
Note: the acoustical door manufacturer shall provide the balance of the hardware.
HARDWARE SET # 8
Each to have:
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
Hinges
Automatic Flush Bolts
Classroom Lock
Dummy Trim
Set Coordinating Closer
Set Sound Seals
Door Bottom
Astragal Seals
Saddle
PBB (see description) x US26D
Trimco (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8237 x LNE x US32D
Sargent 8293 x LNE X US32D
Dorma TS93GSR series x Alum
Zero 870A @ jambs & head
Zero 367A
Zero 328A
Zero (as detailed)
HARDWARE SET # 8A
Each to have:
2
1
1
1
1
6
Hinges
Automatic Flush Bolts
Classroom Lock
Dummy Trim
Set Coordinating Closer
Saddle
Silencers
PBB (see description) x US26D
Trimco (see description) x US26D
Sargent 8237 x LNE x US32D
Sargent 8293 x LNE X US32D
Dorma TS93GSR series x Alum
Zero (as detailed)
Trimco 1229A
HARDWARE SET # 9
Each to have:
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
Hinges
Set Push & Pull
Dead Lock
Door Closer
Door Stop
Kick Plate
Mop Plate
Silencers
PBB (see description) x US26D
Trimco 1894-4B x US32D
Sargent 4877 x US26D
Dorma 8616AF-FC x Alum
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco (see description) x US32D
Trimco 1229A
END OF SECTION 08710
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
087100
FINISH HARDWARE
July 28, 2010
SECTION 088000
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,
including but not limited to glazing of the following:
1.
Interior borrowed lites.
2.
Laminated glass at observation windows at control booth.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Hollow metal doors and frames – Section 081113.
B.
Wood doors – Section 081416.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement
and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and
installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B.
Glass units shall be annealed, heat strengthened, fully tempered or laminated where
required to meet wind load and safety glazing requirements, as shown, specified or
recommended by the glass fabricator and as required by the prevailing Building Code.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard
details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material
used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified
requirements.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-1
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
B.
1.6
Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each glass and glazing
material that is to be exposed in completed work. Show full color ranges and finish
variations expected. Provide glass samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in. and 6
in. long samples of sealants and glazing materials; all samples shall bear the name of
the manufacturer, brand name, thickness, and quality.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source: For each glass and glazing type required for work of this Section, provide
primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or
accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.
B.
Installer: A firm with a minimum of five years experience in type of work required by
this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials; and with a
successful record of in-service installations similar in size and scope to this Project.
C.
Glass Thickness: Glass thicknesses shown on drawings and/or specified herein are
minimum thicknesses. Determine and provide size and thickness of glass products that
are certified to meet or exceed performance requirements specified in this Section.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
E.
1.7
1.
GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design
Guide".
2.
SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines for Sealed
Insulating Glass Units".
Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products
permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification
Council.
2.
Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in
Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one
side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9
sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that
comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where
Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and
handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and
GANA Manual.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-2
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
1.
Protect materials from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame.
2.
Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A.
Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I-Transparent, Flat, Class 1-Clear, Quality q3,
minimum 1/4" thick.
B.
Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (Transparent,
Flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3, Kind FT, minimum 1/4" thick. Tempered glass must
be certified by SGCC to meet applicable standards. Tempered glass shall also conform
to the following:
C.
1.
Length and Width: For 2.9 mm to 6.0 mm; +/=1.6 mm.
2.
Diagonal: +/- 3,0 mm.
3.
Edgework: Belt seaming or diamond wheels. 1.5 mm seam of upper and lower
glass edges. No sharp edges.
4.
Corners: No more than 3.0 mm from square.
5.
Float Glass Defects: Must meet the requirements of ASTM C 1036. The most
common defects are scratches, stones gaseous bubbles and edge chips. Tables in
the glass standards have limits for size/quantity of defects.
6.
Tempered glass shall have a minimum surface compression of 10,000 psi.
7.
Bow in Glass: Maximum allowable bow shall be on 50% of values shown in
tables in ASTM C 1048.
8.
Roller Waves: Maximum 0.076 mm for 6 mm.
Laminated Safety Glass: Provide two glass panes of equal thickness, laminated
together with a polyvinyl butyl interlayer, conform to ASTM C 1172, and as follows:
1.
Interlayer Color: Clear.
2.
Interlayer Material: Provide Monsanto "Saflex" or DuPont "Butacite," 0.030"
thick at vertical applications, and 0.060" thick at sloped or horizontal applications.
3.
Minimum thickness of 1/4".
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-3
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
2.2
GLAZING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A.
General: Provide sealants and gaskets with performance characteristics suitable for
applications indicated. Ensure compatibility of glazing sealants with insulated glass
sealants, with laminated glass interlayers, and with any other surfaces in contact.
B.
General Glazing and Cap Bead Sealant: Provide sealant with maximum Shore A
hardness of 50. Provide one of the following:
1.
Dow Corning 795.
2.
General Electric Silglaze N 2500 or Contractors SCS-1000.
3.
Tremco Spectrem 2.
C.
Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Provide molded or extruded neoprene
or EPDM gaskets, Shore A hardness of 75+5 for hollow profile, and 60+5 for solid
profiles, ASTM C 864.
D.
Cellular, Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: Provide extruded or molded closed cell,
integral-skinned neoprene, Shore A 40+5, and 20% to 35% compression, ASTM
C-509; Type II.
E.
Preformed Glazing Tape: Provide solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene rubber with
100% solids content complying with ASTM C1281 AAMA A 800 with integral
continuous EPDM shim. Provide preformed glazing tape in extruded tape form.
Provide Tremco “Polyshim II” or approved equal.
F.
Setting Blocks: Provide 100% silicone blocks with Shore A hardness of 80-90.
Provide products certified by manufacturer to be compatible with silicone sealants.
Length to be not less than 4”. Width for setting blocks to be 1/16” more than glass
thickness and high enough to provide the lite recommended by glass manufacturer.
When thickness of setting block exceeds 3/4” the glass manufacturer must be consulted
for sizes and configuration. In a vented system, setting block shall be designed so as to
not restrict the flow of water within the glazing rabbet to the weep holes.
1.
Shims: For shims used with setting blocks, provide same materials, hardness,
length and width as setting blocks.
2.
Structural Silicone Glazing: Provide silicone setting blocks where structural
silicone occurs at sills and at insulated units with silicone edge seals.
G.
Edge Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing
sealants. Provide blocks with Shore A hardness of 55+5.
H.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place.
I.
Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide sealant backer rods, primers, cleaners, and
sealers of type recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-4
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
2.3
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A.
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated
for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite
complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that
produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
and offsets at corners.
2.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
3.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Shop Drawings, provide necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-5
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced
glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in
thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as
follows:
1.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless
gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
J.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
K.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner
recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal
corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
L.
Flush Glazing
1.
If the butt joint in the metal framing is in the vertical direction, the glazier shall
run the tape initially on the head and sill members going directly over this joint.
Should the butt joint in the metal framing run horizontally, tapes must first be
applied to the jambs so that it crosses over the joint.
2.
Each tape section shall butt the adjoining tape and be united with a tool to
eliminate any opening.
3.
Do not overlap the adjoining length of tape or rubber shim as this will prevent full
contact around the perimeter of glass.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-6
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
M.
3.4
Off-Set Glazing
1.
Where the glazing legs are off-set, the difference in the rabbet width shall be
compensated by employing different glazing tapes with different diameter shims.
The difference in shim shall be equal to the size of the off-set. The thinner tape
shall be positioned first on the glazing leg closest to the interior. The thicker tape
shall be cut to the exact length of the dimension between the applied tapes, and
installed on the outermost glazing leg.
2.
Immediately prior to setting glass, paper backing shall be removed. Apply a toe
bead of sealant 6” in each direction, from each corner.
3.
Locate setting blocks in the sill member at quarter points, or if necessary to within
6” of each corner. Setting blocks must be set equal distance from center line of
the glass and high enough to provide the recommended bite and edge clearances.
4.
Set edge block according to glass manufacturer’s recommendations.
5.
Set Glass: The glass shall be pressed firmly against the tape to achieve full
contact.
6.
In a vented system, apply a heel bead (air seal) of sealant around the perimeter of
glass, between the sole of the I.G. unit and the base of the rabbet of the metal
framing developing a positive bond to the unit and to the metal framing. The bead
of the sealant shall be deep enough so that it will partially fill the channel to a
depth of 1/4” between the glass edge and the base of the metal framing rabbet.
7.
Interior stops shall be set, and glazing tape spline for the appropriate face
clearance shall be rolled into place, compressing the glass to the shim within the
glazing tape.
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft
compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to
lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and
work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal
without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-7
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
3.5
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants
cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth
of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended
by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any
way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
088000-8
Glass and Glazing
July 28, 2010
SECTION 092900
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
complete the gypsum drywall as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Gypsum board work for partitions, ceilings, column enclosures, furring, and
elsewhere where gypsum drywall work is shown on drawings.
2.
Metal supports for gypsum drywall construction.
3.
Acoustical insulation for gypsum drywall work.
4.
Sealant for gypsum drywall work.
5.
Concealed metal reinforcing for attachment of railings, toilet partitions and other
items supported on drywall partitions and walls.
6.
Taping and finishing of drywall joints.
7.
Installing rings and frames in drywall surfaces for grilles, registers and lighting
fixtures.
8.
Bracing and connections.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Hollow metal door frames – Section 081113.
B.
Painting – Section 099000.
C.
Rings for grilles, registers and light fixtures – Division 23 and 26.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The following standards, as well as other standards which may be referred to in this
Section, shall apply to the work of this Section:
1.
Gypsum Drywall Construction Handbook, latest edition, U.S. Gypsum Co.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-1
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
2.
ASTM C 645 "Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs,
Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels For Screw Application of Gypsum
B.
Allowable Tolerances: 1/32" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/16" in
8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow.
C.
System Design Load
1.
Provide drywall wall assemblies designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand
a lateral load of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. for the maximum wall height required, and with
deflection limited to 1/240 of partition height.
2.
Provide drywall ceiling assemblies designed, fabricated and installed to have a
deflection not to exceed L/360.
3.
Take special care to design framing to support increased dead loads where
multiple layers of wallboard or MDF are indicated to meet requirements for
acoustic mass.
D.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall with fire resistance ratings are
indicated, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of
applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by fire testing laboratories, or to design
designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing agencies
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and compliant with UL Test #2079;
criteria for cycle movement for all field height wall sections requiring allowance for
vertical deflection within framing details.
E.
Installer: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the installation of
specified materials.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples: Each material specified herein, 12" x 12", or 12" long, or in manufacturer's
container, as applicable for type of material submitted.
B.
Manufacturer's Literature: Submit technical and installation instructions for each
drywall partition, furring and ceiling system specified herein, and for each fire-rated
and sound-rated gypsum board assembly. Submit other data as required to show
compliance with these specifications, including data for mold and moisture resistant
joint compound.
C.
Test Reports: This Contractor shall submit test report, obtained by drywall
manufacturer, indicating conformance of drywall assemblies to required fire ratings
and sound ratings.
1.6
PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION
A.
Deliver, store and handle drywall work materials to prevent damage. Deliver materials
in their original, unopened containers or bundles, and store where protected from
moisture, damage and from exposure to the elements. Store wallboard in flat stacks.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-2
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
B.
1.7
Protect wallboard from becoming wet.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Provide and maintain minimum temperature of fifty-five (55) degrees F. and adequate
ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building in the area of the
drywall work for at least twenty-four (24) hours, prior to, during and after installation
of drywall work. Installation shall not start until windows are glazed and doors are
installed, unless openings are temporarily closed. Space above suspended ceilings shall
be vented sufficiently to prevent temperature and pressure build up.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers for Gypsum Drywall Panels and Accessories: Materials
specified below, unless noted otherwise or specified herein, are those of U.S. Gypsum
Co. Equivalent materials of National Gypsum Co., Georgia Pacific and Lafarge
meeting specification requirements are acceptable.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers for Metal Supports of Drywall Assemblies: Unless
otherwise noted, provide products manufactured by Dietrich Metal Framing, Super
Steel Building Products, Marino/Ware, Super Steel Studs, Clark Western or approved
equal.
2.2
METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of
steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
B.
Metal Floor and Ceiling Runners
1.
Channel Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless otherwise noted)
galvanized steel, width to suit channel type metal studs. Use 20 ga. top runners
with 1-1/4" minimum flanges.
2.
Ceiling runners and head of wall connections at rated partitions shall conform to
UL #2079 for cycle movement. Provide positive mechanical connection of
framing to structure, allowing for vertical movement within connections.
Minimum of 20 ga. galvanized steel for clips, 25 ga. galvanized steel for ceiling
runners. Providing a friction free – anti-seizure movement capacity.
a.
b.
As manufactured by the Steel Network, VertiClip or VertiTrack or equal
made by Metal-Lite Inc.
FireTrak (including stud clips) by FireTrak Corp. or equal made by
Metal-Lite Inc.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-3
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
3.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
"J" Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge galvanized steel, 1" x 2-1/2" or 4"
wide (to suit detail).
Metal Studs, Framing and Furring
1.
Channel Type Studs: Channel type with holes for passage of conduit formed from
minimum 18 U.S. Std. gauge (unless heavier gauge is required to meet deflection
limits) galvanized steel, width as shown on drawings.
2.
Furring Channels: Hat shaped, formed from galvanized steel, 25 U.S. Std. gauge.
3.
Continuous 16 gauge x 8" wide steel wall plate screwed to studs as required for
support of items supported on drywall partitions and walls.
Suspended Ceiling and Fascia Supports
1.
Main Runners: 1-1/2" steel channels, cold rolled at 0.475 lbs. per ft.,
rust-inhibitive paint finish.
2.
Furring Members:
Screw-type hat-shaped furring channels of 25 ga.
zinc-coated steel; comply with ASTM C 645.
3.
Hangers: Galvanized, 1" x 3/16" flat steel slats capable of supporting 5x
calculated load supported.
4.
Hanger Anchorages: Provide inserts, clips, bolts, screws and other devices
applicable to the required method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Size
devices for 5x calculated load supported.
5.
Furring Anchorages: 16 ga. galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard clips,
bolts or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer.
All galvanize steel members shall have coating conforming to ASTM A 653, G-60.
GYPSUM WALLBOARDS
A.
Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in
each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wall Board: 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock," 48" wide, in
maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
C.
Fire Rated Gypsum Wall Board: 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock
Firecode C," 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
D.
Abuse Resistant Wallboard: Where indicated on drawings, "Fiberock Brand Panel VHI
Abuse Resistant," by USG or “Dens armor Plus abuse Guard” by Georgia Pacific 48"
wide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-4
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Acoustic Insulation: Paper-less, non-combustible, semi-rigid mineral fiber mat, 2"
thick, in walls (unless otherwise indicated), 3 lb./cu. ft. maximum density; Thermafiber
LLC "Thermafiber," or approved equal.
B.
Fasteners for Wall Board: USG Brand Screws; Type S Bugle Head for fastening
wallboard to lighter gauge interior metal framing (up to 20 ga.). Type S-12 Bugle Head
for fastening wallboard to heavier gauge interior metal framing (20 ga. to 12 ga.); Type
S and Type S-12 Pan Head for attaching metal studs to door frames and runners; and
Type G Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to wall board. Lengths specified below
under "Part 3 - Execution" Articles and as recommended by drywall manufacturer.
C.
Laminating Adhesive: "Sheetrock Brand Joint Compound."
D.
Metal Trim - Corner Beads: For 90 degree External Corners - "Dur-A-Bead" No. 103,
27 U.S. Std. ga. galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4", for 90 degree external corners.
E.
Metal Trim - Edge Beads: "Sheetrock Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim."
F.
Metal Trim Treatment Materials and Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Drywall
Boards: Paper tape for joint reinforcing; Setting Type (Durabond 90) or Lightweight
Setting Type Joint Compound for taping and topping; and Ready Mix Compound for
finishing.
G.
Control Joints: No. 0.093, USG.
H.
Acoustical Sealant: USG "Acoustical Sealant" or "Tremco Acoustical Caulking" of
Tremco Mfg. Co., or approved equal.
I.
Neoprene Gaskets: Conform to ASTM D 1056.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions where gypsum drywall is to be installed and correct
any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
General
1.
Install drywall work in accordance with drywall manufacturer's printed
instructions and as indicated on drawings and specified herein.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-5
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
2.
All metal framing for drywall partitions shall extend from floor to underside of
structural deck above. Provide for vertical deflection with positive mechanical
connections of framing members to structure.
3.
Provide concealed reinforcement, 16 ga. thick by eight (8) inches wide or as
detailed or as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment of railings, toilet
partitions, and other items to be supported on the partitions which cannot be
attached to the metal framing members. Concealed reinforcement shall span
between metal studs and be attached thereto using two (2) self-tapping pan head
screws at each stud.
a.
Back of drywall shall be scored or notched to prevent bulging out where
reinforcement plate occurs.
B.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction, Underwriters' Laboratories and test results obtained
and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the fire-rated drywall assembly types
indicated on the drawings.
C.
Acoustic Assemblies: Install acoustic rated assemblies to achieve a minimum STC as
noted on drawings, in accordance with test results obtained and published by the
drywall manufacturer, for the drywall assembly type indicated on the drawings.
D.
Sealant
E.
1.
Install continuous acoustical sealant bead at top and bottom edges of wallboard
where indicated or required for sound rating as wallboard is installed, and between
metal trim edge beads and abutting construction.
2.
Install acoustical sealant in 1/8" wide vertical control joints within the length of
the wall or partitions, and in all other joints, specified below under "Control
Joints." Install bead of acoustical sealant around electric switch and outlet boxes,
piping, ducts, and around any other penetration in the wallboard; place sealant
bead between penetrations and edge of wallboard.
3.
Where sealant is exposed to view, protect adjacent surfaces from damage and from
sealant material, and tool sealant flush with and in same plane as wallboard
surface. Sealant beads shall be 1/4" to 3/8" diameter.
Wall Board Application
1.
Do not install wallboard panels until steel door frames are in place; coordinate
work with Section 081113 – Steel Doors and Frames.
2.
See drawings for all board types. Use fire-rated wallboard for fire-rated
assemblies. Use water-resistant wallboard where indicated on drawings and where
wallboard would be subject to moisture. Install water-resistant wallboard in full,
large sheets (no scraps) to limit number of butt joints.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-6
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
F.
G.
3.
Apply wallboard with long dimension parallel to stud framing members, and with
abutting edges occurring over stud flanges.
4.
Install wallboard for partitions from floor to underside of structure above and
secure rigidly in place by screw attachment, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Provide "Thermafiber" safing insulation at flutes of metal deck where partitions
carry up to bottom of metal deck.
6.
Neatly cut wallboard to fit around outlets, switch boxes, framed openings, piping,
ducts, and other items which penetrate wallboard; fill gaps with acoustic sealant.
7.
Where wallboard is to be applied to curved surfaces, dampen wallboard on back
side as required to obtain required curve. Finish surface shall present smooth,
even curve without fluting or other imperfections.
8.
Screw fasten wallboard with power-driven electric screw driver, screw heads to
slightly depress surface of wallboard without cutting paper, screws not closer than
3/8" from ends and edges of wallboard.
9.
Where studs are doubled-up, screw fasten wallboard to both studs in a staggered
pattern.
Metal Trim: Install and mechanically secure in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions; and finish with three (3) coats of joint compound, feathered and finish
sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1.
Corner Beads: Install specified corner beads in single lengths at all external
corners, unless corner lengths exceed standard stock lengths.
2.
Edge Beads: Install specified edge beads in single lengths at all terminating edges
of wallboard exposed to view, where edges abut dissimilar materials, where edges
would be exposed to view, and elsewhere where shown on drawings. Where
indicated on drawings, seal joint between metal edge bead and adjoining surface
with specified gasket, 1/8" wide minimum and set back 1/8" from face of
wallboard, unless other size and profile indicated on drawings.
3.
Casing beads shall be set in long lengths, neatly butted at joints. Provide casing
beads at juncture of board and vertical surfaces and at exposed perimeters.
Control Joint Locations: Gypsum board surfaces shall be isolated with control joints
where:
1.
Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or other vertical penetration.
2.
Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling.
3.
Shown on approved shop drawings.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-7
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
H.
3.3
4.
Ceiling dimensions exceed thirty (30) feet in either direction.
5.
Wings of "L," "U," and "T" shaped ceiling areas are joined.
6.
Expansion or control joints occur in the structural elements of the building.
7.
Partition or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling.
8.
Partition or furring runs exceed 30' without interruption.
9.
Where control joints are required, ceiling height door frames may be used as
control joints. Less than ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending
to the ceiling from both corners.
Joint Treatment and Spackling
1.
Joints between face wallboards in the same plane, joints at internal corners of
intersecting partitions and joints at internal corners of intersections between
ceilings and walls or partitions shall be filled with joint compound.
2.
Screw heads and other depressions shall be filled with joint compound. Joint
compound shall be applied in three (3) coats, feathered and finish surface sanded
smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Treatment of joints and screw heads with joint compound is also
required where wallboard will be covered by finish materials which require a
smooth surface, such as vinyl wall coverings.
FURRED WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A.
Use specified metal furring channels. Run metal furring channel framing members
vertically, space sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum. Fasten furring channels to concrete
or masonry surfaces with power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails spaced sixteen
(16) inches o.c. maximum through alternate wing flanges (staggered) of furring
channel. Furring channels shall be shimmed as necessary to provide a plumb and level
backing for wallboard. At inside of exterior walls, an asphalt felt protection strip shall
be installed between each furring channel and the wall. Furring channel and splices
shall be provided by nesting channels at least eight (8) inches and securely anchoring to
concrete or masonry with two (2) fasteners in each wing.
B.
Wallboard Installation: Same as specified under Article 3.4 - "Metal Stud Partitions."
3.4
METAL STUD PARTITIONS
A.
Runner Installation: Use channel type. Align accurately at floor according to partition
layout. Anchor runners securely sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum with power-driven
anchors to floor slab, with power-driven anchors to structural slab above. See "Stud
Installation" below for runners over heads of metal door frames. Where required,
carefully remove sprayed-on fireproofing to allow partition to be properly installed.
B.
Stud Installation
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-8
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
C.
1.
Use channel type, positioned vertically in runners, spaced as noted on drawings,
but not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c.
2.
Anchor studs to floor runners with screw fasteners. Provide snap-in or slotted
hole slip joint bolt connections of studs to ceiling runners leaving space for
movement. Anchor studs at partition intersections, partition corners and where
partition abuts other construction to floor and ceiling runners with sheet metal
screws through each stud flange and runner flange.
3.
Connection at ceiling runner for non-rated partitions shall be snap-in or slotted
hole slip joint bolt connection that shall allow for movement. Seal studs abutting
other construction with 1/8" thick neoprene gasket continuously between stud and
abutting construction.
4.
Connections for fire rated partitions at ceiling runners shall conform to UL Design
#2079.
5.
Install metal stud horizontal bracing wherever vertical studs are cut or wallboard is
cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations, and anchor horizontal bracing
to vertical studs with sheet metal screws.
6.
At jambs of door frames and borrowed light frames, install doubled-up studs (not
back to back) from floor to underside of structural deck, and securely anchor studs
to jamb anchors of frames and to runners with screws. Provide cross braces from
hollow metal frames to underside of slab.
7.
Over heads of door frames, install cut-to-length section of runner with flanges slit
and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and securely
anchor runner to adjacent vertical studs with sheet metal screws. Install cut-tolength vertical studs from runner (over heads of door frame) to ceiling runner
sixteen (16) inches maximum o.c. and at vertical joints of wallboard, and securely
anchor studs to runners with sheet metal screws.
8.
At control joints, in field of partition, install double-up studs (back to back) from
floor to ceiling runner, with 1/4" thick continuous compressible gasket between
studs. When necessary, splice studs with eight (8) inches minimum nested laps
and attach flanges together with two (2) sheet metal screws in each flange. All
screws shall be self-tapping sheet metal screws.
Runners and Studs at Chase Wall: As specified above for "Runners" and "Studs" and
as specified herein. Chase walls shall have either a single or double row of floor and
ceiling runners with metal studs sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum and positioned
vertically in the runners so that the studs are opposite each other in pairs with the
flanges pointing in the same direction. Anchor all studs to runner flanges with sheet
metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange following requirements of
paragraph 3.4, B. Provide cross bracing between the rows of studs by attaching runner
channels or studs set full width of chase attached to vertical studs with one self-tapping
screw at each end. Space cross bracing not over thirty-six (36) inches o.c. vertically.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-9
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
D.
E.
Wallboard Installation - Single Layer Application (Screw Attached)
1.
Install wallboard with long dimension parallel to framing member and with
abutting edge joints over web of framing member. Install wallboard with long
dimension perpendicular to framing members above and below openings in
drywall extending to second stud at each side of opening. Joints on opposite sides
of wall shall be arranged so as to occur on different studs.
2.
Boards shall be fastened securely to metal studs with screws as specified. Where
a free end occurs between studs, back blocking shall be required. Center abutting
ends over studs. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush,
smooth, true.
3.
Wallboard screws shall be applied with an electric screw gun. Screws shall be
driven not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of board to provide uniform dimple
not over 1/32" deep. Screws shall be spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. in the field of
the board and 8" o.c. staggered along the abutting edges.
4.
All ends and edges of wallboard shall occur over screwing members (studs or
furring channels). Boards shall be brought into contact but shall not be forced into
place. Where ends or edges abut, they shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides
of a partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs.
5.
At locations where piping receptacles, conduit, switches, etc., penetrate drywall
partitions, provide non-drying sealant and an approved sealant stop at cut board
locations inside partition.
Wallboard Installation - Double-Layer and Triple Layer Application
1.
General: See drawings for wallboard partition types required.
2.
First Layer (Screw Attached):
application.
3.
Second Layer (Screw Attached): Screw attach second layer, unless laminating
method of attachment indicated on drawings or necessary to obtain required sound
rating or fire rating. Install wallboard vertically with vertical joints offset thirtyfour (34) inches from first layer joints and staggered on opposite sides of wall.
Attach wallboard with 1-5/8" screws sixteen (16) inches o.c. along vertical joints
and sixteen (16) inches o.c. in the field of the wallboard. Screw through first layer
into metal framing members.
Install as described above for single layer
F.
Wallboard Installation - Laminated Application: Where laminated wallboard is
indicated, use specified laminating adhesive, install wallboard vertically and maintain
tolerances as specified for screw attached wallboard.
G.
Insulation Installation: Install where indicated on drawings. Place blanket tightly
between studs.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-10
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
H.
Deflection of Structure Above: To allow for possible deflection of structure above
partitions, provide top runners for non-rated partitions with 1-1/4" minimum flanges
and do not screw studs or drywall to top runner. Where positive anchorage of studs to
top runner is required, anchorage device shall be by means of slotted hole (in clip
connection with screw attachment to web of steel through bushings located in slots of
clips), or other anchorage device approved by Architect.
I.
Control Joints
3.5
1.
Leave a 1/2" continuous opening between gypsum boards for insertion of surface
mounted joint.
2.
Back by double framing members.
3.
Attach control joint to face layer with 9/16" galvanized staples six (6) inches o.c.
at both flanges along entire length of joint.
4.
Provide two (2) inch wide gypsum panel strip or other adequate seal behind
control joint in fire rated partitions and partitions with safing insulation.
DRYWALL FASCIAS AND CEILINGS
A.
Furnish and install inserts, hanger clips and similar devices in coordination with other
work.
B.
Secure hangers to inserts and clips. Clamp or bolt hangers to main runners.
C.
Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as
otherwise shown.
D.
Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each
runner and transversely between parallel runners.
E.
Metal Furring Channels: Space sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum. Attach to
1-1/2" main runner channels with furring channel clips (on alternate sides of main
runner channels). Furring channels shall not be let into or come in contact with
abutting masonry walls. End splices shall be provided by nesting furring channels no
less than eight (8) inches and securely wire tying. At any openings that interrupt the
furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability.
F.
Mechanical accessories, hangers, splices, runner channels and other members used in
suspension system shall be of metal, zinc coated, or coated with rust inhibitive paint, of
suitable design and of adequate strength to support units securely without sagging, and
such as to bring unit faces to finished indicated lines and levels.
1.
Provide special furring where ducts are over two (2) feet wide.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-11
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
G.
3.6
Apply board with its long dimension at right angles to channels. Locate board butt
joints over center of furring channels. Attach board with one (1) inch self-drilling
drywall screws twelve (12) inches o.c. in field of board; eight (8) inches o.c. at butt
joints located not less than 3/8" from edges.
ERECTION AT COLUMN ENCLOSURES
A.
Metal furring supports shall be provided under work of this Section, and shall be cut to
lengths as necessary for tight fit such that spacing is not more than sixteen (16) inches
o.c.
B.
Board shall be fastened securely to supports with screws as specified. Place boards in
position with minimum amount of joints. Where free ends occur between supports,
back-blocking or furring shall be required. Center abutting ends over supports.
Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, smooth and true. Provide
clips or cross furring for attachment as required.
C.
All layers shall be screw attached to furring.
D.
When column finish called for on drawings to be in the same plane as drywall finish
layer, maintain even, level plane.
3.7
FINISHING
A.
Taping: A thin, uniform layer of taping compound shall be applied to all joints and
angles to be reinforced. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately, centered over
the joint, seated into the compound. A skim coat shall follow immediately, but shall
not function as a fill or second coat. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in all
angles to provide a true angle.
B.
Filling: After taping compound has hardened, topping compound shall be applied,
filling the board taper flush with the surface. The fill coat shall cover the tape and
feather out slightly beyond the tape. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover
the tape and feather out at least four (4) inches on either side of the tape. No fill coat is
necessary on interior angles.
C.
After topping compound is set, a finishing coat of topping compound shall be spread
evenly over and extending slightly beyond the fill coat on all joints and feathered to a
smooth, uniform finish. Over tapered edges, the finished joint shall not protrude
beyond the plane of the surface. All taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover
the tape and taping compound, and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sanding
shall be done between coats and following the final application of compound to provide
a smooth surface, ready for painting.
D.
Fastener Depressions: Taping compound shall be applied to all fastener depressions
followed, when hardened by at least two (2) coats of topping compound, leaving all
depressions level with the plane of the surface.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-12
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
E.
Finishing Beads and Trim: Taping compound shall be applied to all bead and trim and
shall be feathered out from the ground to the plane of the surface. When hardened, this
shall be followed by two (2) coats of topping compound each extending slightly beyond
the previous coat. The finish coat shall be feathered from the ground to the plane of the
surface and sanded as necessary to provide a flat, smooth surface ready for decoration.
F.
Level of finish for surface exposed to view shall conform to Level 4 of ASTM C 840
and GA-214 of the Gypsum Association.
G.
Drywall construction with defects of such character which will mar appearance of
finished work, or which is otherwise defective, will be rejected and shall be removed
and replaced at no expense to the Owner.
3.8
CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
At the completion of installation of the work, all rubbish shall be removed from the
building leaving floors broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and other
equipment shall be removed from the building.
B.
Work shall be left in clean condition ready for painting or wall covering. All work
shall be as approved by Architect.
C.
Cutting and Repairing: Include all cutting, fitting and repairing of the work included
herein in connection with all mechanical trades and all other trades which come in
conjunction with any part of the work, and leave all work complete and perfect after all
trades have completed their work.
3.9
PROTECTION OF WORK
A.
Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting drywall work
from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
092900-13
Gypsum Drywall
July 28, 2010
SECTION 095113
ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the acoustic panel ceilings as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,
including but not limited to, the following:
1.
Interior acoustical panel ceiling units to match existing.
1.2. Exposed "T" suspension system, including hangers and inserts.
2.3. Provisions for the installation of lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles and similar
items provided under other Sections.
3.4. Cutting, drilling, scribing and fitting as required for electro-mechanical
penetrations.
4.5. Perimeter and column moldings, trim and accessories for acoustical ceilings.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Drywall ceilings – Section 092900.
B.
Diffusers, grilles and related frames – Division 23.
C.
Lighting fixtures – Division 26.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations published by the Ceilings and
Interior Systems Contractor’s Association.
B.
Qualifications of Installers
1.
The suspended ceiling subcontractor shall have a record of successful installation
of similar ceilings acceptable to Architect and shall be currently approved by the
manufacturer of the ceiling suspension system.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
095113-1
Acoustic Panel Ceiling
July 28, 2010
2.
C.
For the actual fabrication and installation of all components of the system, use
only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required
and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work.
The work is subject to the following standards:
1.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
1.5
ASTM C 423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
ASTM C 635, Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
ASTM C 636, Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal
Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
ASTM E 795, Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During
Sound Absorption Tests.
In addition to suspension system specified, provide seismic struts and seismic clips to
meet seismic standards as required by prevailing Codes and Ordinances.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit completely dimensioned ceiling layouts for all areas where
acoustical ceilings are required, showing:
1.
Any deviations from Architect’s reflected ceiling plan layouts, especially lighting
fixture and dimensions. Also indicate if any light fixtures will not fit into
Architect’s ceiling layout due to dimensional restrictions of field conditions.
2.
Direction and spacing of suspension members and location of hangers for carrying
suspension members.
3.
Direction, sizes and types of acoustical units, showing suspension grid members,
and starting point for each individual ceiling area.
4.
Moldings at perimeter of ceiling, at columns and elsewhere as required due to
penetrations or exposure at edge of ceiling tiles.
5.
Location and direction of lights, air diffusers, air slots, and similar items in the
ceiling plane.
6.
Details of construction and installation at all conditions.
7.
Materials, gauges, thickness and finishes.
B.
Certify that exterior application meets wind uplift requirements specified herein.
C.
Samples and Product Literature:
manufacturer’s descriptive literature.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
Submit the following samples and related
095113-2
Acoustic Panel Ceiling
July 28, 2010
1.6
1.
Twelve (12) inch long sample of each components of suspension systems,
including moldings.
2.
Acoustical units — full size.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store
them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in
any way.
D.
Acoustical ceiling panels to be removed from packaging and stored in unoccupied
ventilated areas (100% outside air supply, minimum of 1.5 air changes per hour, no
recirculation) for 24-72 hours prior to installation.
E.
Acoustical ceiling panels shall not be stored with materials which have high sort-term
emissions of VOCs or other contaminants.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Do not install acoustical ceilings until wet-work in space is completed and nominally
dry, work above ceilings has been completed, and ambient conditions of temperature
and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final
occupancy.
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system
components with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components, and partition
system.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Extra Stock: Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance
material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with appropriate labels.
1.
Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of
amount installed.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
095113-3
Acoustic Panel Ceiling
July 28, 2010
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Provide ceiling tiles to match existing as closely as possible.
B.
Provide exposed "T" suspension system, steel, with low sheen white baked enamel
finish equal to "Prelude XL," 15/16" exposed tee 2-way fire rated grid system made by
Armstrong World Industries, or equal made by USG Interiors, Inc. or Chicago Metallic
Corp.
C.
The suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly shown on the drawings and
specified herein, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span, in accordance with
ASTM C 635.
D.
Hanger for suspension system shall be 1" x 3/16", galvanized steel flats or 1/4"
diameter galvanized pencil rods spaced 4'-0" o.c. conforming to New York City Code
requirements.
E.
Main carrying channels, to which suspension systems shall be fastened, shall be
1-1/2" cold rolled galvanized steel channel; spaced 4'-0" o.c., conforming to New York
City Code requirements.
F.
Provide ceiling clips and inserts to receive hangers, type as recommended by
suspension system manufacturer, sizes for pull-out resistance of not less than five (5)
times the hanger design load, as indicated in ASTM C 635.
G.
Suspension systems shall conform to ASTM C 635, intermediate duty.
H.
Provide manufacturer’s standard wall moldings with off-white baked enamel finish to
match suspension systems. For circular penetrations of ceilings, provide edge moldings
fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine the areas where acoustic panel ceilings are to be installed and correct any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to permit
proper installation of the layout.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be
installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
095113-4
Acoustic Panel Ceiling
July 28, 2010
B.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at
borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
Codes and Standards: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions, and to comply with governing regulations and industry standards.
B.
Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with wire hangers supported
only from building structural members. Locate hangers not more than 6" from each
end and spaced 4'-0" along direct-hung runner, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0".
C.
Space rod or flat iron (New York City) hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along main
carrying channels; attach by clips or wire ties to building structure. Locate hangers not
more than 6” from each end. Space main carrying channels 4'-0" o.c. Attach
suspension system to carrying channels using clips or ties, leveling to a tolerance of
1/8" in 12'-0".
D.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
force by bracing, reinforcing, countersplaying or other equally effective means.
E.
Install edge moldings at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where
edge of acoustical units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the work.
1.
Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through vertical leg. Space
holes not more than 3" from each end and not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c.
between end holes. Fasten tight against vertical surfaces.
2.
Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" in 12'0".
F.
Install acoustical units in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed
by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders
and at penetrations.
G.
Install hold-down clips in toilet areas, and in areas where required by governing
regulations; space 2'-0" o.c. on all cross tees.
H.
Light fixtures or other ceiling apparatus shall not be supported from main beams or
cross tees if their weight causes the total load to exceed the deflection capability of the
ceiling suspension system. In such cases the load shall be supported by supplemental
hangers furnished and installed by this Section of work.
I.
Where fixture or ceiling apparatus installation causes eccentric loading on runners,
provide stabilizer bars to prevent rotation.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
095113-5
Acoustic Panel Ceiling
July 28, 2010
3.4
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge molding, and
suspension members; comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully
cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
095113-6
Acoustic Panel Ceiling
July 28, 2010
SECTION 097723
FABRIC WRAPPED ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the acoustic wall panels as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
1.3
Acoustical absorption panels wrapped in selected fabric, with varying thicknesses
and profiles as shown on drawings.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4
Gypsum wallboard – Section 092900.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Manufacturer Qualification: At least 5 years' experience fabricating and installing
comparable work, employing skilled mechanics under competent supervision for all
phases of the Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings/Product Data
1.
Base drawings on field measurements.
2.
Show dimensioned wall elevations with seam and joint locations, cutout sizes and
locations, anchor locations, relation to adjacent work; large scale joint and
mounting details; materials type, weight/thickness, design, color; and other data
necessary to fabricate and install work and coordinate work with affected trades.
B.
Samples: Two 12" x 12" (minimum) panels in selected finish, showing seam, edge and
cutout conditions.
C.
Certification
1.
Acoustical Performance: Certified reports of acoustical performance tests
conducted and/or witnessed by a recognized, independent, testing agency. Tests
shall have been done by specified methods or recognized equivalent. Sound
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
097723-1
Fabric Wrapped Acoustic Wall Panels
July 28, 2010
absorption tests shall be not more than three years old. Reports on earlier tests are
acceptable if it can be established to the Architect's satisfaction, that they are valid
indications of compliance with Project requirements.
2.
Fire Hazard: Evidence of compliance with regulatory agency and specifications
requirements.
D.
Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions: Recommendations for Owner maintenance
and cleaning. Identify cleaning/spotting products generically or by trade name.
E.
Manufacturer Qualifications: List comparable installations with 3-year (minimum)
service histories. Describe installations and give Owner/building manager names and
addresses.
1.6
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 423 Test for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method.
B.
ASTM E 84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Allow materials to become acclimated to Project conditions before installation, if
necessary to prevent sag and distortion during service life.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions
1.
Work areas shall be at or near ambient occupancy temperature and relative
humidity.
2.
Painting, dust-raising activities, and work that introduces dampness shall be
completed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide products manufactured by one of the following:
1.
Wenger Corp.
2.
Armstrong World Industries.
3.
Celotex.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
097723-2
Fabric Wrapped Acoustic Wall Panels
July 28, 2010
2.2
GENERAL
A.
Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores
to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in
fabric weave, wrinkles, sages, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter.
1.
Fabricate back mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall
surfaces based on field measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive
acoustical wall panels.
2.
Where radius corners are indicated, attach facing material so there are no seams or
gathering of material.
B.
Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units:
panels - plus or minus 1/16".
C.
Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise
reduction coefficients (NRC) indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C 423 for
mounting type specified under individual product requirements.
D.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect.
2.3
Overall height and width of
BACK MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
A.
2.4
Back Mounted, Edge Reinforced Acoustical Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard
panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front, edges, and back
border of molded glass fiber board core; with edges chemically hardened to reinforce
panel perimeter against warpage and damaged; and complying with the following
requirements:
1.
Core Density: 6 - 7 lb./cu. ft.
2.
Thickness and NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 2" and NRC of not less
than 0.95 for Type A (ABPMA No. 4) mounting.
3.
Facing Material: Provide Guilford of Maine Textiles FR 701, Style 2100;, color
selected by the Architect.
4.
Panel Size: As indicated.
5.
Edge Detail: Square.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Back Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard or recommended accessories for
securely mounting panels of type and size indicated to substrates provided, and
complying with the following requirements:
1.
Mechanically Mounted Edge Reinforced Panels: Metal panel clip and base
support bracket system consisting of 2 part panel clips, with one part of each clip
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
097723-3
Fabric Wrapped Acoustic Wall Panels
July 28, 2010
mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to wall substrate,
designed to support panels laterally; and base support brackets designed to support
full weight of panels; with both designed to allow panel removal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions where acoustic wall panels are to be installed and
correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work.
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and
edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit
adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Comply with panel
manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of panels using type of
mounting accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer.
2.
Construction Tolerances
a.
b.
Variation from Plumb and Level:
Variation of Joints from Hairline:
+/- 1/16".
Not more than 1/16".
B.
Anchoring to Drywall: Anchor clips to unreinforced gypsum board with toggle or
Molly anchors. Anchor clips to metal drywall framing with tapping sheet metal screws.
C.
Panels shall be pressed against wall and slid down engaging "Z" clips into wall
brackets.
D.
Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Correct non-complying and damaged/defective Work. Replace work that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
B.
Restretch and reinstall sagging and distorted fabric and correct other defects that
occurred during normal service.
C.
Carefully and thoroughly clean completed work by vacuuming and/or other means.
Remove soil, stains, loose threads.
D.
Protect work from soiling and other damage.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
097723-4
Fabric Wrapped Acoustic Wall Panels
July 28, 2010
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
097723-5
Fabric Wrapped Acoustic Wall Panels
July 28, 2010
SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
complete the painting and finishing of the entire facility, including new and existing
surfaces as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited
to, the following:
1.
Prime painting unprimed surfaces to be painted under this Section.
2.
Painting all items furnished with a prime coat of paint, including touching up of or
repairing of abraded, damaged or rusted prime coats applied by others.
3.
Painting all ferrous metal (except stainless steel) exposed to view.
4.
Painting interior concrete block exposed to view.
5.
Painting gypsum drywall exposed to view.
6.
Painting surfaces above, behind or below grilles, gratings, diffusers, louvers,
lighting fixtures, and the like, which are exposed to view through these items.
7.
Incidental painting and touching up as required to produce proper finish for
painted surfaces, including touching up of factory finished items.
8.
Painting of any surface not specifically mentioned to be painted herein or on
drawings, but for which painting is obviously necessary to complete the job, or
work which comes within the intent of these specifications, shall be included as
though specified.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Shop priming is required on some, but not all of the items scheduled to be field painted.
Refer to other Sections of work for complete description.
B.
Shop coat on machinery and equipment: Refer to the Sections under which various
items of manufactured equipment with factory applied shop prime coats are furnished,
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following Sections. All items of
equipment furnished with prime coat finish shall be finish painted under this Section.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-1
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
C.
1.
Heating, ventilation and air conditioning – Division 23.
2.
Plumbing – Division 22.
Color Coding of Mechanical Piping and Electrical Conduits – Division 23 and 26.
1.
1.4
This Color Coding consists of an adhesive tape system and is in addition to
painting of piping and conduits under this Section, as specified above.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOT TO BE PAINTED
A.
Items of equipment furnished with complete factory finish, except for items specified
to be given a finish coat under this Section.
B.
Factory-finished acoustical tile.
C.
Galvanized ferrous metals exposed to view.
D.
Non-ferrous metals, except for items specified and/or indicated to be painted.
E.
Finished hardware, excepting hardware that is factory primed.
F.
Surfaces not to be painted shall be left completely free of droppings and accidentally
applied materials resulting from the work of this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Job Mock-Up
1.
In addition to the samples specified herein to be submitted for approval, apply in
the field, at their final location, each type and color of approved paint materials,
applied 10 feet wide, floor to ceiling of wall surfaces, before proceeding with the
remainder of the work, for approval by the Architect. Paint mock-ups to include
door and frame assembly.
2.
These applications when approved will establish the quality and workmanship for
the work of this Section.
3.
Repaint individual areas which are not approved, as determined by the Architect,
until approval is received. Assume at least two paint mock-ups of each color and
gloss for approval.
Qualification of Painters: Use only qualified journeyman painters for the mixing and
application of paint on exposed surfaces.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-2
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
C.
1.6
Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime paints
used. Review other Sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be
provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for the various substrates.
Upon request from other subcontractors, furnish information on the characteristics of
the finish materials proposed to be used, to ensure that compatible prime coats are
used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as
required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using the coating
systems as specified with substrates primed by others.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.7
Materials List
1.
Before any paint materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a
complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this
portion of the work.
2.
This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of materials for those
specified or accepted for this work by the Architect.
Samples
1.
Accompanying the materials list, submit to the Architect copies of the full range
of colors available in each of the proposed products.
2.
Upon direction of the Architect, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2)
identical sets of Samples of each of the selected colors and glosses painted onto 81/2" x 11" x 1/4" thick material; whenever possible, the material for Samples shall
be the same material as that on which the coating will be applied in the work.
Manufacturer's Recommendations: In each case where material proposed is not the
material specified or specifically described as an acceptable alternate in this Section of
these specifications, submit for the Architect's review the current recommended method
of application published by the manufacturer of the proposed material.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Deliver all paint materials to the job site in their original unopened containers with all
labels intact and legible at time of use.
B.
Protection
1.
Store only the approved materials at the job site, and store only in a suitable and
designated area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment.
2.
Use all means necessary to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials and
the prompt and safe disposal of waste.
3.
Use all means necessary to protect paint materials before, during and after
application and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-3
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
C.
1.8
Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
1.9
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver to the Owner an extra stock of
paint equaling approximately 5 percent, but not less than one gallon) of each color and
gloss used and each coating material used, with all such extra stock tightly sealed in
clearly labeled containers.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise
permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F. unless otherwise
permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint
manufacturer's printed instructions.
D.
Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to
be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT MANUFACTURERS
A.
Except as otherwise noted, provide the painting products listed for all required painting
made by one of the manufacturers listed in the paint schedule (Section 2.4). These
companies are Benjamin Moore, Tnemec (where noted), Wolf Gordon (where noted),
IPC Paint, ICI Dulux and Sherwin Williams (S-W). Comply with number of coats and
required minimum mil thicknesses as specified herein.
B.
Paints noted in Finish Schedule are Benjamin Moore; other manufacturers listed herein
may substitute their equivalent paints with the approval of the Architect.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use
only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits.
B.
Colors and Glosses: All colors and glosses shall be as selected by the Architect.
Certain colors will require paint manufacturer to prepare special factory mixes to match
colors selected by the Architect. Color schedule (with gloss) shall be furnished by the
Architect.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-4
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
C.
Coloring Pigment: Products of or furnished by the manufacturer of the paint or enamel
approved for the work.
D.
Driers, Putty, Spackling Compound, Patching Plaster, etc.: Best quality, of approved
manufacture.
E.
Heat Resistant Paint: Where required, use heat resistant paint when applying paint to
heating lines and equipment.
2.3
GENERAL STANDARDS
A.
The various surfaces shall be painted or finished as specified below in Article 2.4.
However, the Architect reserves the right to change the finishes within the range of flat,
semi-gloss or gloss, without additional cost to the Owner.
B.
All paints, varnishes, enamels, lacquers, stains and similar materials must be delivered
in the original containers with the seals unbroken and label intact and with the
manufacturer's instructions printed thereon.
C.
All painting materials shall bear identifying labels on the containers with the
manufacturer's instructions printed thereon.
D.
Paint shall not be badly settled, caked or thickened in the container, shall be readily
dispersed with a paddle to a smooth consistency and shall have excellent application
properties.
E.
Paint shall arrive on the job color-mixed except for tinting of under-coats and possible
thinning.
F.
All thinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the
particular material thinned or tinted.
G.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that all mixed colors match the
color selection made by the Architect prior to application of the coating.
2.4
SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
A.
High Performance Coating On Exterior Galvanized Ferrous Metals
First Coat:
Second Coat:
B.
"27 Typoxy" or "N69 Epoxoline II" by Tnemec; "Intergard 345" by
International Protective Coatings; or "Carboguard 893 SG" or
"Carboguard 888" by Carboline or
Akzo: Devran 203 WB Epoxy Primer
"V73 Endura Shield" or "1074/1075" by Tnemec; "Interthane
870UHS" or "990 UHS" by International Protective Coatings; or
"Carbothane 133 LH" by Carboline or
Akzo: Devethne 379H Aliphatic Vizethne
High Performance Coating On Exterior Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metals
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-5
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
Prime Coat:
Second Coat:
Third Coat:
C.
"Tneme-Zinc 90/97" by Tnemec; "Interzinc 52" or "315" by
International Protective Coatings; or "Carbozinc 859, Class B" by
Carboline
"27 Typoxy" or "N69 Epoxoline II" by Tnemec; "Intergard 345" by
International Protective Coatings; or "Carboguard 893 SG" or
"Carboguard 888" by Carboline
"V73 Endura Shield" or "1074/1075" by Tnemec; “Interthane 870UHS
or 990 UHS" by International Protective Coatings; or "Carbothane 133
LH" by Carboline
Interior Ferrous Metal
Satin Finish/Latex
Primer:
1 coat Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer (073-132) MAB
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Matte Waterborne Interior Paint (522) BM
1 coat Enviro-Pure Latex Flat – Zero VOC (040)
MAB
1 coat ULTRA-WALL latex Flat Interior Wall Paint (1230) ICI
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Matte Waterborne Interior Paint (522) BM
1 coat Enviro-Pure Latex Flat – Zero VOC (040)
MAB
1 coat ULTRA-WALL latex Flat Interior Wall Paint (1230) ICI
Semi-Gloss Finish/Latex
Primer:
1 coat Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer (073-132) MAB
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Semi Gloss Waterborne Interior Paint (528)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Semi-Gloss - Zero VOC (047)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Semi Gloss Waterborne Interior Paint (528)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Semi-Gloss - Zero VOC (047)
D.
BM
MAB
BM
MAB
Interior Concrete Block
Flat Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex over Filler
Block Filler: 1 coat Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285)
1 coat Seal-Crete Waterproofing Sealer (101)
1 coat S-W Preprite Block Filler White, B25W25
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Matte Waterborne Interior Paint (522)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Latex Flat – Zero VOC (040)
1 coat ULTRA-WALL Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint (1230)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Matte Waterborne Interior Paint (522)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Latex Flat – Zero VOC (040)
1 coat ULTRA-WALL Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint (1230)
Eggshell Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex over Filler
Block Filler: 1 coat Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285)
1 coat Seal-Crete Waterproofing Sealer (101)
1 coat S-W Preprite Block Filler White, B25W25
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Eggshell Waterborne Interior Paint (524) BM
1 coat Enviro-Pure Eggshell - Zero VOC (045)
MAB
1 coat CUSTOM HOME Latex Flat Eggshell Enamel (1493)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Eggshell Waterborne Interior Paint (524) BM
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-6
BM
MAB
S-W
BM
MAB
ICI
BM
MAB
ICI
BM
MAB
S-W
ICI
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
1 coat Enviro-Pure Eggshell - Zero VOC (045)
MAB
1 coat CUSTOM HOME Latex Flat Eggshell Enamel (1493)
ICI
Semi-Gloss Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex over Filler
Block Filler: 1 coat Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285)
1 coat Seal-Crete Waterproofing Sealer – Zero VOC (101)
1 coat S-W Preprite Block Filler White, B25W25
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Semi Gloss Waterborne Interior Paint (528)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Semi-Gloss - Zero VOC (047)
1 coat CUSTOM HOME Latex Flat Semi-Gloss Enamel (1493)
ICI
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Semi Gloss Waterborne Interior Paint (528)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Semi-Gloss - Zero VOC (047)
1 coat CUSTOM HOME Latex Flat Semi-Gloss Enamel (1493)
ICI
E.
BM
MAB
Interior Drywall
Flat Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex
Primer:
1 coat Pristine Eco Spec Interior Latex Primer (231)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Latex Flat – Zero VOC (040)
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex Primer (B11W900) S-W
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Matte Waterborne Interior Paint (522)
1 coat ULTRA-WALL Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint 1230)
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex Flat (B5)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Matte Waterborne Interior Paint (522)
1 coat ULTRA-WALL Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint 1230)
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex Flat (B5)
Eggshell Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex
Primer:
1 coat Pristine Eco Spec Interior Latex Primer (231)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Latex Flat – Zero VOC (040)
1 coat PREP & PRIME AQUACRYLIC GRIPPER (3210)
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Eggshell Waterborne Interior Paint (524) BM
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex EG-SHEL (B9)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Eggshell Waterborne Interior Paint (524) BM
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex EG-SHEL (B9)
F.
BM
MAB
S-W
BM
MAB
BM
MAB
BM
ICI
S-W
BM
ICI
S-W
BM
MAB
S-W
S-W
S-W
Interior Painted Wood Doors:
Eggshell Finish/Latex
Primer:
1 coat Pristine Eco Spec Interior Latex Primer (231)
1 coat Seal-Crete Waterproofing Sealer - Zero VOC (101)
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Semi gloss Waterborne, Interior Paint (522)
1 coat ULTRA-WALL Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint 1230)
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex Flat (B5)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Semi gloss Waterborne, Interior Paint (522)
1 coat ULTRA-WALL Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint 1230)
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-7
BM
MAB
BM
ICI
S-W
BM
ICI
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
2.5
1 coat HARMONY Interior Latex Flat (B5)
S-W
Semi-Gloss Finish/Latex
Primer:
1 coat Pristine Eco Spec Interior Latex Primer (231)
1 coat Seal-Crete Waterproofing Sealer - Zero VOC (101)
First Coat:
1 coat AURA Semigloss Waterborne Interior Paint (528)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Semi-Gloss - Zero VOC (047)
1 coat CUSTOM HOME Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel (1497)
Second Coat: 1 coat AURA Semigloss Waterborne Interior Paint (528)
1 coat Enviro-Pure Semi-Gloss - Zero VOC (047)
1 coat CUSTOM HOME Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel (1497)
BM
MAB
BM
MAB
ICI
BM
MAB
ICI
EXISTING SURFACES TO BE PAINTED
A.
2.6
Existing surfaces shall be painted in accordance with schedule given in Article 2.4
herein except that first or prime coat may be eliminated where existing paint is sound.
Where existing paint must be removed down to base material, provide first or prime
coat as specified.
PIPING AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT EXPOSED TO VIEW
A.
Paint all exposed piping, conduits, ductwork and mechanical and electrical equipment.
Use heat resisting paint when applied to heating lines and equipment. The Contractor
is cautioned not to paint or otherwise disturb moving parts in the mechanical systems.
Mask or otherwise protect all parts as required to prevent damage.
B.
Exposed Uncovered Ductwork, Piping, Hangers and Equipment: Latex Enamel
Undercoater and one (1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat.
C.
Exposed Covered Piping, Duct Work and Equipment: Primer/Sealer and one (1) coat
Acrylic Latex Flat.
D.
Panel Boards, Grilles and Exposed Surfaces of Electrical Equipment: Latex Enamel
Undercoater and two (2) coats Latex Semi-Gloss.
E.
Equipment or Apparatus with Factory-Applied Paint: Refinish any damaged surfaces
to match original finish. Do not paint over name plates and labels.
F.
All surfaces of insulation and all other work to be painted shall be wiped or washed
clean before any painting is started.
G.
All conduit, boxes, distribution boxes, light and power panels, hangers, clamps, etc.,
are included where painting is required.
H.
All items of Mechanical and Electrical trades which are furnished painted under their
respective Contracts shall be carefully coordinated with the work of this Section so as
to leave no doubt as to what items are scheduled to be painted under this Section.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-8
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions where painting and finishing are to be applied and
correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work.
GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS
A.
Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. Application may be by brush or roller.
Spray application only upon acceptance from the Architect in writing.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish the Architect a schedule showing when he expects to have
completed the respective coats of paint for the various areas and surfaces. This
schedule shall be kept current as the job progresses.
C.
The Contractor shall protect his work at all times, and shall protect all adjacent work
and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of his work. Upon
completion of the work, he shall remove all paint and varnish spots from floors, glass
and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated
materials of whatever nature not caused by others and shall leave his part of the work
in clean, orderly and acceptable condition.
D.
Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, and factory
finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in place protection. Upon
completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items by workmen skilled in
the trades involved.
E.
Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls. Paint separately
and re-install after all paint is dry.
F.
All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and flowed
on smoothly to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles and excessive roller
stipple.
G.
Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt or undercoats show
through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the
paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to
the Owner.
H.
All coats shall be dry to manufacturer’s recommendations before applying succeeding
coats.
I.
Do not apply paint behind frameless mirrors that use mastic for adhering to wall
surface.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-9
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
3.3
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.
Existing Surfaces: Clean existing surfaces requiring paint or finishing, remove all
loose and flaking paint or finish and sand surface smooth as required to receive new
paint or finish. No “telegraphing” of lines, ridges, flakes, etc., through new surfacing is
permitted. Where this occurs, Contractor shall be required to sand smooth and re-finish
until surface meets with Architect’s approval.
B.
General
C.
D.
1.
The Contractor shall be held wholly responsible for the finished appearance and
satisfactory completion of painting work. Properly prepare all surfaces to receive
paint, which includes cleaning, sanding, and touching-up of all prime coats applied
under other Sections of the work. Broom clean all spaces before painting is
started. All surfaces to be painted or finished shall be perfectly dry, clean and
smooth.
2.
Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
condition.
3.
Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove
oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical
cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants
from the cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces.
Metal Surfaces
1.
Weld Fluxes: Remove weld fluxes, splatters, and alkali contaminants from metal
surfaces in an approved manner and leave surface ready to receive painting.
2.
Bare Metal: Thoroughly clean off all foreign matter such as grease, rust, scale and
dirt before priming coat is applied. Clean surfaces, where solder flux has been
used, with benzene. Clean surfaces by flushing with mineral spirits. For
aluminum surfaces, wipe down with an oil free solvent prior to application of any
pre-treatment.
3.
Shop Primed Metal: Clean off foreign matter as specified for “Bare Metal.”
Prime bare, rusted, abraded and marred surfaces with approved primer after proper
cleaning of surfaces. Sandpaper all rough surfaces smooth.
4.
Galvanized Metal: Prepare surface as per the requirements of ASTM D 6386.
5.
Metal Filler: Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities
in metal work to be painted with an approved metal filler suitable for the purpose
and meeting the requirements of the related Section of work; after setting, sand to
a smooth, hard finish, flush with adjoining surface.
Gypsum Drywall Surfaces: Scrape off all projections and splatters, spackles all holes
or depressions, including taped and spackled joints, sand smooth. Conform to
standards established in Section 092900 Gypsum Drywall.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-10
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
E.
Wood Door Surfaces: Sand to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers, or splinters
and then brush to remove dust. Wash off grease or dirt with an approved cleaner..
F.
Block Masonry Surfaces: Thoroughly clean off all grit, grease, dirt mortar drippings or
splatters, and other foreign matter. Remove nibs or projections from masonry surfaces.
Fill cracks, holes or voids, not filled under the "Masonry" Section, with Portland
cement grout, and bag surface so that it has approximately the same texture as the
adjacent masonry surface.
G.
Testing for Moisture Content: Contractor shall test all plaster, masonry, and drywall
surfaces for moisture content using a reliable electronic moisture meter. Contractor
shall also test latex type fillers for moisture content before application of top coats of
paint. Do not apply any paint or sealer to any surface or to latex type filler where the
moisture content exceeds 7 percent as measured by the electronic moisture meter.
H.
Touch-Up: Prime paint all patched portions in addition to all other specified coats.
3.4
MATERIALS PREPARATION
A.
Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
directions.
B.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers
used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
C.
Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as
required during the application of the materials. Do not stir any film which may form
on the surface into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material
before using.
D.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where
multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match the
color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
3.5
APPLICATION
A.
General
1.
Apply paint by brush or roller in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied. Use rollers of
carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as recommended by the paint
manufacturer for material and texture required.
2.
The number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same regardless of
the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has
completely dried. Sand between each enamel or varnish coat application with fine
sandpaper, or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required to produce an even,
smooth surface in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s directions.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-11
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
3.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a film thickness equivalent
to that of flat surfaces.
4.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
a.
B.
"Exposed surfaces" is defined as those areas visible when permanent or
built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles,
etc., are in place in areas scheduled to be painted.
5.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, non-specular black paint, before final installation of equipment.
6.
Paint the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers to match the
exposed surfaces.
7.
Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the faces, unless
otherwise indicated.
8.
Enamel finish applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and
then cleaned between coats to produce an even surface.
9.
Paste wood filler applied on open grained wood after beginning to flatten, shall be
wiped across the grain of the wood, then with a circular motion, to secure a
smooth, filled, clean surface with filler remaining in open grain only. After
overnight dry, sand surface with the grain until smooth before applying specified
coat.
Scheduling Painting
1.
Apply the first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
2.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do
not re-coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint
does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C.
Prime Coats: Re-coat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of
suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no
burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
D.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface
of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-12
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
E.
3.6
“Touching-Up” of Factory Finishes: Unless otherwise specified or shown, materials
with a factory finish shall not be painted at the project site. To “touch-up,” the
Contractor shall use the factory finished material manufacturer’s recommended paint
materials to repair abraded, chipped, or otherwise defective surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by the
painting and finishing work. Leave all such work undamaged. Correct any damages by
cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after
completion of painting operations.
3.7
CLEAN UP
A.
During the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint materials,
rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day.
B.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using
care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
C.
At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Roosevelt Hall Interior Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
099000-13
Painting and Finishing
July 28, 2010
SECTION 230500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.3
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
HVAC demolition.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Painting and finishing.
Concrete bases.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 1
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
2.
1.4
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.5
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Escutcheons.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
C.
1.6
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 2
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
1.8
REGULATIONS, CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Inspections and Approvals
1.
2.
C.
The installation shall be in accordance with all relevant codes and regulations of
the City and State having jurisdiction over the project location.
Codes, standards and specifications applicable to this work shall be the latest
editions in effect at the date of the proposal.
It is not the intent of Drawings and Specifications to repeat requirements of codes
except where necessary for completeness or clarity.
Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit Work not
conforming to applicable laws, ordinances, rules or regulations.
When the Documents conflict with regulatory or code requirements the most
stringent requirement shall apply.
Contractor shall be responsible for all law violations caused by the work under
this Division. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing when a discrepancy
occurs between code requirements and work shown on drawings and resolve the
discrepancy before proceeding with work.
Provide the Owner, the Construction Manager and local Inspectors access to
work at all times.
All controlled inspections shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall coordinate all inspections and provide all support and personnel
necessary for successful completion.
Permits and Fees
1.
2.
Make application and pay for all certificates of inspection, taxes and permits
required by AHJs. Deliver to the Owner any and all certificates of inspections,
permits, and approvals which may be required by AHJs.
Pay all utility charges and charges from the AHJ for providing temporary and
permanent water, sewer, and gas services to buildings.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 3
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
1.9
REVIEW OF CONSTRUCTION
A.
Work may be reviewed at any time by Architect/Engineer.
B.
Advise Architect/Engineer that work is ready for review at following times:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prior to backfilling buried work.
Prior to concealment of work in walls and above ceilings.
When an area or section of work is ready for punchlisting by the
Architect/Engineer.
When all requirements of Contract have been completed.
C.
Do not backfill or conceal work without Architect/Engineer’s consent.
D.
Maintain at the job site a set of Specifications and Drawings for use by
Architect/Engineer.
E.
Architect/Engineer's reviews will be periodic, depending upon nature of construction.
Architect/Engineer is not required to perform extensive or continuous inspection, is not
responsible for execution of Contract Documents by Contractor and is not responsible
for construction methods, sequences, or safety precautions.
1.10
MINOR DEVIATION
A.
The dimensions and ratings of equipment herein specified or indicated on the Drawings
are intended to establish the desired outlines and characteristics of such equipment.
Minor deviations may be permitted after review by the Architect/Engineer to allow
manufacturers specified to bid on their nearest standard equipment.
B.
Manufacturers catalog or model numbers and types mentioned in the Specifications or
indicated on the drawings are intended to be used as guides and shall not be interpreted
as taking precedence over specific ratings or duty called for or shown, which modify
stipulations in such catalogs. In all cases, the manufacturer shall verify the duty
specified with the particular characteristics of the equipment he intends to submit and
shall only submit items that comply with Specification requirements.
1.11
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
Defective work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective materials,
damage through carelessness, or other cause shall be removed within ten (10) days after
written notice is given by the Architect/Engineer and the work shall be re-executed by
the Contractor.
B.
The fact that the defects may have previously overlooked by the Architect/Engineer
shall not constitute total or partial acceptance or grounds for additional payment for
corrective work.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 4
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
1.12
A.
COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cooperate with all other Divisions performing work on this project as necessary
to achieve a complete neatly fitted installation for each condition. Consult the
Drawings and Specifications to determine nature and extent of work specified in
other Divisions which adjoins or attaches to the work of this Division. Confer
with other Divisions at the site to coordinate this work with theirs in view of job
conditions to the end that interferences may be eliminated and that maximum
head room and clearance may be obtained. In the event that interferences
develop, the Architect/Engineer's decision will be final as to which Division shall
relocate its work and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving
of ductwork, conduit or equipment to clear such interferences.
Provide templates, information and instructions to other divisions to properly
locate holes and openings to be cut or provide.
For Testing and Balancing of the system, ensure full co-ordination between the
Testing and Balancing subcontractor and all other Trades to achieve access to all
system components including leaving wall/ceiling sections down for access.
Ensure full co-ordination between controls subcontractor and Testing and
Balancing subcontractor to ensure the system is commissioned in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the mechanical ducting
distribution with the lighting, conduit, cable tray and structural members.
C.
Electrical work for mechanical equipment.
1.
2.
3.
It is the Division 23 Contractor's responsibility to ensure the Division 26
Contractor is aware of the electrical power and control requirements of all
mechanical equipment.
Electrical Work in this Division shall conform to requirements of Division 26.
Work and equipment specified in Division 26 and to be completed by the
Division 26 Contractor:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Motors except motors packaged with a piece of equipment
Motor control centers.
Motor starters except starters packaged with a piece of equipment.
Disconnect switches except disconnect switches packaged with or factory
mounted to a piece of equipment.
Power wiring to all equipment including from equipment disconnect
switches to motors.
Power wiring to all components of equipment that are not factory prewired including but not limited to solenoid valves and relays.
Power wiring to all control panels.
Hard wired interlocks between the BMS and all other electrical systems
including but not limited to fire alarm, security and information
technology systems.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 5
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
i.
j.
k.
4.
Conduit for the controls system wiring specified in Division 23.
Wiring for the fire protection system.
Smoke detectors for mounting in the Division 23 system and wiring to the
smoke detectors. The smoke detectors will be mounted by the Division 23
contractor. Smoke detectors shall be located according to manufacturer’s
installation requirements and locations shall be shown on the mechanical
shop drawings.
Work specified in this Division and to be completed by the Division 23
contractor:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Supply of complete and accurate wiring diagrams to Division 26 for all
equipment requiring electrical power wiring.
Adjustable motor bases and all bolts and nuts required for installation of
base and motor.
Alignment and adjustment of mechanical couplings for direct-driven
motorized equipment and of drive and belt tension on belt driven
equipment.
Field lubrication of all motors prior to operation and up to time of
acceptance of equipment by the Owner.
Motor terminal connection diagram as prepared by motor manufacturers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers specified.
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydrauliccement grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 6
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
HVAC DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective
Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.2
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and
plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is
unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new
products of equal capacity and quality.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting
heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
3.3
PAINTING
A.
Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09
Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.4
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 7
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.5
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.6
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230500- 8
Common Work Results for HVAC
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power
systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped
separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are
specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230513- 1
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
2.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G.
Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
H.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I.
Insulation: Class F.
J.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
K.
2.4
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors
smaller than 7.5 hp.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring
connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in
motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and
features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller
output.
Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
Insulation: Class H.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230513- 2
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
4.
C.
Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each
motor according to NEMA MG 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
Measure winding resistance.
Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform high-potential test.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split phase.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating
of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230513- 3
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Metal framing systems.
Fastener systems.
Equipment supports.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates
for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers
for fire-protection piping.
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and
supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers
and Supports."
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 1
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show
fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.6
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Powder-actuated fastener systems.
Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."] [AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."]
[AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."] [ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.]
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 2
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
2.2
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel
channels and other components.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
GS Metals Corp.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Tolco Inc.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with rubber or felt isolator for support of bearing surface of
piping.
2.3
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1.
B.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hilti, Inc.
b.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
e.
Powers Fasteners.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b.
Empire Industries, Inc.
c.
Hilti, Inc.
d.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
f.
Powers Fasteners.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 3
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
2.4
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.5
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from
structural-steel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for equipment that will not
have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Floor support hanger devices or systems shall not be used.
F.
Angle iron or Unistrut type wall brackets shall not be used.
G.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated, install the following types:
1.
2.
H.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated, install the following types:
1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 4
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
I.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
J.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and loadadjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 5
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
K.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
L.
Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in
concrete construction.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
B.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
3.3
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 6
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
3.6
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230529- 7
Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Restrained spring isolators.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
Restraining braces and cables.
DEFINITIONS
A.
IBC: International Building Code.
B.
ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.
Assigned Seismic Use Group Category as Defined in the IBC: II.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
1.5
Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5.
Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.367g.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.114g.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration
isolation device.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 1
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
2.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
b.
3.
B.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined
loads.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details
indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment
weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators,
seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other
Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on
building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include
certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that
none will exist.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including
anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include
auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power
transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.
Seismic-Restraint Details:
a.
b.
c.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic
restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation
devices.
Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with windrestraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with
requirements in other Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted
outdoors.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 2
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
d.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint
items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC equipment
with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic
restraints.
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
F.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES,
or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing
maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred
to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries.
Vibrex.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 3
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
B.
General
1.
2.
3.
C.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring
and insert in compression.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Provide vibration isolators in accordance with the load distribution to produce
uniform minimum deflection as specified on the schedule.
All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the
vibration isolator under actual load as shown on the drawings. Isolators selected
purely on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable. Where static
deflections are not specified, provide minimum 2 inches static deflection for
rotating and reciprocating equipment.
Where specific type of vibration isolation hardware equipment is not shown or
specified, furnish isolators recommended by the isolation manufacturer
compatible with equipment arrangements shown.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding
or reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
Flexible Duct Connections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ductwork flexible connections shall be fabricated from flexible airtight-coated
fabric. Connections shall be constructed from a UL listed fire retardant (25flame spread, 50 smoke developed rating) neoprene coated woven glass fiber
fabric to NFPA 90A and shall withstand the temperatures and pressure involved
(Ventfabrics, Durodyne or approved equal). Connectors shall include a
companion flange.
The connectors, between fan intake/discharge and ductwork, overall width shall
not be less than 3 inches long nor more than 6 inches long.
For ducts passing across building expansion joints or acoustical isolation joints
the connectors overall width shall not be less than 6 inches long nor more than 10
inches long.
Allow at least 1 inch slack in these connections to insure that no vibration is
transmitted from fan to ductwork. Flex connector shall not be drawn into the
duct/air stream.
Where duct transition occurs from larger to smaller duct size at connection to the
equipment, the flexible connector shall be sized and installed in the larger duct.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 4
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
6.
2.2
The fabric shall either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar
frames at each end to prevent air leakage.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Hilti, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Loos & Co.; Cableware Division.
Mason Industries.
TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and
applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force
of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which
they will be subjected.
C.
Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made
of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one
end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with
corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of
steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections to hanger rod.
F.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of
neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and
matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
G.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
H.
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 5
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
Minimum length of eight times diameter.
I.
2.3
Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar
adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior
applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic[- and wind]control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLICATIONS
A.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on
Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to
seismic forces.
B.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select
sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.3
VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
General Requirements
1.
2.
Vibration isolation manufacturer’s representative shall supervise and inspect all
installed isolation hardware and generate a written punchlist for the Construction
Manager, along with corrective measures required. Submit inspection report.
The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause any change in
position of equipment, or ducts that result in stresses in any connections or
misalignment of shafts or bearings. Equipment shall be maintained in a rigid
position during installation. The load shall not be trans-ferred to the isolators
until the installation is complete and in operational condition.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 6
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Do not install any mechanical equipment, or ducts that makes rigid contact with
the "building" unless it is approved in this specification or by the Engineer.
"Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, walls,
partitions, ceilings, studs, ceiling framing, and suspension systems.
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall bring to the Owner’s Representative's
attention any conflicts between trades that will result in unavoidable rigid contact of equipment, or ducts with the build¬ing. Corrective work after installation,
necessitated by unresolved conflicts before installa¬tion, shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall obtain written instructions from the vibration isolation
manufacturer as to the proper selection, installation, and adjustment of all
vibration isolation devices.
No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame
is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by
the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base
frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for
the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not
specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by
the equipment manufac¬turer shall be provided at no additional expense.
Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 1"
between inertia bases or steel frame bases and the floor beneath the equipment.
Position isolator mounting brackets and adjust isolators so that the required
clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be cleaned thoroughly by the
Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short-circuit or
restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system.
Provide a minimum of 1" clearance between the building structure (walls, floors,
and ceilings) and vibration isolated supports, ducts, and equipment.
Ceiling-suspended equipment shall be supported from the building structure,
such as trusses, girders, beams, or joists. If necessary, provide heavy extra
substructure between the building's existing heavy structure in order to support
vibration-isolated equipment. Do not suspend equipment from roof decks or
floors without approval. Connect vibration isolation hangers directly to, or as
close as possible to, structure that is stiff. Hanger housings should be free to
rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without contacting any object.
Any bracing or supports for mechanical ductwork, and equipment shall not
bridge or reduce the effectiveness of vibration isolators.
Vibration Isolated-Equipment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locations of all vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of
inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.
Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions.
Unless otherwise noted, mount motors on rigid base common with equipment or
supported from equipment frame.
Fasten all vibration isolators to the structure, not to floor diaphragms or
lightweight components. Use bolts where holes are provided in the mounting
flanges; otherwise, adhere using structural adhesive. Where mounting flanges
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 7
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
are steel, use neoprene grommets and washers under anchor bolts. Where
vibrating elements are to be fastened to structural elements provide connection
details for review.
All vibration-isolated equipment shall be connected to the adjacent ductwork via
a flexible connection positioned to avoid a direct connection between equipment
and mounting surface.
Do not use vibration isolation components to straighten or connect misaligned
sections of ductwork.
Inspect all vibration-isolated equipment, coordinate the work of all involved
trades, and verify that vibration isolators are not short-circuited by drain lines,
conduits, control tubing, duct connections, etc.
Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is
level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts.
Hanger rods shall be aligned and free of contact with hanger box.
Align spring isolation hanger rods to clear the hanger box under all operating
conditions.
Level vibration isolated equipment under rated design operating conditions while
maintaining the isolation criteria. Isolators shall be plumb and aligned to
preclude misalignment or undesired contact during operation.
Separate snubbers shall be provided for all floor-mounted equipment on opentype (un-restrained) spring mounts. Provide a minimum of four snubbers at each
item of equipment. Snubbers shall not be in contact during normal equipment
operation. Number, size, and method of installation shall be as recommended by
the isolator supplier.
Flexible Duct Connections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit
discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings or elsewhere specified. If
used at axial flow fan discharge or intake, flexible connector shall be placed after
transition ducts.
Flexible duct connections shall be installed wherever ducts pass across an
Acoustical Isolation Joint (AIJ) between isolated and non-isolated structures, or
between independently isolated structures.
The connectors, between fan intake/discharge and ductwork, overall width shall
not be less than 3 inches long nor more than 6 inches long. Where duct crossing
building expansion joints, the connectors overall width shall not be less than 6
inches long nor more than 10 inches long. Allow at least 1 inch slack in these
connections to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork.
Install flexible connections in ducts that cross structural expansion joints.
Where duct transition occurs from larger to smaller duct size at connection to the
equipment, the flexible connector shall be sized and installed in the larger duct.
The fabric shall either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar
frames at each end to prevent air leakage
Sheet metal ducts or plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan
discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible
connection so that the clear separation is not greater than 3" and equal all the way
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 8
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
8.
around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this
provision is met. Allow at least 1 inch slack in connections.
Secure fabric connectors tightly to fans, casings and ducts as follows:
a.
b.
D.
Secure round connectors with No. 12 US gage by 1 inch wide galvanized
steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts or use companion
flanges.
Secure rectangular connectors with 1 inch by 1/8-inch thick flat galvanized
steel bars, with screws or bolts on 8 inch centers maximum, or with sheet
metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet metal joint and secure
complete joint with sheet metal screws on 6-inch centers maximum.
Services Penetrations (Mechanical, Plumbing)
1.
Ductwork: Where each duct penetrates acoustical rated partitions (designated on
architectural drawings) and mechanical room wall and slab, create an acoustic
seal around the ducts described herein and shown on the mechanical drawings. If
the gap between the duct and the structure exceeds 1 inch, pack the gap with
fiberglass and cover the entire joint with an 18 gauge metal angle or 5/8 inch
gypsum board cover plate. Fully bed the angle or cover plate in non-hardening
acoustical sealant. If the gap between the duct and the structure is less than 1/2
inch, pack the gap with fiberglass and sealed with non-hardening acoustical
sealant backed by foam rod.
E.
Isolation of Fractional Horsepower Equipment: Isolate all fractional horsepower fans,
pumps, and equipment which are mounted on or suspended from floors that are not ongrade with neoprene-in-shear isolators as specified except where such isolators are
furnished as an integral part of the machine.
F.
Electrical Connections to Resiliently Mounted Equipment: Make electrical connections
to equipment which is supported or suspended by vibration isolators with long lengths
of flexible steel conduit or flexible armored cable. Locate these flexible connections so
as to prevent rigid connections between the resiliently mounted equipment and the
building structure.
G.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators.
Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment
base and supporting structure.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building
structure.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 9
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
I.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
J.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
K.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached
to wall.
L.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to
structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete
members.
M.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed
tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the
structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior
to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom
of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid
introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for
exterior applications.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 10
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected
by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
Measure isolator deflection.
Verify snubber minimum clearances.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.
B.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
C.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
3.6
VIBRATION ISOLATOR SCHEDULE
A.
Equipment and Ductwork
Equipment
Isolator type
Deflection
Suspended Fans
Ductwork: Isolate all ductwork within 50 feet of fans
and air handlers or within the mechanical rooms,
whichever is greater.
Spring Hangars
Spring Hangars
2”
0.25”
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230548- 11
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Equipment
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Duct labels.
Stencils.
Valve tags.
Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230553- 1
Identification for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Adhesive backed plastic tape:
1.
2.
3.
Small labels: adhesive backed plastic tape with embossed letters in contrasting
colors. Tape shall be 3/8” wide.
Large labels: adhesive backed plastic tape with embossed letters in contrasting
colors. Tape shall be 3/4” wide.
Make: Seton Name Plate Company.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment
schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
B.
Letter Color: White.
C.
Background Color: Red.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 200 deg F (93 deg C).
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230553- 2
Identification for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
2.3
DUCT LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
B.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
C.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
D.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
E.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
F.
Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
2.4
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to
accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate
flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
STENCILS
A.
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1; minimum letter height
of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for
access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Stencil Material: Fiberboard.
Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.
WARNING TAGS
A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of
plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm).
Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION,"
or "DO NOT OPERATE."
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230553- 3
Identification for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each scheduled item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following
color codes:
1.
White lettering with green background:
a.
2.
White lettering with blue background:
a.
3.
B.
3.4
Outside Air Intake
Black lettering with yellow background:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Supply Air
Return Air
Exhaust Air
Relief Air
ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 30 feet (9 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230553- 4
Identification for HVAC
Equipment
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment, man-lifts, incidentals and services to
carry out the work of this section. This Section includes TAB to produce design
objectives for the following:
1.
Air Systems:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Constant-volume air systems.
All Miscellaneous air moving devices.
HVAC equipment.
Space pressurization testing and adjusting.
Vibration measuring.
Sound level measuring.
Indoor-air quality measuring.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as
to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,
branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C.
Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors,
and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow,
smoke, odors, and other pollutants.
D.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more
heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E.
NC: Noise criteria.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 1
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
F.
Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield
repeatable results.
G.
RC: Room criteria.
H.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I.
Smoke-Extract System: A system that uses fans to exhaust smoke from the building
with make-up air by infiltration through dedicated openings or fan powered.
J.
Smoke-Extract Zone: A space within the building that is part of a zoned smoke-purge
system.
K.
Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
L.
Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
M.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
N.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance
ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
fan was performance tested.
O.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
P.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or
leaves the distribution system.
Q.
Test: A procedure to determine correct operation and quantitative performance of
systems or equipment.
R.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing
and reporting TAB procedures.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6
copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in
Part 3.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 6 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 2
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
"Preparation". Include a complete (all design data filled in) set of report forms intended
for use on this Project. Submit plan drawings of the systems keying individual devices
to be balanced to the forms.
D.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of final reports prepared, as specified in this
Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. Submit plan drawings of the
systems keying individual devices balanced to the forms.
E.
Instruments: A complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in
appropriate categories, with data sheets for each. Show:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer, model and serial number.
Description and use when needed to further identify the instrument.
Size or capacity range.
Latest calibration date and certificates of calibration.
F.
Reports on “Examinations” specified in Part 3 of this Section.
G.
Warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. TAB
Technicians shall have a minimum of 2 years experience and shall be certified by either
the AABC or NEBB. All work shall be carried out under the supervision of the
approved TAB technicians. The TAB firm shall submit certification of their current
membership of either NEBB or AABC.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of
TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized
service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide
seven days advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items: Include at least the following.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Submittal distribution requirements.
The Contract Documents examination report.
TAB plan.
Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or similar by AABC.
D.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification
includes the following.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 3
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
1.
2.
3.
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II,
"Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification", or similar by AABC.
1.
F.
Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of
calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
Reference Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
TAB reports.
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
The TAB Contractor shall provide a NEBB or AABC Certificate of
Conformance Certification (issued by the NEBB or AABC national office) for all
work specified to confirm that the work has been carried out in accordance with
the applicable NEBB or AABC Standards and Procedures, and the provisions of
the NEBB or AABC Quality Assurance Conformance Certification Rules of
Procedures.
General mechanical systems: Comply with applicable procedures and standards
of “National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total
System Balance” by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
NEBB – National Environmental Balancing Bureau
SMACNA – Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
ASHRAE – Handbook of Fundamentals
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize
conflicts with Owner's operations.
B.
System Readiness
1.
2.
3.
4.
The building envelope must be complete. All windows, doors, insulation,
internal sheet finishes (such as gypsum wall board), cladding curtain walling,
etc., must be installed so that the full specified performance of the envelope is
achieved.
The specified system being tested and balanced must be complete. Balancing of
partially completed systems will not be acceptable. Sub-systems may be tested
and balanced separately. A mechanical sub-system is a fan together with its
associated ductwork, terminal units, dampers, grilles and diffusers. Fans that
operate together, such as ventilation supply and exhaust fans serving common
area shall be tested together as a common mechanical sub system.
The system must be running fault free.
Pressure testing and leak testing must be satisfactorily complete.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 4
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems
and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.
B.
Coordinate with the Construction Manager to produce a complete schedule for the TAB
work including identifying all other aspects of the construction work by other trades
upon which successful completion of the TAB work depends. All such dependencies
shall be identified to allow proper sequencing of the required work. This schedule shall
be prepared using the same computer software as the construction manager’s schedule
such that it can be added to the construction manager’s schedule. Schedule shall be
kept up-to-date. The schedule shall show, as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Itemize all systems to be made operational, tested and balanced.
Identify the dates that system construction, cleaning, pressure testing and pretesting will be completed.)
Identify interdependencies between systems that impact the TAB work. (For
example, the heating system cannot be considered complete until the associated
electrical power system and controls system are complete.
Each trade affected by and required for the TAB will be identified to ensure that
the adequate time for their work is scheduled.
Identify the beginning and end of the TAB work for each building system.
All submittal dates for first, second, etc., submittals shall be clearly identified on
the schedule. Required review and re-submittal dates shall also be included.
Requirements for tests and inspections required by AHJ and schedule for
inspections completion, submission, and approval.
Include dates for training of Owner’s staff.
C.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
D.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air systems have been satisfactorily
completed.
E.
Coordinate with the work of Section 15900 and 15901 to determine positions of all
dampers and control valves in accordance with the outlined sequences of operation.
F.
In the event the TAB Contractor fails to coordinate with any party and costs are
incurred for testing or retesting by any party as a result of this failure to coordinate, then
the TAB Contractor shall be responsible for these costs.
G.
TAB Meetings
1.
The TAB Contractor’s Project Manager shall attend regular commissioning
meetings as required by the Construction Manager.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 5
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist
in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply
with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1.
2.
B.
During the warranty period of one year following substantial completion of TAB,
seasonal testing and other deferred testing required shall be completed. The TAB firm
shall coordinate this activity with the Owner and CM.
1.
2.
3.
C.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the
Contract Documents.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design limits.
Approximately six months after completion of the TAB, the TAB firm shall
return to the project site for Seasonal Testing and carryout a 72-hour run test of
the complete building systems as described above. All sensors, devices, etc.,
shall be trended for this period and presented in graphical format at a useful
resolution. The TAB firm shall make any adjustments necessary to the system to
ensure all systems and systems components are operating in a correct manner and
that design conditions are being maintained within the building without hunting.
See also paragraph 3.4.F. of this Section.
In addition the TAB firm will return to the project approximately 10 months into
the warranty period. During this visit(s) the TAB firm will review with facility
staff the current building operation and the condition of outstanding issues
related to the original and seasonal commissioning. The TAB firm will also
interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns they have operating the
building as originally intended. The TAB firm will make suggestions for
improvements and will record these changes in the O&M manuals.
Deferred Testing: any system or item that cannot be properly tested during the
construction period, due to, for example, weather conditions, shall be tested and
balanced as far as possible. The TAB process shall be completed when
conditions are favorable.
Final Acceptance
1.
When all TAB work has been carried out, the building systems will be run in full
automatic mode for a minimum period of 72 hours. All FMS sensors, devices,
etc., shall be trend logged every minute and presented in a graphical format at a
useful resolution. Final acceptance of the building systems will be contingent
upon the system maintaining conditions within design tolerances without hunting
for all of the 72 hours.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 6
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents, and any subsequent revisions to these, to become
familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that
may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
Verify that the necessary TAB devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,
thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, access
doors and panels, manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract
Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
The lead TAB technician shall visit the job bi-weekly during construction to
review the installation. Submit written report with suggestions for work to be
performed or devices added to allow for proper balancing. This technician shall
verify that Work, fittings, dampers, balancing devices, etc. are properly
fabricated and installed as specified or shown and that proper balancing can be
done.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment and use in TAB
process.
C.
Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents" to ensure all TAB devices and final approved values are recorded.
D.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6.
Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
E.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, flushing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been
performed.
F.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 7
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
G.
Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation. Perform this inspection as often as necessary
to ensure all work is inspected prior to closing-in or concealment.
H.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, coils, fans,
dampers, plenums, ducts, etc. are clean, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and
tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
L.
Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
M.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting
or mixing fluid flows.
N.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
O.
Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended
controller.
Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of
fully closed and fully open positions. This includes all motorized dampers and
valves and variable-air-volume terminals.
Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and threeway mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
Thermostats and humidistats and sensors are located to avoid adverse effects of
sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
Controller set points are set at indicated values.
Interlocked systems are operating.
Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 8
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
P.
3.2
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.3
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met.
PRELIMINARY TESTING
A.
The Mechanical Contractor will carry out a series of preliminary tests prior to the
commencement of the TAB work of this contract. The intent of these tests is to
demonstrate that the equipment operates properly in all modes. The TAB Contractor
shall review these test reports and shall record from these reports any data required to
carry out the work of this contract.
B.
The Mechanical Contractor shall, as a minimum, carry out the tests, procedures and
checks recommended by the equipment manufacturer and shall use the services of
equipment manufacturer representatives to ensure the successful start-up and correct
operation of all systems and equipment.
C.
The TAB Contractor shall witness the above work and submit a deficiency report for
any incomplete work that will affect the work of this Contract.
D.
The TAB Contractor shall review and report on the following, as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Installation of equipment
Installation of devices
Completeness of the ductwork and pipework installation
Installation of access doors or other access provisions for balancing devices, fire
and smoke dampers
The TAB Contractor shall issue reports weekly during the Mechanical Contractors
preliminary testing process. Any major deficiencies shall be reported daily.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 9
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
F.
3.4
The TAB Contractor shall witness the Mechanical Trade Contractors ductwork leakage
and pipe pressure tests.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Environmental Systems” and this Section.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes and equipment cabinets for installation for test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes to prevent leakage and patch insulation with new
materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to
insulation Specifications for this project.
C.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators,
fan-speed-controllers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D.
Take readings as shown, specified and as required to demonstrate that all equipment
terminal devices, controls, etc. are operating in accordance with scheduled or
manufacturer’s published ratings.
E.
Make adjustments and/or corrections to equipment, air systems necessary for proper
balancing.
F.
Perform capacity checks of heating systems during the balancing period and again
during design condition the following winter. Perform capacity checks for cooling
systems during the balancing period and again during design the following summer.
G.
Operating tests of heating and cooling apparatus, fans, and other equipment to be of not
less than four hours duration, after stabilized operating conditions have been
established. Capacities to be based on temperatures and air quantities measured during
such tests.
H.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
I.
The TAB Contractor shall confirm in the reports that deficiencies identified in
Mechanical Services installation have been corrected prior to the commencement of the
TAB work.
J.
The specified systems shall be reviewed and inspected for conformance to the design
documents. Testing, adjusting and balancing on each system shall be performed. The
accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standards. See
below for tolerances on measured quantities.
K.
Any deficiencies in the installation or performance of a system or component shall be
reported in writing to both the Mechanical Trade Contractor and Consultant.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 10
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
L.
Should the results of balancing indicate that a mechanical system does not provide the
design intent performance, then the Consultant, the Mechanical Contractor and the TAB
Contractor shall review the results. The Consultant shall approve any corrections that
are to be made by the Mechanical Contractor.
M.
Should the results of balancing indicate that particular equipment does not provide the
design intent performance then the Mechanical Contractor shall repair or replace the
equipment. The TAB Contractor shall retest the equipment.
3.5
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans, ducts and outlets. Obtain manufacturer’s outlet
factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required
outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems “as-built” duct layouts for use in recording
measurements. Diagram shall show all equipment components and be cross-referenced
to the TAB forms and reports.
C.
For variable air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity, where system
capacity (fans) is less than the sum of the outlet volumes.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path and proper
operation. For automatic dampers, fan speeds, etc., work with controls contractor to
establish and set required positions and values to maintain design airflow for different
operating conditions specified.
I.
Check airflow blockages and resolve.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and proper function.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components
L.
Adjust air quantities to following tolerance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Each outlet of 200 cfm or less: Minus 0 to plus 10 percent of design.
All other outlets: Minus 0 to plus 5 percent.
Each room with multiple outlets: Minus 0 to plus 5 percent.
Each floor or major zone: Minus 0 to plus 5 percent.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 11
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fans: Minus 0 to plus 5 percent.
Temperature readings: Within ½ degree F.
Equipment Pressure drops readings: 0.10 inch W.G.
Space pressure readings: 0.05 inch W.G.
M.
Final Measurements of Air Quantity: Make final measurement of air quantity, after the
air terminal has been adjusted to provide the optimum air patterns of diffusion. Adjust
all diffusers and registers to eliminate drafts in all areas and result in uniform
distribution.
N.
Verify that ductwork, dampers, grilles, registers and diffusers have been installed per
design.
O.
Balance air handling systems at minimum outdoor air quantities. On completion of
balancing procedures, retest at maximum outdoor air quantities.
P.
Test and record motor voltage and amperage. Compare data with nameplate limits.
Q.
Perform pitot tube traverse at all main and branch ducts. Compare traverse total with
measured outlet total to determine actual duct leakage.
R.
Test and adjust minimum outdoor and relief air volumes.
S.
Test and record entering and leaving air conditions for each heat transfer coil and
device. Simulate conditions to achieve winter or summer design patterns.
T.
Test and record settings of motor thermal overload devices. Adjust settings where
required.
U.
Verify air flow measurement at all airflow monitoring stations. Coordinate positioning
of dampers with the FMS Trade Contractor and the air monitoring station manufacturer.
V.
Verify minimum outside air flow requirements. Coordinate damper position with the
FMS Trade Contractor.
W.
Adjust duct distribution to obtain specified air quantities. At least one zone balancing
damper shall be completely open. Multi diffuser/grille branch ducts shall have at least
one volume damper completely open.
3.6
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as
practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 12
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
b.
c.
2.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream
from duct restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps,
under final balanced conditions to create a complete static pressure profile for the
system.
Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and
electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. Provide sheaves and
belts for a minimum of one change per fan.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating
modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
2.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue
to adjust and measure to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch duct volume dampers
rather than dampers at air terminals where relevant.
1.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 13
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
2.
3.7
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A.
3.8
During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
PROCEDURES FOR OUTSIDE AIR VOLUME AND SPACE PRESSURIZATION
MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENTS
A.
General
1.
Outside air is introduced to the building via the air handling units for 3 functions:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Air is removed from the building by:
a.
b.
c.
3.
B.
Space pressurization
Exhaust system make-up air
Ventilation air for occupants
Exfiltration due to over pressurization
Return fans in air handling systems which spill some of this return air.
Miscellaneous building exhaust systems including, but not limited to,
bathroom exhaust, retail exhaust, combustion air, air craft loading
walkway pressurization, etc.
The building shall be positively pressurized at all times. Refer to building air
balance information on the drawings.
Test and adjust so that space pressurization is achieved in the following operating
modes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unoccupied with all exhaust systems off.
Unoccupied with all fixed rate, 24/7 exhaust systems operating.
Unoccupied with variable run-time exhaust systems operating, in addition to the
systems in paragraph (2) above. Begin with none of these variable run-time
systems operating, start one at a time and ensure positive pressurization is
obtained and stability maintained before starting the next. Repeat test for
shutdown of these systems, one at a time.
Simulate building occupancy by adjusting the CO2 measured values to test that
the ventilation air quantity control is correctly operational. Ensure system air
balance maintains positive building pressurization under varying values of return
air CO2 levels. Test for 3 different CO2 values.
Where space pressure sensors and controls are provided ensure specified
differential is achieved.
Refer to Sequences of Operation in Section 15900 and confirm system operation
complies.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 14
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
C.
Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the
space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing,
gaskets, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after
the reported deficiencies are corrected.
D.
Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room and each zone by adjusting
the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions: air flow is
used as the design criteria for space pressurization, except where pressure differential
control is specified.
E.
Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS
A.
Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
1.
2.
C.
Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second.
Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils.
Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are
at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
1.
2.
Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
Clear the space of people.
D.
Perform vibration measurements after air balancing and equipment testing is complete.
E.
Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
F.
Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
G.
Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp.
H.
Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration,
and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the
horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.
1.
Fans
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 15
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
Equipment Casing: Top and side.
Equipment Base: Top and side.
Building: Floor.
Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
I.
For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration
isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate
and report the differences.
J.
Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.10
Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
Verify that installation is level and plumb.
Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and
the travel-to-solid distance.
Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or
concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the
bottom of the inertia base and the floor.
PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
A.
Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with a sound meter complying with IEC
651, Type 1 or 2, set to an “A” weighting and “slow” meter response.
B.
Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the
sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
C.
Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas
where air velocities exceed 100 fpm, use a windscreen on the microphone.
D.
Perform sound-level testing after air balancing and equipment testing are complete.
E.
Close windows and doors to the space.
F.
Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise
level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
G.
Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be
measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-ofsight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.
H.
Take sound measurements at a height approximately 60 inches above the floor and at
least 36 inches from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the
measurements.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 16
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
I.
Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the
frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
J.
Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background
sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.
1.
K.
3.11
Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor
depending on the difference and adjust measurements.
Perform sound testing for each occupied space. For each space tested, select a
measurement location that has the greatest sound level. When testing multiple locations
for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one location that
is remote from the predominant sound source.
PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS
A.
After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated
conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.
B.
Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Make measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the
following:
1.
D.
At least one test location per fan system.
Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location specified two
times at two-hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.12
The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge,
flue termination, or vent termination.
Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
Temperature.
Relative humidity.
Air velocity.
Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
Formaldehyde (ppm).
FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM VERIFICATION
A.
Verify that controllers are correctly wired, calibrated and commissioned.
B.
Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 17
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
C.
Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
D.
Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
E.
Check the sequence of operation of control devices in all modes of operation. Note
device positions and correlate with airflow measurements. Note the speed of response
to input changes.
F.
Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
G.
Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
H.
Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system
operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
I.
Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
J.
Upon completion of the Building Control System completely check out and field test
hardware and software to assure that the complete system performs in accordance with
the approved sequences of operation. Test all equipment and control functions for
proper automatic and manual activation. Test each system and zone for proper
operation through its complete heating and cooling cycles.
K.
Include the specific tests and control functions listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.13
A.
3.14
A.
Full point check.
Smoke extract strategy.
Manual activation of each fan and smoke and fire/smoke damper.
System priorities and overrides.
Trouble, monitoring and annunciation capability.
Power resumption response.
System failure response, including emergency power operation.
All user notification messages.
All controls loops shall be verified as operating in a stable manner with no
hunting prior to the start of the commissioning process.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system airflow rates within the tolerances specified above.
REPORTING
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend
changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for
performance measuring and balancing devices.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 18
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
B.
3.15
Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for
each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond
paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced
systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1.
C.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Pump curves with operating points.
Fan curves with operating points.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data
in the final report, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of TAB firm.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 19
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
14.
15.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from
indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each
system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Terminal units.
Balancing stations.
Position of balancing devices.
Fan Test Reports: For supply fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Arrangement and class.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Motor Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Make and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Number of belts, make, and size.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 20
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
G.
Round and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1.
Report Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
H.
System-Coil Reports: For heating coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Airflow rate in cfm.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Vibration Measurement Reports
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
J.
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Room or riser served.
Coil make and size.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values)
a.
b.
c.
I.
System and air-handling unit number.
Location and zone.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
Duct size in inches.
Duct area in sq. ft.
Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
Actual airflow rate in cfm.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
Barometric pressure in psig.
Date and time of test.
Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor
horsepower.
Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.
Measurement readings for each measurement location.
Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.
Description of predominant vibration source.
Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA
test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each
frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings.
Record each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Location shall be noted and
keyed to plans. Record the following on the forms:
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 21
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
K.
Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L.
Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve.
Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
Space location within the building including floor level and room number.
Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location.
Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.
Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal.
Description of predominant sound source.
HVAC system designation.
Date and time of test.
Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start
of test.
Room number or similar description for each location.
Measurements at each location.
Observed deficiencies.
Instrument Calibration Reports
1.
Report Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
M.
Miscellaneous Equipment Reports
1.
3.16
A.
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
All air, fan, motor and controller data specified above.
INSPECTIONS
Initial Inspection
1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, and the 72-hour test has been
successfully completed, operate each system and randomly check measurements
to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the Final Report. Advise Owner 5 days in advance of
check tests.
Randomly check the following for each system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
Measure sound levels at 15 locations.
Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 22
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
e.
f.
B.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
Final Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report,
request that a final inspection be made by Owner.
TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence
of Owner.
Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to 15 percent of the total
measurements recorded in the TAB process.
If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements
documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the
measurements shall be noted as “FAILED.”
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 15 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall
be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
Tab firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final
report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final
report.
Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails,
Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing
and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of
the services from the final payment.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230593- 23
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
June 25, 2010
SECTION 230700
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
Provide and install complete systems of insulation for all new ductwork and equipment
as shown and specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Insulation materials and accessories furnished and installed hereunder shall, where
required, be accompanied by manufacturers’ current submittal or data sheets showing
compliance with applicable specifications listed here.
B.
Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by
skilled and experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation
work.
C.
Insulation materials, including all weather and vapor barrier materials, closures,
hangers, fitting covers and other accessories, shall be furnished and installed in strict
accordance with project drawings, plans and specifications. Work not in accordance
with these Specifications, damaged, or incorrectly installed shall be removed and/or
repaired and replaced as directed.
D.
Mockups:
1.
1.3
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A.
Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the
following specifications as applicable to the specific product or use:
1.
American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
ASTM C 553, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications"
ASTM C 612, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation"
ASTM C 795, "Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in
Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel"
ASTM C 1136, "Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance
Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation"
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 1
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
e.
f.
g.
h.
ASTM C 1290, "Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket
Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts"
ASTM G 21, "Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi" (fungi resistance section only)
ASTM G 22, "Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria
(bacteria resistance section only)
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1)
2.
U. S. Coast Guard Specification:
a.
3.
7.
Duct Liner Application Standard.
Mechanical Fastener Standard HF-1.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
a.
6.
ASC-A-7001C Standards for Adhesives for Duct Liner.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Inc.
a.
b.
5.
Approval #164.009, "Noncombustible Materials"
ASC - Adhesive and Seal Council
a.
4.
723 Tunnel Test.
NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturer’s Association “Fibrous Glass
Duct Linear Standard”
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
a.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
1)
2)
B.
90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
90B, Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
Insulation systems shall include:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
E-84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
Ductwork insulation and jacketing lining and accessories.
Firestopping
Accessories
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Data indicating product description and installation instructions.
1.
Insulation Materials.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 2
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adhesives.
Fastening Devices.
Vapor Barriers.
Jackets.
B.
Submit schedules of types, thickness, jacketing and accessories for application and
location.
C.
Submit materials safety sheets for all adhesives.
1.5
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.6
The term "mineral fiber" as defined by the above specifications includes fibers
manufactured of glass, rock, or slag processed from a molten state, with or without
binder.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Insulation materials furnished and installed under this specification should meet the
minimum requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2004. However, if other factors such as
condensation control or personnel protection are to be considered, the selection of the
thickness of insulation should satisfy the controlling factor).
B.
Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the fire hazard
requirements of any one of the following specifications:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.7
ASTM E 84
UL 723
NFPA 255
Show ratings on products, cartons, labels,etc. or verify by report from an approved
independent testing laboratory.
1.
2.
D.
American Society for Testing of Materials
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc
National Fire Protection Association
Flamespread: Minimum 25
Fuel contributed and smoke developed: Maximum 50
Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to moisture or humidity are not
acceptable.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
Maintain manufacturer’s recommend temperatures and conditions for tapes, adhesives,
and cements.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A.
All of the insulation materials and accessories covered by this specification shall be
delivered to the job site and stored in a safe, dry place with appropriate labels and/or
other product identification.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 3
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
B.
The contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the insulation
materials and accessories before, during, and after installation. No insulation material
shall be installed that has become damaged in any way. The contractor shall also use
all means necessary to protect work and materials installed by other trades.
C.
If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to
moisture or water, the contractor shall remove it from the job site and replace it with no
increase to the Contract Sum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fiberglass Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
C.
The Manville Corp.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Certain-Teed
The Manville Corp.
Armstrong
Halstead
Calcium Silicate Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
The Manville Corp.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Pabco.
D.
Styrofoam Insulation: Dow FR or FB.
E.
Adhesives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Benjamin Foster
Insul-Coustic
3M
Childers Products Co.
Miracle
Weld Pins:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Nelson Stud Welding Div. TRW Inc.
Duro-Dyne Corporation
Miracle
Tuff-Weld
Grip Nail
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 4
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
G.
Jacketing
1.
2.
2.2
All service jacketing by insulation manufacturer
PVC jacketing by insulation manufacturer.
MATERIALS
A.
Jackets and Coverings:
1.
2.
3.
0.016-inch stainless steel smooth surface with moisture barrier.
0.016-inch aluminum smooth surface with moisture barrier.
All service jacket laminate (ASJ):
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Aluminum foil vapor retarder.
Glas-Scrim reinforcing.
Kraft paper backing.
Double adhesive longitudinal jacket lap seal, two component butt strip
seal. (SSL)
PVC Plastic Jacket
a.
Jacket: (ASTM C921). One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet
material, off white color (Manville Zeston 2000)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
b.
5.
B.
-40 degrees F.
150 degrees F.
ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches
ASTM E84; 25.
ASTM E84; 50.
20 mil
Connections of brush-on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color
matching vinyl tape.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq yd (220g/sq m), plain weave cotton
treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
Adhesives and Coatings:
1.
Foster Product Names and Figure Numbers or equal as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Minimum Service Temperature:
Maximum Service Temperature:
Moisture Vapor Transmission:
Maximum Flame Spread:
Maximum Smoke Developed:
Thickness:
Lagging Adhesive: 30-36 UL label.
Vapor-Barrier Coating: Tite-fit 30-35 UL label.
Vaporseal Adhesive: Spark-fas 85-20 UL label.
Duct Adhesive: Spark-fas 85-20 UL label.
Outdoor Mastic: Monolar mastic 60-38 UL label.
Wire, Banding, and Fastening Devices:
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 5
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturers: Pabco, Marathon, Vimesco, Ideal or Venture.
Tie Wire: 18 gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch
centers.
Bands: 3/4-inch nominal width wing seals, of minimum thickness as follows:
a.
b.
4.
5.
D.
Aluminum: 0.007 inch indoors. Where exposed to weather, 0.020 inch.
Stainless Steel: 0.010 inch.
Staples: Outward clinching type of corrosion-resistant steel.
Weld pins to Support and Fasten Duct Insulation: Minimum 1/8- speed washer
or integral flange of minimum 1-3/8 inches diameter.
Ductwork, Casings, Housings and Plenums Insulation: Type as scheduled for services
listed.
1.
Type DW: Flexible fibrous glass blanket with vapor barrier.
a.
b.
1-DW: Manville "Standard" Microlite, 1-1/2 inch thick duct wrap.
Thermal conductivity at 75 degrees F mean, K=0.26 BTU/hr.-degrees
F/inch installed "R" 4.5, 1 pcf.
Factory applied jacket on each of the above:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
c.
2.
Foil-scrim-kraft laminate (FSK):
Aluminum foil facing.
Glass scrim reinforcing.
Kraft paper backing.
Maximum vapor permanence: 0.02 perms.
One 2 inch flange, vapor sealed.
Minimum insulation as noted above and to comply with local energy code.
In the absence of more stringent requirements: minimum R-value R-5 for
ductwork indoors and R-8 for ductwork outdoors.
Please refer to section 233113 Metal Ducts for duct liner requirements
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
Provide insulation as required for all packaged equipment whether furnished with
equipment or not.
Before applying insulation:
a.
b.
Test ductwork for tightness; obtain review and acceptance.
Clean surfaces of dust, grease, rust, extra flux and foreign matter.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 6
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
c.
B.
Ensure surface is clean and dry before application. Ensure insulation is
dry before and during installation.
Jackets and Facings:
1.
2.
Vaporsealed types: Continuous. Staples not permitted.
For ducts, plenums, casings, housings, and equipment:
a.
Vaporseal fibrous glass blanket:
1)
2)
3)
b.
C.
Fibrous glass board: Seal joints and breaks in facings with 4-inch wide
tape to match facing and adhere with vapor seal adhesive.
Adhesives and Coatings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Adhere jackets and facings with wet coat of adhesive.
Lap sealing: 4 inches.
Surfaces to be adhered: Completely coated with adhesive.
Wiring, Banding, and Fastening Devices:
1.
Secure insulation to ductwork and equipment in accordance with the following
minimum requirements:
a.
Ductwork mechanical fasteners:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
b.
E.
2-inch lap strip at one end.
Peel insulation for 2-inch lap strip along longitudinal joints.
Seal lap strips with vaporseal adhesive.
Weld pins or grip nails.
Spacing: Minimum 12 inch centers and minimum 2 rows per side
of duct.
Maximum permissible load:
5 pounds for 2 inch by 2 inch baseplate.
10 pounds for 2-3/4 inch by 2-3/4 inch baseplate.
Clip off pin penetrations flush with insulation surface or facing.
Seal pins and washers:
With 2 inch square pieces of vapor barrier material to match facing.
Adhere with vaporseal adhesive.
Field quality control: Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation
due to thermal movement or poor workmanship.
Plenum and Duct Insulation:
1.
2.
Comply with published recommendations of manufacturer.
Unless otherwise shown, apply insulation externally.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 7
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
3.
Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls.
a.
4.
5.
6.
Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
Locate insulation cover seams in least visible locations.
Where ducts run in groups too close to be individually insulated and finished:
a.
b.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Pack around ducts with fireproof self-supporting insulation material.
Properly seal.
Completely fill all spaces between ducts with rigid or flexible insulation
material.
Insulate and finish exterior surfaces of groups as specified for particular
service.
Where ducts cannot be insulated after erection, insulate prior to installation.
Where specified thickness of insulation exceeds available thickness in single
layer, provide insulation in 2 or more layers with joints staggered.
Finish with systems at operating conditions.
Wrap: Duct and plenum wrap.
a.
Application, rectangular, round and oval duct:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
b.
Apply the duct wrap over clean, dry sheet metal ductwork that has
been sealed airtight at all seams and joints.
Install duct wrap to allow maximum fullness at corners. Avoid
excessive compression. Minimum thickness at corners is 1 inch.
Butt insulation tightly at joints.
Secure with 4 inch strips of adhesive at 8 inches on center, 2 inch
lap strip at one end.
Apply with one hundred percent coverage of adhesive, similar to
Foster's 85-15.
Overlap vapor barrier facing a minimum of 2 inches. Remove
insulation from lap prior to stapling.
Staple all vapor barrier seams approximately 6 inches on center with
outward clinching staples, and seal lap strips with a foil vapor
barrier tape, or vapor barrier mastic, such as 3M No. 35.
When ducts are over 24 inches in width, additionally secure the duct
wrap to the bottom of rectangular ducts with mechanical fasteners
spaced on 12-inch centers, but not less than 1 pin on each surface, to
prevent sagging of insulation.
Seal penetration of facing to provide a vapor tight system.
Duct and plenum rigid board wrap:
1)
2)
3)
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
In addition to above general requirements:
Score insulation to cover standing seams.
Secure with mechanical fasteners spaced 16 inches on centers or
closer as required to hold insulation firmly to duct.
230700- 8
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
4)
11.
12.
3.2
Seal all joints and pin penetrations with pressure sensitive aluminum
foil tape. Reinforce all exposed edges with corner bead.
Insulation as specified herein shall be applied to all new ductwork, plenums, etc.
and to existing ductwork, etc., where existing insulation is damaged.
Install fire wrap as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with all
stated direction.
SCHEDULE: DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION
A.
Notes for Insulation Application Schedule:
1.
2.
When both insulation and lining have been specified for a specific section of
ductwork, the amount of external insulation may be reduced to achieve an overall
assembly insulation value (U) equivalent to that of the specified duct insulation.
Provide fire-rated duct wrap where specified on the drawing.
a.
B.
Wrap may be used to extend rating to suitable fire damper location as
required only where noted on the drawing or agreed with the Engineer.
Application Schedule: Ductwork shall be acoustically lined and/or insulated as follows:
Item
Supply
All supply ductwork
Other return air ductwork
Outside air ducts in occupied spaces and
mechanical rooms
1-DW
1-DW
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230700- 9
Return
Exhaust
HVAC Insulation
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230993
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Related Sections included the following:
1.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and
equipment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control
equipment and devices and submittal requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B.
BMS: Building management system
1.4
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A.
Supply Fan and Electric Heating Coil
1.
2.
3.
The supply fan and electric heating coil shall be controlled via space
thermostat/controller. The BMS contractor shall provide and install.
The supply fan and electric heating coils shall started/stopped by the BMS local
controller based on a time of day schedule or a manual command from the
controller.
On a call for ventilation, the supply fan shall be cycled on/off to maintain
setpoint. On a call for heating, the supply fan and electric heating coil (sequential
2-stage heating operation to maintain heating setpoint) shall be cycled on/off to
maintain setpoint. Provide time delay and dead band to prevent short cycling
between fan on/off and 2-stage heating control. The electric heating coil shall be
disabled if supply fan is off as proven by air flow switch.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230993- 1
Sequence of Operations
June 30, 2010
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Requirements of Section 230500 shall also govern work specified together with all
applicable paragraphs of other Division 23 sections.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Duct liner.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiberreinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings
for mechanical equipment.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,
duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam
and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and
performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 1
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1.
2.
B.
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Prior to fabrication of ductwork, submit “shop standards,” including (but not
limited to)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Submit test reports for the following
a.
b.
C.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, components, and attachments to other work.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, materials, metal gauges, liner
material, extend of internal lining, and static-pressure classes, changes in
pressure class, transitions.
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Locations for duct accessories, including volume dampers, fire & smoke
dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building
attachment, and vibration isolation. Submit structural calculations (refer to
§1.4.D.5).
Flamespread of resins (refer to UL-723).
Air leakage (refer to §3.9.B).
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sheet metal thicknesses.
Joint and seam construction and sealing.
Reinforcement details and spacing.
Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting
hangers and supports.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 2
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
D.
Coordination Drawings: Dimensioned plans, drawn at 3/8” = 1’-0” scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, with each trade in a
separate color, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general
construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate
proposed changes to duct layout. Unless otherwise noted, duct sizes shown on the
contract drawings are clear internal airway dimensions, and allowance shall be
made for internal lining as appropriate.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which duct will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
Required openings in structural and architectural systems.
Location of supports and suspension systems.
Locations and critical dimensions of structural steel
Major electrical conduit and cable tray routes
Dimensions of actual equipment to be installed
Dimensioned code compliant equipment access including access door locations
and swings
All conflicts between trades should be resolved prior to submission to the
Architect/Engineer.
Locations of walls and partitions, doors, door swings, lighting and all other
information required to assure complete coordination among the various trades
Items penetrating finished ceiling with sizes and elevations including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers runs.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
Plumbing piping runs.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Reference Standards:
1.
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA No. 90-A. "Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA), 8224 Old Court House Road, Vienna, Virginia, 22180.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 3
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Balancing and Adjustment Manual: In this Specification shall mean the
first edition of the “Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air
Distribution System”.
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible", 2005.
"Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards", 1977.
"Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards", 1980.
“HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual”, 1985.
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
"Industrial Ventilation-A Manual of Recommended Practice", 20th edition.
Factory Mutual (FM) Standard 7-78.
NFPA 91.
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Voluntary Product Standard 15-69.
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA): “Fibrous Glass
Duct Liner Standard”
ASTM 411-61: “Test for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Surface
Insulation.”
ASTM E-84/UL 723/NFPA 255: "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials."
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
[AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.]
[AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.]
[AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.]
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum
supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
D.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
E.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
F.
Mockups:
1.
Before installing duct systems, build mockups representing static-pressure
classes in excess of 3-inch wg (750 Pa). Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
a.
b.
c.
Five transverse joints.
One access door(s).
Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 4
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
G.
Two typical flexible duct or flexible-connector connections for each duct
and apparatus.
One 90-degree turn(s) with turning vanes.
One fire damper(s).
One subduct extension including stainless riser.
One Lab supply branch connection to riser.
One each lab supply and exhaust flat oval ductwork.
One 24” dia. stainless exhaust stack.
Perform leakage tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Revise
mockup construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve
specified minimum acceptable results.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
Delivery and Storage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
All ductwork shall be delivered to the job site in a dry and clean state.
All ductwork shall be stored in a manner and location to minimize physical
damage to any part of the ductwork (including internal lining), and stored in a
dry and clean location.
All ductwork shall be stored in a clean and dry environment and protected from
dust and dirt ingress.
All ductwork shall be delivered to the job site with shop-installed caps on all
openings. Caps shall be made of heavy gauge polythene sheets securely taped to
duct on all sides. Any ductwork not protected in this manner will be rejected and
removed from the jobsite and replaced at no increase in the Contract Sum.
Ductwork that has been contaminated by dust shall be cleaned in accordance with
proper standards. All lined ductwork shall be cleaned using the methodology
outlined in the NAIMA booklet “Cleaning Fibrous Glass Insulated Air Duct
Systems.”
Ductwork with lining that has been contaminated by liquids shall be fully dried.
Prior to installation.
Installation of any damaged or refurbished ductwork shall be at the discretion of
the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: T-24 flanged with corner pieces according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth)
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 5
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock with a 3/8-inch minimum pocket according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5,
"Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select
types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure
class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
E.
Ductwork not insulated and larger than 18" shall be either cross broken or beaded.
F.
All mitered elbows shall be provided with hollow vanes having different inside and
outside curvatures, vanes shall be equal to "Ducturns" as manufactured by Tuttle and
Bailey.
G.
Unless otherwise shown on the contract drawings, all elbows shall have a throat radius
equal to the width of the duct in the direction of the elbow.
H.
All branch ducts shall be provided with take-off pieces including 45 degree angled sides
as per SMACNA Figure 2-6. Straight taps shall not be acceptable.
2.2
SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible
Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and
diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).
C.
Transverse Joints: Joint RT-1 (beaded sleeve joint) and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2,
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 6
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
"Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.
D.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct
and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.
2.
E.
2.3
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter:
Flanged.
Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with buttwelded longitudinal seams.
Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches (1830 mm) in width (major
dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and
Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
3.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180) both sides.
Galvanized Coating Designation for external/exposed ductwork: G90 (Z275)
both sides.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized in compliance with
ASTM D2092.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as
indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface
finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule"
Article.
D.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14
temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for
duct surfaces exposed to view.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 7
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
E.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;
black and galvanized.
1.
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce
aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or
EPDM gasket materials.
F.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36
inches (900 mm).
G.
All ductwork shall have the metal gauge visibly marked on all sections by
manufacturer.
2.4
DUCT LINER
A.
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B;
and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Johns Manville.
CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Performance:
a.
Type 1-AL, Flexible: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
1)
2)
b.
Type 2-AL, Flexible: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
1)
2)
c.
1” thickness
Noise reduction coefficient 0.70 tested in accordance with ASTM C
423 and ASTM E 795.
2” thickness
Noise reduction coefficient 0.95 tested in accordance with ASTM C
423 and ASTM E 795.
Type CL, Flexible High Performance: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at
75 deg F
1)
2)
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
1” thickness
Noise reduction coefficient 0.75 tested in accordance with ASTM C
423 and ASTM E 795.
233113 - 8
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
3.
Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
a.
4.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
NFPA-90A coating on side facing air stream.
1)
B.
Natural-Fiber Duct Liner: 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent
polybinding fibers, treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Insulation Pins and Washers:
1.
2.
D.
Bonded Logic, Inc.
Reflectix Inc.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.034 W/m x
K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature when tested according to
ASTM C 518.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and
maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84;
certified by an NRTL.
Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying
with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a.
C.
Suitable for velocity up to 4000-fpm.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
galvanized carbon-steel washer.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch(0.41-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 9
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness
with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
Apply adhesive / edge seal to transverse edges of liner facing upstream and
downstream that do not receive metal nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal
joints necessary.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500
fpm (12.7 m/s).
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at
intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm)
from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm)
longitudinally.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at
uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a.
10.
E.
Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with
an overall open area of 23 percent.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,
turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat
sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to
duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
Where round ducts are specified to be lined, use
1.
2.5
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher
than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
Prefabricated circular fiberglass lining inserts.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants
and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smokedeveloped index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 10
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
B.
Two-Part Tape Sealing System as manufactured by Hardcast:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant as manufactured by Foster:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Tape: DT-5400, woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,
durable, airtight seal.
Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm).
Sealant: RTA-50, modified styrene acrylic for exterior; FTA-20 for interior.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
Service: Indoor and outdoor.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum.
For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene
plasticizer.
F.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg
(0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) staticpressure class, positive or negative.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 11
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
2.6
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated
couplings and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated or galvanized lowcarbon mild steel rods, full threaded or threaded at each end, two removeable nuts at
each end.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Same materials as ducts, except that straps for stainless steel
ducts in unfinished spaces may be galvanized steel. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M),
"Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes
for Round Duct."
D.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; same
material as duct materials.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Zinc or cadmium plated on galvanized duct.
Minimum screw size: Number 10.
Minimum rivet size: 4 pounds, blind rivets are not acceptable.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
F.
Power / Powder actuated anchors are not acceptable.
G.
Machine bolts and nuts: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel.
H.
Concrete inserts: Steel or malleable iron of the continuously slotted type of Universal
inserts.
I.
Self-drilled expanding fastener: Hilti type.
J.
Expansion shields: “Star Slugin”, single unit type, unless otherwise specified
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 12
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to
size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other
design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and
for branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation
thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms
and enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four
sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for
fire and smoke dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction
Guidelines."
M.
Install ductwork in adherence to ceiling height shown on Drawings. Establish necessary
space requirements so as to maintain required clearances around all equipment.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 13
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
N.
Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, breathing, vibrations or noise. Such reinforcing
shall be as recommended in the references specified herein.
O.
Avoid penetration of ducts. Where penetrations are unavoidable ductwork details shall
be based on SMACNA Figure 2-8 and agreed with the Engineer before fabrication.
P.
At exposed duct penetrations of walls, floors, and ceilings, provide sheet metal angle
type escutcheons.
Q.
Duct openings: Provide openings where required to accommodate thermometers, smoke
detectors, controllers, etc.
R.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems:
1.
2.
Complete with metal cap with spring device or screw to ensure against air
leakage.
For pilot tube tests install Ventlok No. 699 or 699-2 instrument.
S.
Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside
metal trim angle to cover complete perimeter of insulation edge.
T.
Waterproof seams and joints in ductwork exposed to the weather by application twopart tape sealing system..
U.
At ceiling supply diffusers, extend horizontal branch duct 1 foot beyond diffuser.
V.
Cap all erected ductwork to prevent ingress of dust and dirt at the end of each working
day.
W.
All ductwork shall be fully protected from damage during the construction phase.
X.
Do not use sheet metal screws in the bottom panels of ducts having soldered, welded or
brazed seams.
Y.
Unless otherwise specified or shown support vertical ducts from each floor slab or by
purpose made brackets fixed to the structure.
Z.
Do not suspend ducts from plumbing, conduits or related supports.
AA. All sections of the duct designated as lined shall be completely covered with lining
material and the material shall be cut to ensure tight flush butt joints without gaps. All
joints shall be coated and sealed.
BB.
Install metal nosing on all leading and trailing edges of lined ductwork.
CC.
The ductwork lining material shall be secured with mechanical fasteners as
recommended by the manufacturer and adhered to the sheet metal with a full coverage
of the manufacturers recommended adhesive which shall be a UL listed adhesive. Pin
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 14
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer. Adhesive shall not
contain volatile solvents.
DD. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct
size to allow for lining / insulation thickness.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A.
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do
not use two-part tape sealing system.
C.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.
When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the
exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of
fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.3
DUCT SEALING
A.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
2.
3.4
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
All Ducts: Seal Class A.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, self-drilled expanding fastener, and expansion
shields as appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Do not use power / powder-actuated concrete fasteners.
Refer to 230548 (Mechanical Sound and Vibration) for isolation requirements.
Upper attachments to be in accordance with SMACANA Figure 4-2-1, 2, 3, 6, 7,
and 8 only.
Support ductwork so that horizontal ducts are without sag or sway, vertical ducts
are without buckle, and all ducts are free from the possibility of deformation,
collapse, or vibration.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 15
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum
Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger
spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and
within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with
welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum
intervals of 16 feet (5 m).
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23
Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
PAINTING
A.
3.7
Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not
have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanizedsteel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Leakage Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a
test report for each test.
Test 20% of all systems. Systems to be identified by the Engineer.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage
testing and for compliance with test requirements.
Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or
section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum
design operating pressure.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 16
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
6.
7.
Give seven business days' advance notice for testing for witnessing by Owner’s
Representative.
Procedure:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
C.
Seal openings in ducts and plenums to be tested.
Connect test apparatus to test section using flexible duct connection or
hose.
Close damper on blower suction side, to prevent excessive buildup of
pressure.
Start blower and gradually open damper on suction side of blower.
Build up pressure in test section. Test supply air, return, exhaust and
outside air to 100 percent of duct construction pressure rating.
Determine amount of air leakage by makeup air flow measurements.
Total allowable leakage is to be calculated using the formula F=C L x p 0.65
Where F = Allowable leakage per 100 square feet
C L = Leakage classification
P = Duct pressure classification
Repair air leaks as required and retest when seals have cured until leakage
rate is acceptable. Noise generated from duct leakage is not acceptable.
Remove temporary blanks and seals as appropriate.
Visually mark tested sections with certification sticker and initials of field
test inspector.
Submit certification of test results.
Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1.
2.
Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness
according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and
Restoration of HVAC Systems."
a.
b.
Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter
media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
Installation shall meet or exceed the requirements of SMACNA standard
“IAQ guideline for occupied building under construction (latest edition).”
1)
c.
Follow the guidelines set for by LEED (latest version) for credit 3.1
(construction IAQ management).
All temporary filters shall have a minimum efficiency of MERV-8.
D.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 17
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
3.8
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. Provide
a minimum of 20-man days of cleaning, or as instructed by the Owner.
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1.
2.
D.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with
99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed
from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes
and other points of entry into building.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure
class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or
lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner
manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for
access panels and doors.
Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, filters and
filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
Coils and related components.
Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums
and mechanical equipment rooms.
Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1.
2.
3.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract
contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces
without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 18
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
4.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit
duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged,
deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning
materials; comb and straighten fins.
Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
5.
6.
3.9
START UP
A.
3.10
A.
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing for HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as
follows:
1.
Lined ductwork: double wall with perforated liner. Coordinate locations of
ductwork requiring liner with the contract drawings.
Exposed ductwork in occupied areas: round or flat oval. Coordinate locations of
exposed ductwork in occupied areas with the contract drawings.
2.
B.
System
Pressure
Classification
Seal Class
Supply and return
Outdoor air
4”
3”
A
A
Round
Leakage
Class
3
3
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
2.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
Stainless-Steel Ducts:
a.
b.
3.
C.
Rectangular
Leakage
Class
6
6
Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.
Liner:
1.
Application Schedule: Ductwork shall be acoustically lined as follows:
Item
Supply
Return
Exhaust
Transfer Ducts
All ducts shown on drawings as being
acoustically lined
2-AL
2-AL
2-AL
2-AL
1-AL
1-AL
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 19
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
D.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:
1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):
1)
2)
3)
2.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and
two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
b.
c.
3.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and
Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of
direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio
and three segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter
ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or
pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Welded.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 20
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
E.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a.
b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233113 - 21
Metal Ducts
June 30, 2010
SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Requirements of Section 230500 shall also govern work specified together with all
applicable paragraphs of other Division 23 sections.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Manual volume dampers.
Control dampers.
Fire dampers.
Flange connectors.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounted access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator
caps.
Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
B.
For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data.
Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
product data and attachments to other work, include with ductwork shop drawings
1.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other
construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 1
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Special fittings.
Manual volume damper installations.
Concealed volume damper operators, with locations shown on the
ductwork shop drawings, and details/method of installation to finished
surfaces.
Control damper installations.
Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper,
ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and ductmounted access doors and remote damper operators. Include installation
details for angles, sleeves, breakaway connections, out-of-wall
installations, and factory insulation.
Duct security bars.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Duct access doors
Duct test holes
Duct Silencers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of this
Division and Division 1 as applicable.
Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses,
dimensional data, pressure losses, acoustical performance, layout,
and connection details.
Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials,
dimensional data, pressure losses, acoustical performance and
conformance with Reference Standards applicable.
Test Reports: Indicate dynamic insertion loss and noise generation
values of silencers meet or exceed specified sound transmission loss
values. Do not exceed static pressure drops indicated in the
equipment schedules.
Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate Installation
requirements which maintain integrity of sound isolation.
Manufacturers Field Reports: Submit under provisions of General
Conditions and Division 1 as applicable. Indicate installation is
complete and in accordance with instructions.
Submittals and Report: Definitions conform to ANSI S1.1.
Schedule of acoustic lining, showing type, thickness and location.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceilingmounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items
involved.
D.
Source quality-control reports.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 2
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
F.
Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Reference Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
UL 555 and UL 555S- Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers.
ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and test Manual.
AMCA 500- Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of
Outlets and Inlets.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating.
AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
Data.
AMCA 302 - Application of Sound Loudness Ratings for Non-Ducted Air
Moving Devices.
AMCA 303 - Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Ducted Air Moving
Devices Recommended Typical dBa Calculation.
ANSI S1.1 - Acoustical Terminology (Including Mechanical Shock and
Vibration).
ANSI S1.8 - Preferred Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels.
ANSI S1.13 - Methods for Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels.
ARI 575 - Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms.
ASA 16 (ANSI S1.36) - Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power
Levels of Noise Sources.
ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4) - Specification for Sound Level Meters.
ASA 49 (ANSI S12.1) - Preparation of Standard Procedures to Determine the
Noise Emission from Sources.
ASHRAE 68 - Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure
for Fans.
ASHRAE Handbook - Systems Volume, Chapter “Sound and Vibration
Control”.
ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission of Building Partition.
ASTM E477 - Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated
Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow Performance.
ASTM E596 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of
Sound Isolating Enclosures.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 3
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
B.
1.5
Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
Special tools for concealed volume damper operator: one per floor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180).
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a
No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and finish to be specified by architect for exposed
ducts.
D.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper
H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed
ducts.
E.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063,
Temper T6.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
G.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36
inches (900 mm).
2.2
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 4
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Standard leakage rating with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
c.
d.
7.
B.
Dampers less than 12 inches (300mm): single blade.
Dampers 12 inches (300mm) and greater: Opposed-blade design, 8 inches
(200mm) wide.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Galvanized-steel, 16 gauge.
Blade Axles: ½ inch (13mm) minimum steel, extending 6 inches (150mm)
beyond frame. ½ inch (13mm) jackshaft for multisection dampers for singlesided actuation.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 16 gauge minimum thickness.
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Dampers less than 12”: 4½ inches (115mm) wide.
Dampers 12” and larger: minimum 5 inches (89mm) wide.
Blades:
a.
b.
6.
Ruskin Company.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Molded synthetic, 48 inches (1220mm) maximum spacing.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less and
greater than 18 inches (450mm) shall have axles full length of damper
blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Ruskin Company.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Standard leakage rating.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 5
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
4.
5.
Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels;
frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in
ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
7.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
2.3
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum
sheet.
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded
aluminum.
Molded synthetic.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall
have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ruskin Company.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
B.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. Less than 10cfm/sqft at 4 inches
WG.
C.
Frames:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Hat shaped.
Galvanized-steel channels, 16 gauge.
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Dampers less than 12 inches (300mm): 4½ inches (115mm) wide.
Dampers 12 inches (300mm) and larger: minimum 5 inches (89mm) wide.
Stainless steel jamb seals.
Blades:
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 6
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; plated steel extending minimum 6 inches
(150mm) beyond frame; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends
sealed against blade bearings. ½ inch (13mm) jackshaft for multisection dampers for
single-sided actuation.
1.
F.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 25 to plus 180 deg F (minus 32 to
plus 83 deg C).
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches (150 mm).
Opposed-blade design.
Galvanized steel.
16 gauge.
Blade Edging: PVC.
Molded synthetic.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less and greater
than 18 inches (450mm) shall have axles full length of damper blades and
bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
DAMPER REGULATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following complete with dial regulator, square end bearing, and spring end bearing
for accessible damper locations:
1.
2.
B.
Shaft length 12 inches (300mm) or less:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Young Regulator Co.
¼ inch (6mm) dial regulator.
Die cast steel with heavy gauge dial.
3/32 inch (2.5mm) steel handle.
¾ inch (19mm) hexagonal nut.
All steel components zinc plated.
Provide elevated dial or shaft extension for use on insulated ducts.
Shaft length greater than 12 inches (300mm) and less than 20 inches (500mm):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3/8 inch (9.5mm) dial regulator.
Die cast steel with heavy gauge dial.
3/32 inch (2.5mm) steel handle.
¾ inch (19mm) hexagonal nut.
All steel components zinc plated.
Provide elevated dial or shaft extension for use on insulated ducts.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 7
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
D.
Shaft length 20 inches (500mm) or greater:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Die-cast steel.
Self-locking regulator with locking nut.
Heavy steel stamped handle.
Serrated teeth to prevent slippage with flat spring between the two pieces.
Gasket.
Provide elevated dial or shaft extension for use on insulated ducts.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ruskin Company.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
B.
Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg (1-kPa) static pressure class and minimum2000fpm (10-m/s) velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours in a 2 hour wall, ½ hour in a 1 hour wall.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick, as indicated,
and of length to suit application.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper
frame must comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet
steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick,
galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 8
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
2.6
FLANGE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Description: roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C.
Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.7
TURNING VANES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
METALAIRE, Inc.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel;
support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct
mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with
perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resinbonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to
blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4,
"Vane Support in Elbows."
E.
Vane Construction:
1.
Single wall
a.
b.
For use with lower than 3 inch wg (750 Pa) pressure classification system,
except as noted.
¾ inch (19mm) trailing edge and 2 inch (50mm) radius.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 9
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
c.
d.
2.
Double wall
a.
b.
3.
2.8
Type Y blades for ducts 36 inches (915mm) or less in width.
Type Z blades for ducts greater than 36 inches (915mm) in width.
For use with 3 inch wg (750Pa) and higher pressure classification systems.
Small double thickness vanes with 2 inch (50mm) inside radius.
Vane length not to exceed 36 inches (915mm). Provide separate equal size
section for greater lengths.
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct
Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Double wall, rectangular, minimum 18 inch x 18 inch (450mmx450mm),
or as indicated.
Galvanized sheet metal fabricated of the same material, finish and gauge
as the ductwork (minimum 20 gauge).
Vision panel if indicated
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and
cam latches.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Design lock edge of doors with a bevel of 1/8-inch (3mm) in 1 inch
(25mm) and fill interior hollow space with insulation, thermally equivalent
to the ductwork insulation. Lap inner face of door over duct opening, a
minimum of 1/4-inch (6mm) on all four edges of the free duct opening.
Frame duct opening for each door with a continuous 1 inch by 1 inch
(25mmx25mm) by 12 gauge sheet metal angle, of the same material as the
duct in which installed, riveted to the exterior surface of the duct opening.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash
locks, with inside striker for contacting inside of door framing to provide a
compression fit.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 10
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
b.
4.
5.
6.
2.9
Access Doors 24 inches and greater (600 mm): Three hinges and two
compression latches.
Butt hinges: Provide galvanized steel with brass pins, approximately 2 inches by
1-1/2 inches wide (50mmx38mm) for doors under 24 inches (610mm) high;
hinges 3 inches by 2 inches wide (75mmx50mm) for doors 24 inches (610mm)
higher and greater.
Casement fasteners: Steel or cast aluminum with a galvanized or aluminized
finish.
Door latches: operable rustproof zinc/aluminum alloy latch accessible from
inside and outside duct. Steel and sponge rubber washers to prevent leakage.
Beveled flange to work against frame to achieve compression.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flame Gard, Inc.
3M.
B.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428-inch (1.1-mm) stainless steel.
D.
Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F (1093 deg C).
F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.
2.10
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, in compliance with ASTM E84.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-inches (75 mm) wide
attached to 2 strips of 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide, 16 gauge, galvanized sheet steel or
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 11
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with
connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.
Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd. (542 g/sq. m).
Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch (50 N/mm) in the warp and 185 lbf/inch
(32 N/mm) in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg C).
High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with
chemical-resistant coating.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m).
Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch
(77 N/mm) in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg C).
High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone
rubber.
1.
2.
H.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch
(63 N/mm) in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. (474 g/sq. m).
Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch (79 N/mm) in the warp and 340 lbf/inch
(60 N/mm) in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg C).
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to
fan discharge and duct.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 12
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
7.
J.
2.11
A.
Connector construction shall be such to resist static pressure of ductwork systems as
specified in 233113 (ductwork) or as shown on the drawings.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 0.5-inch wg (125 Pa)
negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm (25 m/s).
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 93 deg C).
Water Vapor Permeance: 0.17 grains per sq. ft. per hour per inch of Hg. (Test
Method: ASTM E 96, Procedure A)
Insulation R-Value: R-4.2 minimum at 75 deg F.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
2.
E.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm (20 m/s).
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 93 deg C).
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically
wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; metallized polyester vapor-barrier
film. Provide 100% separation of airstream and fiberglass through non-perforated core.
Individual lengths with factory fabricated steel compression clamp connection collars at
both ends.
1.
D.
Thermaflex MKE
Cody Company, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by
helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)
movement at start and stop.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm), to
suit duct size.
Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape.
Regenerative Noise:
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 13
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
1.
Noise due to air turbulence within the duct shall not exceed the following sound
power levels for a 12-inch diameter duct with an air speed of 1,000 feet per
minute.
Octave band center
frequency (Hz)
Sound power levels (dB)
referenced to 10-12 watts
2.12
125
250
500
1000
2000
30
31
30
22
20
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including
screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments
and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. Permanent test holes shall be factory
fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provided extended neck fitting to
clear insulation as required.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
C.
Blanking Plate: 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, painted matt black cut to size as
required.
D.
Blanking Panel: Construct from 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sandwich with 1 inch
thick (25mm), 1 1/2 lb cu. ft density rigid board fiberglass insulation. Attach insulation
to metal with adhesive fasteners and edge tape. Overlap front and back metal plates and
tack weld at 3 inch (76mm) centers.
E.
Perforated Plate: Construct from 16 gauge galvanized steel with circular holes equally
distributed and equally sized to achieve the free area required. Galvanized after
perforating.
F.
Flashing: 16 gage ducts through roof, galvanized steel, flashed and counterflashed, and
provided with storm collars to secure watertight construction.
G.
Bird Screens: 14 gauge, 1/2-inch (12mm) galvanized wire mesh set in galvanized steel
frame.
H.
Equalizing Grid: 3 inch (76mm) thick aluminum honeycomb grid with 3/8-inch
(9.5mm) openings securely fastened inside a 16 gauge galvanized steel duct section 6
inches (150mm) long. Grid and casing in outside air intake duct shall be 304 stainless
steel.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 14
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install backdraft or control dampers at outlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close
as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat
channel.
1.
2.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Provide concealed remove volume damper operators for all volume dampers in
inaccessible locations. Operator shall be installed within the ceiling or wall such that the
unit is flush with the finished surface. Operators for diffusers shall not be located in
active supply portions of the diffuser, but may be installed in blank-off locations and/or
return diffusers. Coordinate location of operator with the Architect.
G.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets, and as required for testing and balancing, and
elsewhere as indicated.
H.
Install fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
I.
Demonstrate resetting of fire dampers / fire & smoke dampers to the AHJ.
J.
Provide fire and smoke dampers, fire dampers at locations where ducts and outlets pass
through fire rated components. Install with required perimeter mounting angles,
sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings
and hinges. Install all dampers in accordance with SMACNA fire damper guide and
manufacturer’s instructions.
K.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and
maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
On both sides of duct coils.
Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 15
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, and equipment.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall
fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible
links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for
access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access
doors installed downstream from dampers.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.
Upstream from turning vanes.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
L.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
M.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
Head and Shoulders Access: 18 by 18 inches (450 by 450 mm).
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
N.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
O.
On doors of systems where fan is scheduled for 4 inches static pressure or greater,
provide painted signs appropriately worded as follows:
1.
2.
P.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to motorized equipment.
1.
Q.
CAUTION – DOOR CLOSES WITH AIR PRESSURE
CAUTION – DOOR OPENS WITH AIR PRESSURE
Connectors shall not be less than 6 inches long or more than 10 inches long.
Provide ductwork connected to air inlet and outlet devices, with all necessary
transformation pieces, flexible fabric connections, as required.
1.
2.
For round duct connection, install fabric connectors a minimum of 3 inches
(76mm) in length for ducts having a maximum diameter of 18 inches (450mm)
and a minimum of 5 inches (125mm) in length for duct diameters over 18 inches
(450mm) in size.
Secure fabric connectors tightly to fans, casings and ducts as follows:
a.
b.
Secure round connectors with 12 gauge by 1 inch (25mm) wide galvanized
steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts.
Secure rectangular connectors with 1 inch by 1/8-inch (25mmx3mm) thick
flat galvanized steel bars, with screws or bolts on 8 inch (200mm) centers
maximum, or with sheet metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 16
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
metal joint and secure complete joint with sheet metal screws on 6-inch
centers maximum.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Allow at least 3 inch (76mm) slack in connections.
Fabric connectors may be factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled units, with
minimum 24 gauge metal edges, secured to fabric with double lock seams.
Do not paint fabric connectors.
Install also in ducts at structural expansion joints.
R.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts to change
directions.
S.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 36-inch (920-mm)
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
T.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. Duct collars exceeding 12” dia.
Shall have draw bands positioned behind a bead on the metal collar, per SMACNA.
U.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
V.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment.
Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)
movement during start and stop of fans.
W.
Provide wire mesh screens on all duct openings that do not contain grilles or access
panels.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range
of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233300 - 17
Air Duct Accessories
June 30, 2010
SECTION 233416
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Backward-inclined centrifugal fans.
Forward-curved centrifugal fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above
sea level.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Non-generic certified fan performance curves with system specific operating
conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Accessories.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
for designing vibration isolation bases.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 1
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
3.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall
be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.
D.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
E.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
F.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
G.
AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
H.
ANSI/ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
I.
ANSI/ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
J.
Casing corrosion compliance: All external casings shall be able to sustain 1000 hour
salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117 - Test Method of Salt Spray [Fog]
Testing.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
B.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 2
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
D.
1.7
Protect motors, shafts, and bearing from weather and construction dust.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
1.9
The manufacturer shall provide the parts warranty for equipment manufactured and all
vendor supplied components. The said warranty shall cover replacement of all
defective parts for a period of 12 months from equipment start up.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
B.
Greenheck.
Loren Cook Company.
Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive
assembly, and support structure.
1.
2.
3.
Where noted, fan shall be UL listed for use as “Power Ventilators for Smoke
Control Systems” for 500 deg F (260 deg C) maximum temperature for a
minimum of 4 hours of operation.
Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of ±10%.
Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise
transmission to occupied areas.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 3
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
C.
Housings: Class 1 continuously welded heavy gauge steel formed panels to make
curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors to allow access to internal parts
and components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
Spun inlet cone with flange.
Outlet flange.
Coatings: 2 mil (minimum) Polyester Urethane, exceeding the ASTM B117
1000 hour salt spray test.
Provide lifting lugs.
D.
Backward-Inclined Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet galvanized steel construction
with curved inlet flange, backplate, non-overloading curved backward-inclined
blades welded to flange and backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
E.
Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1.
2.
F.
Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller
bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a
protective coating of lubricating oil.
Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 200,000 hours.
Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 1, L50 at 400,000 hours.
Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory with keyway.
Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 hp; fixed pitch
for use with larger motors, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by
manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. Select pulley
so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 4
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
6.
H.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
I.
Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches
and gaskets.
Cleanout Door: Bolted gasketed door allowing access to fan scroll, of same
material as housing.
Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 (DN 25) steel pipe coupling welded to low
point of fan scroll.
Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes
welded to inlet bell.
Inlet Screens: ½ inch (12mm) wire mesh grid screen of same material as
housing.
Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
High Temperature Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side
of single-width fans.
Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
2.2
Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of
tachometer with guard in place.
Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
SQUARE INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven inline
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive
assembly, and support structure.
1.
2.
C.
Greenheck.
Loren Cook Company.
Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of ±10%.
Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise
transmission to occupied areas.
Housings: Heavy gauge galvanized steel of square design with square duct mounting
collars.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 5
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
Access panels: two panels perpendicular to the motor mounting panel shall be
provided to allow full access to all interior fan components.
Factory supplied mounting brackets for hung installation.
D.
Backward-Inclined Wheels: Aluminum construction and shall include a wheel cone
carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be
statically and dynamically balanced.
E.
Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a
protective coating of lubricating oil.
Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at 100,000 hours.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
Fan Pulleys: Cast iron, and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts;
dynamically balanced at factory with keyway.
Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 hp; fixed pitch
for use with larger motors, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by
manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. Select pulley
so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of
tachometer with guard in place.
Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
G.
Accessories:
H.
Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
Motors and drives shall be mounted out of the airstream, and readily accessible
for maintenance.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 6
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCACertified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
C.
Fan impeller balancing: balance fan impellers in accordance with AMCA Standard 20496.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
B.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers
having a static deflection of 2 inch (50 mm). Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment."
C.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification
for HVAC Equipment."
E.
Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
F.
Install fans as indicated. Install with resilient mountings specified in Section 230548
“Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment” and with flexible electrical
leads.
G.
Install flexible connections specified in Section 233300 “Air Duct Accessories”
between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are
parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.
H.
Install fan restraining snubbers. Flexible connectors shall not be in tension while
running.
I.
Provide sheaves required for final air balance.
J.
Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 7
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23
Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make
final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
3.4
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
Adjust belt tension.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
Refer to “Owner’s Commissioning Requirements” for additional requirements.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 8
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training" and “Owner’s Commissioning Requirements”
for additional requirements.
Roosevelt Hall Addition
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
233416 - 9
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
June 30, 2010
SECTION 230993
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Related Sections included the following:
1.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and
equipment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control
equipment and devices and submittal requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B.
BMS: Building management system
1.4
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A.
Supply Fan and Electric Heating Coil
1.
2.
3.
The supply fan and electric heating coil shall be controlled via space
thermostat/controller. The BMS contractor shall provide and install.
The supply fan and electric heating coils shall started/stopped by the BMS local
controller based on a time of day schedule or a manual command from the
controller.
On a call for ventilation, the supply fan shall be cycled on/off to maintain
setpoint. On a call for heating, the supply fan and electric heating coil (sequential
2-stage heating operation to maintain heating setpoint) shall be cycled on/off to
maintain setpoint. Provide time delay and dead band to prevent short cycling
between fan on/off and 2-stage heating control. The electric heating coil shall be
disabled if supply fan is off as proven by air flow switch.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
230993- 1
Sequence of Operations
June 30, 2010
SECTION 238216
AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following types of air coils that are not an integral part of air-handling
units:
1.
Electric
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air coil.
Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which coil location and
ceiling-mounted access panels are shown and coordinated with each other.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
manuals.
1.4
For air coils to include in operation and maintenance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance:
1.
Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing heating coils.
2.
Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
238216- 1
Air Coils
June 30, 2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRIC COILS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide INDEECO or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INDEECO.
Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Chromalox, Inc., Wiegand Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
Trane.
D.
Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995.
E.
Heating Elements: Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium,
supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, and
fastened to supporting brackets.
F.
High-Temperature Coil Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety
device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from duct or casing.
1.
Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually reset or manually replaceable, thermal
cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.
G.
Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, for slip-in mounting.
H.
Airflow Switch: A diaphragm-operated differential pressure switch to prevent the heater from
operating unless the air is flowing. It senses pressure between process air and the terminal
housing.
I.
Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the
following controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Magnetic contactor.
Mercury contactor.
Toggle switches; one per step.
Step controller.
Time-delay relay.
Pilot lights; one per step.
Airflow proving switch.
Thermal Cutouts
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
238216- 2
Air Coils
June 30, 2010
J.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install coils level and plumb.
B.
Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
C.
Straighten bent fins on air coils.
D.
Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean
inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to
confirm proper unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 238216
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
238216- 3
Air Coils
June 30, 2010
SECTION 231600
ELECTRICAL COMMON WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Specifications and Contract Drawings shall form part of the Contract Documents.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Where General and Supplement Conditions and General Requirements clauses are
repeated in these Specifications, it is to call special attention to them, or as a further
qualification. No General and Supplement Conditions and/or General Requirements
clause referring to the work of this Section shall be considered waived unless
specifically stated herein.
C.
Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, or unless otherwise specified in
other Sections of these Specifications, the requirements specified in this Section are
applicable to all electrical work of this Contract. Additional requirements applicable to
individual Sections of these Specifications are specified in those Sections, or are shown
on the Contract Drawings.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Provide all labor, materials, supplies, tools, machinery, equipment, scaffolding,
transportation, rigging, storage, utilities, supervision and required permits and licenses
necessary to complete the electrical work under this contract.
B.
Provide a complete working electrical installation with all equipment called for in
proper operating condition. Documents do not undertake to show or list every item to
be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for proper
operation of equipment that is shown or listed, provide the item, which will allow the
system to function properly at no increase in Contract Price.
C.
Coordinate the electrical work with the work of the other trades to resolve conflicts
without impeding job progress or the construction schedule.
D.
Examine all Contract Documents including those of other trades in order to determine
the extent of the Work required to be completed under this Section. Failure to examine
all Contract Documents for this project will not relieve this contractor of the
responsibility to perform all the Work required for a complete, fully operational and
satisfactory installation.
E.
Bidders are deemed aware, based on the background and experience, of materials,
which may be required in the discharge of their responsibilities, even though
unspecified. Claims for extras for unspecified shoring or supporting materials will not
be considered if the need for such materials would have been reasonably obvious to the
bidders skilled and experienced in the work to be done and the submittal of a bid shall
be deemed a waiver of any such claims.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 1
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
F.
1.3
Provide notice with bid proposal of any concrete or structural work required by this
Section that is not indicated on the Structural or Architectural Drawings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
“Architect”:
the Architect of record.
B.
“Engineer”:
the Engineer of record.
C.
“Contractor”: the individual, partnership or corporation to whom the Contract for the
Electrical work has been awarded.
D.
"Provide": Shall mean furnish and install.
E.
"Furnish": to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests,
accessories, and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete
application.
F.
"Install": to join; unite; fasten; link; attach; set up or otherwise connect together;
complete, tested, and ready for normal satisfactory operation.
G.
“As Directed”: as directed by the Architect or the Engineer.
H.
“Submit”:
I.
“Finished Spaces” Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
J.
“Exposed, Interior Installations” Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and electrical equipment rooms.
K.
“Exposed, Exterior Installations” Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include equipment yards or
rooftop locations.
L.
“Concealed, Interior Installations” Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in wall conduits.
M.
“Concealed, Exterior Installations” Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
N.
"Connect": Shall mean make final electrical connections for a complete operating
piece of equipment.
O.
“Equal”: Shall be of the same quality, appearance and utility to that specified, as
determined by the Owner’s Representative. Contractor bears the burden of proof of
equality.
P.
“Electrical Work”: The installation, alteration, maintenance, or repair of electric wires
and wiring apparatus and other appliances used or to be used for the transmission of
electricity for electric light, heat, power, signaling, communication, alarm or data
transmission.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
submit to the Architect and/or the Engineer for review.
231600- 2
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
1.4
CODES, STANDARDS, FILING AND PERMITS
A.
The Electrical installation shall comply with the latest revised versions of all applicable
laws, rules, regulations, standards, codes and ordinances of the federal, state and local
authorities having jurisdiction and other requirements specified in other Specifications
and Contract Drawings.
B.
If any of the provisions of the laws, rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances and
requirements of the Contract Drawings or Specifications is in conflict with one another,
the most stringent requirements shall govern.
C.
Nothing in the Contract Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit Work
not conforming to the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations. It is not the
intent of the Contract Drawings or Specifications to repeat the requirements of codes
except where necessary for completeness or clarity. Any modifications required by the
above said authorities having jurisdiction shall be made without additional cost to the
Owner. Where Contract Drawings and Specifications requirements are in excess of the
rules, regulations and code requirements, and are permitted under the code, the
Contract Drawings and Specifications shall govern.
D.
All materials and equipment, materials and methods shall comply with all applicable
requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, legislations, etc., of all federal, state and local
authorities whether listed on the contract documents or not.
E.
Obtain the required permits from the local authorities for this work and pay for all fees
required by the local, State, and Federal authorities for permits, inspections and review,
including special agency construction and operating permits. Make corrections in the
work as required by the Owner's Representative or Inspector to pass all such
regulations.
F.
All equipment and materials shall be approved for use in New York City and listed
with MEA numbers. Submit MEA number for all equipment during the submittal
process.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for filing drawings, inspection arrangement with
authorities having jurisdiction, and obtaining approval from N.Y.C Advisory Board,
New York City Fire Department and Con Edison. The Contractor shall be responsible
for all related fees.
1.5
REFERENCES
A.
Work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the listed
edition of all governing codes, rules, standards and regulations including but not
limited to the following codes and standards, whether listed or not:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
American with Disabilities Acts (ADA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
Electrical Industries Association/Telecommunication Industries Association
(EIA/TIA)
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 3
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
1.6
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
Factory Mutual (FM)
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
National Electrical Code (NFPA-70)
NYC Amendments to the 2005 NEC
New York City Building Code (NYCBC)
New York City Fire Code
New York City Electric Code Advisory Board
NYC Electrical Code Revision and Interpretation Committee (E.C.R.I.C.)
New York City Electrical Code (NYCEC)
New York City Seismic Code (NYCSC)
Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State (ECCCNYS)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This specification and drawings are intended to serve jointly as a basis upon which the
contractor shall submit a contract price for material and labor provisions.
B.
It is not intended that the plans or specifications show or state every detailed
requirement of the work, but rather that they furnish adequate information for an
experienced contractor to make a completely acceptable installation. The general
conditions from a part of these specifications whether attached hereto or not, shall be
carefully examined before submitting a proposal. Where general conditions clauses are
repeated in this section, it shall be understood as calling special attention to them, or as
a further qualification, and shall not be assumed as omitting any other clauses. No
general conditions referring to the work included herein shall be considered as waived
unless specifically stated herein.
C.
Before submitting a proposal, examine all plans relating to this work, verify all
governing conditions at the site, become fully informed as to the extent and character of
the work required and its relation to the work of other trades. Submission of a cost
proposal (bid) will be judged as evidence that the site examination has been made. No
consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be
furnished for work to be done, it being understood that the submission of a proposal is
in agreement to all conditions referred to herein or indicated on the plans.
D.
Proposal must include everything required to provide a complete installation as
contemplated in specifications and plans, whether specifically shown or specified or
not. Included are labor, materials, equipment, lights, tools, scaffolding, etc., necessary
to the complete installation of everything described, shown or reasonably implied.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 4
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
E.
Any discrepancies between these specifications and the accompanying plans, or these
specifications and plans and the specifications of other trades, shall be brought to the
attention of the architect prior to the submission of the bid. Failure to comply with the
above shall allow the architect to make a final and binding decision at a later date and
no allowance will be given if the more expensive of the item in question is selected.
F.
This contractor shall be responsible for his work, its completion and final acceptance
and shall replace any items which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without any
additional cost to the owner.
G.
The work called for in these plans and specification shall be coordinated with the
structure, work of all related trades, and shall be so arranged that there will be no delay
in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of each respective work.
Wherein it may be interrelated with this contract all work can proceed in its natural
sequence without unnecessary delay. The contractor is responsible for any additional
cost and delays in the work resulting from substitution under this division; including,
but not limited to: any changes, indecision, installation, or the work or other trades.
H.
Electrical drawings are diagrammatic (except where dimensioned) and indicate the
general arrangement of systems and work. Follow architectural, structural and
manufacturer's shop drawings for greater accuracy. Consult engineer in case of doubt or
conflict. Unless noted, fixed dimensions are based on the product of one manufacturer.
Verify dimensions with the shop drawings of the materials actually approved or
purchased.
I.
Exact location of all equipment, panels, pull boxes, feeders, fixtures, etc. shall be
approved by the architect and owner prior to the installation of the same.
J.
Contractor shall furnish all necessary outlets, supports, fittings and accessories to fulfill
applicable codes, regulations and the best practices of the trade for installation of all
electrical work.
K.
Exposed conduits can be installed but in no case shall be installed less than nine feet
above the finished floor or as noted. Conduits installed in area where hung ceiling or
other furred spaces are indicated shall be installed concealed. Should any work require
subsequent modification or relocation to avoid interferences or conflicts with other
work, such changes shall be made without additional cost to the owner.
L.
Any necessary electric service interruptions shall be at a time convenient to the building
owner.
M.
All penetrations through slabs and fire rated partitions shall be fire stopped using an
approved method to maintain the fire resistance rating.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 5
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
1.7
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Without intending to limit and/or restrict the volume of work required and solely for the
convenience of the contractor, the work of this division shall, in general comprise the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
1.8
Removal of electrical system as required and as indicated on plans.\
Modification to existing electrical system, updating of existing panel boards.
Furnishing and installing new lighting fixtures and lamps.
Furnishing and installing new conduits, branch circuit wiring, etc.
Furnishing and installing new raceways, outlet boxes, wiring and connections for
lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles and low tension outlets.
Connections to all electrical equipment furnished by other trades or by the owner.
Power wiring for all motors, including installing all required disconnect switches
and mounting of starters.
Modification of existing branch circuits, updating existing dimmer panels.
Temporary light and power.
Testing and load balancing.
Grounding.
Removal and restoration of existing work.
Cutting, channeling and patching.
Fire alarm system.
WORK NOT INCLUDED
A.
Furnishing motors, motor starter and control devices connected to equipment furnished
under other divisions of the specifications. However, electrical contractor will erect and
wire same, furnish and install auxiliary motor disconnects as required by drawings or
code.
B.
Finish painting.
C.
Motor control wiring and electrical interlocks (u.o.n.).
D.
Telephone wiring and devices.
1.9
CODES PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Electrical work shall comply with the applicable requirements of the New York City
electrical codes, NYBC, OSHA code, and other authorities exercising jurisdiction over
all electrical construction work and the project.
B.
Nothing contained in these specifications or plans shall be so construed as to conflict
with any local, municipal, and national board of the Fire Underwriters Regulations
governing the installation of work specified herein. All such laws, ordinances and
regulations, where they apply to this work, are hereby incorporated into and made a part
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 6
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
of the specifications. All such requirements shall be satisfied at no additional expense to
the owner.
C.
1.10
All required permits and inspection certificates shall be obtained, paid for, and made
available at the completion of the work.
GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATIONS
A.
All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects. Defective materials or
workmanship, as well as damage to the work of any/all trades resulting from the same,
shall be replaced or repaired as direct for the duration of one year from the date of
acceptance.
B.
The date of acceptance shall be the date of the final payment for the work or the date of
a formal notice of acceptance, whichever is earlier.
C.
Non-durable items, such as electric lamps, shall be replaced up to the date of
acceptance, such that they shall have had no more than 100 hours use prior to this date.
1.11
SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMISSIONS
A.
Prior to purchasing any equipment or materials, a list of their manufacturers shall be
submitted for approval.
B.
Prior to assembling or installing the work, catalog information and factory assembly
drawings, as required for a complete explanation and description of all fixtures, devices
and items of equipment, shall be submitted for approval.
C.
Field installation drawings as required to explain fully all procedures involved in
erecting, mounting and connecting all pieces of equipment.
D.
No equipment shall be fabricated, delivered, erected or reconnected other than
equipment from drawings approved by the engineer. Shop drawings in the number
directed shall be submitted for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
1.12
A.
Relays and dimmers
Lighting fixtures
Wiring devices and plates
Fire alarm system devices and riser diagram
Occupancy sensors
It shall be understood that approval of drawings will not bind the engineer or the owner
to the final acceptance of such equipment as the completed installation and test of
equipment as a whole must be provided and guaranteed herein as specified.
SAMPLES
Upon request by architect or owner, submit for approval one sample of each of the
following:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 7
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
1.13
Each type of lighting fixture.
Each type of wiring device.
Each type of wiring device plate.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Remove all equipment unless otherwise shown; however, all changes cannot be detailed
completely on the drawings, some removals and relocations of existing electric work
will be necessary for satisfactory performance of this and other trades. Take into
consideration in proposal all required changes.
B.
Reproducible record drawings shall be supplied by the contractor upon which
corrections shall be made to provide an accurate and complete record of the work as
installed.
1.14
DEMOLITION AND REMEDIAL WORK
A.
Remove all electrical equipment, wiring and other electrical work as required.
Disconnect load and line end of conductors feeding devices which are to be removed or
abandoned, and remove conductors no longer in use. Cut back to floor, wall or ceiling,
and plug both ends of concealed conduits made obsolete by this alteration. Remove
exposed or abandoned circuits and outlets. Remove material and equipment and dispose
of as directed.
B.
Wherever it is required to disconnect or remove any part of an existing circuit,
immediately reconnect that circuit or reestablish service in the remaining portion of the
circuit.
C.
The work shall also include the removal of materials as directed. Prior to removing
equipment and material from project site, the building manager or owner will inspect
and advise which items will be stored.
D.
Where existing receptacles and or switches are located in columns and or exterior walls,
remove receptacle and cap outlet box. Receptacles shown on partitions to be removed
shall have all wiring and conduit removed as well. All floor receptacles and telephone
outlets shall be removed and openings capped flush.
E.
Where present work is damaged in the execution of this contract, or where openings are
left due to the removal or conduits equipment or apparatus, the same shall be repaired
or closed up to correspond in material, quality, shape and finish with that or similar and
adjoining work without extra cost to the owner, unless otherwise called for.
F.
Should any damage due to the execution of this contract occur to the furniture, fixtures
or any other equipment or apparatus, such damages shall be properly repaired with the
supply of new articles and made good without extra charge.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 8
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
G.
1.15
Where removal of existing electrical equipment will result in outages in area not to be
demolished, this contractor shall coordinate in advance and obtain the approval of the
building manager or owner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All workers performing under this Division shall be skilled workers of the trade
involved. Where specialty work, such as splicing or welding are required, submit proof
of training, experience and work history for each worker, for review by the Engineer.
Only approved workers shall perform specialty work.
B.
All electrical work shall be performed by an electrical contractor licensed in the state,
which the work is to be performed.
C.
All electrical materials and equipment for which there is a nationally recognized
standard shall bear the conformance labeling of the third party inspection authority,
such as Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Factory Mutual, ETL or other recognized
agency listed, in accordance with the requirements of the local Authority having
jurisdiction.
D.
Carcinogenic material, including Asbestos shall not be furnished or installed.
E.
All calculations required by this and other various Sections of these Specifications, or
as shown on the Drawings, shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the state in which the work is to be performed, and shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review.
F.
With the exceptions as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications, the Contractor shall apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean,
commission and condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment per
Manufacturer's current printed instructions and recommendations. Copies of such
printed recommendations shall be kept at the Project site and made available as
required.
G.
Where the manufacturer's recommendations conflict with the Contract Documents, the
conflict shall be brought to the Engineer's attention immediately.
1.16
GUARANTEE
A.
Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with
Contract Documents. Warrant all work against faulty and improper material and
workmanship for a period of one year from date of substantial completion and/or
acceptance, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified
herein, such longer term shall apply. At no additional cost to Owner, within 24 hours
after notification, correct any deficiencies, which occur during the warranty period
(including all parts, material, labor, etc.), all to the satisfaction of the Owner or his
designated representative. In default thereof, the Owner may have such work done and
charge all costs to the Contractor. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees
from his Subcontractors.
B.
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall guarantee the following in a form
satisfactory to the Owner:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 9
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
All equipment meets the design capacities and performance characteristics
specified.
The systems shall operate without malfunction.
C.
The start of the Contractor’s warranty period shall commence on the issue of a
“Certificate of Substantial Completion”, by the Owner or the Owner’s Representative
for each item of material, equipment, or system.
D.
The Subcontractor shall confer with the Construction Manager prior to the bid date
concerning the project schedule and determine if there is a need to operate any items of
equipment or systems for temporary light, power, heating and/or cooling or other
reasons prior to “Substantial Completion”. All required extended warranty costs for
equipment, materials, and systems shall be included in the Subcontractor’s bid.
E.
Warrant that all components, subsystems and systems will perform their specified
functions from the date of turnover and commercial operation through the useful life of
the system. In the event components fail for any reason, be responsible to repair,
replace and reimburse the Owner for all costs associated with the component,
subsystem or system that failed to perform the specified function.
1.17
SCHEDULING
The following is a summary of the scheduling milestones described in the text of the
Specifications. The Contractor shall start on or schedule the following upon receiving
notice to proceed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.18
A.
Immediately upon award of this Contract, this Contractor shall have a preconstruction meeting with the Architect and Engineer.
On or before three (3) weeks after notice to proceed, submit a complete, typed list
of the subcontractors, equipment manufacturers and suppliers they intend to use to
the Engineer for review.
On or before six (6) weeks after notice to proceed, prepare an index of all his
Electrical shop drawings and brochures for the Project.
As requested by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall submit
"Coordination Drawings" to the Engineer for review.
As requested by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall provide a detailed
schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed and
outlining when tests will be performed.
Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms and test equipment for review
by the Engineer prior to execution of testing.
Submit six (6) final copies of the Operation and Maintenance books to the Owner
for review at least ten (10) weeks before Final Review of the Project.
Submit three (3) final copies of the Record Set to the Owner for review at least
four (4) weeks before Final Review of the Project.
TESTS
Before an application for the final acceptance of the work will be considered, all tests
deemed necessary by the architect to show proper execution of the work shall have been
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 10
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
performed and completed in the presence of an architect's representative. Schedule of
all testing procedures shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the architect.
B.
Any defects or deficiencies discovered in any of the electrical work shall be corrected.
C.
Insulation resistance tests shall be performed on all re-utilized wiring and equipment.
Measured insulation resistance shall conform to requirements of the latest edition of the
N.Y.C. Electrical code.
1.19
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Electrical contractor shall furnish and install type-written directories behind transparent
plastic covers in metal frames, in all new and existing panels indicating type and
location of load being served by individual circuit breakers.
B.
All parts of equipment, such as panels, junction boxes, safety switches motor starter,
circuit breakers, conductors and similar items shall be identified by name, at supply
end, "load supplied" and at load end, "load supplied from".
1.20
MODIFICATION TO EXISTING PANELS
A.
Contractor shall re-assign circuits to rephase panel as required by new work.
B.
Update panel directories to accurately reflect changes.
1.21
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Include all shipping, delivery, hauling, hoisting, shoring, and placement in the building
of equipment and materials specified herein. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the timely delivery of equipment to the project site as required by the construction
schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time, it is required, the
Contractor shall be responsible for its proper storage and protection until it may be
required. The Contractor shall pay for all costs of storage in a bonded warehouse.
B.
Delivery: Deliver equipment, fixtures, devices and conduits with factory-fabricated
containers and protective means. Maintain containers and protective means through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent damage and to prevent exposure to dirt,
debris, and moisture.
C.
Storage: Store in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes.
Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect
equipment from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
D.
Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Be careful to
prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units
shall not be installed and shall be replaced with new units.
E.
If any item of equipment is not delivered to or installed at the Project site in a timely
manner as required by the Project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for disassembly, re-assembly, manufacturer's supervision, shoring, general
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 11
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
construction modifications, delays, overtime costs, etc. No additional cost or delays
shall be incurred by the Owner
F.
All other trades’ equipment, materials and work shall be protected from damage in
areas where electrical work is being carried out. All damage shall be corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer and the Owner without additional cost to the Owner.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all work, materials and equipment until finally
inspected, tested and accepted; protect work against theft, injury or damage; and
carefully store material and equipment received on site, which is not immediately
installed. All the equipment, materials and the work shall be covered and protected
during construction to prevent entry of dust, dirt, obstructing material and to prevent
damage due to weather, water, spray-on fireproofing, construction debris, etc., in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer and/or Owner.
H.
All equipment, materials, devices, etc stored off site and delivered to the site must be
kept in the manufacturers’ original unopened protective packaging with shipping bars,
retainers and positioning devices in place until installation. Store all items subject to
moisture damage in dry and heated space with factory covering in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS FURNISHED
A.
New, bearing label of Underwriter's Laboratories, or other testing laboratory acceptable
to authority having jurisdiction, where labeling exists for the class of equipment.
B.
Equipment and materials furnished shall be new and unused, prior to this installation,
first grade commercial quality and shall be essentially the standard cataloged products
of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. Only those
items specifically shown on the Drawings as existing relocated or Owner furnished
shall be reused in this installation. Rebuilt or remanufactured equipment will not be
permitted.
C.
Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor variations are expected; however,
performance and material requirements specified herein are the minimum standards
acceptable. The Engineer retains the sole right to judge the equality of equipment that
deviates from the Contract Documents, to reject any substitutions submitted by the
Contractor, and to require the specified materials and equipment, which conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, be furnished.
D.
Equipment and materials that have defects or damage during transportation,
installation, or operation is considered as totally damaged. They shall be replaced new.
The materials and equipment, which have minor damage, may be repaired if written
approval is given by the Engineer and Owner. If equipment and materials are approved
for repairs, they shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the Owner and Engineer at
no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
associated with the repairs, replacement, including but not limited to, all preparations
prior to re-testing, extended warranties, re-commissioning of the equipment, etc.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 12
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
E.
Where no specific make of material or equipment is mentioned, use any product of
reputable manufacturer, which conforms to requirements of system and other
applicable specification sections.
F.
Provide an authorized representative to constantly supervise Work specified in this
Division; check all materials prior to installation for conformance with Drawings,
Specifications, and reviewed Shop Drawings.
2.2
SAFETY SWITCHES
A.
Safety switches shall be of size noted on the drawing, or as required, fusible or non
fusible and each contained in a general purpose nema 1 enclosure. All switches shall be
heavy duty type and shall have quick-make, quick-break mechanism.
B.
All switches shall be of proper horsepower rating as applicable and have dual interlocks
designed to interlock the switch box door with the switch operating mechanism.
C.
Safety switches shall be in nema 1 enclosure, horsepower rated, heavy duty type, with
quick-make, quick-break mechanism and cover interlock. Handle shall be capable of
being padlocked in "off" position. Switch shall be fused or unfused, as indicated.
Outdoor switches shall have nema 3r enclosure.
2.3
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of
recognized manufacturers and shall be new unless otherwise designated.
B.
New equipment and materials shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the electrical work, the
electrical work shall include:
1.
2.
D.
Where normally subjected to underwriters laboratory inc listing or labeling
services, be so listed or labeled.
Be without blemish or defect.
Not be used for temporary light and power purposes without architect's
authorization.
Be in accordance with the latest applicable N.E.M.A. Standard.
Be approved by building manager or owner.
The coordination of their delivery.
Their field make-up and internal wiring as may be necessary for their operation.
Electrical raceway and supporting systems shall be furnished and installed complete,
with all materials, fittings, connections and accessories necessary to provide in each
instance, a complete operating installation, as described herein, and indicated on the
drawings, and/or as approved by building manager or owner.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 13
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
E.
2.4
The drawings are diagrammatic and generally indicative of the work to be installed, but
do not show all bends, fittings, and boxes which may be required. The contractor shall
carefully investigate the job conditions including structural and finish conditions
affecting all his work and arrange all work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, boxes
and similar items as may be required to meet such conditions.
WIRING MATERIALS
A.
All wires and cable shall be type XHHW for feeders and THHN or THWN for branch
circuits in conduit. No wire smaller than #12 awg shall be used for light or power
services.
B.
Wire #10 awg and smaller shall be solid, wire # 8 awg and larger shall be single
conductor stranded.
C.
For 120/208v service, wiring shall be consistently color coded throughout, red, blue,
black for line (phase) conductors and white for neutral conductor, switch leg shall be
separately identified. Ground conductor where specified shall be green. For 277/480v
service, wiring shall be consistently color coded throughout, brown, orange, yellow for
line (phase) conductors and white for neutral conductor. Ground conductor where
specified shall be green.
D.
MINIMUM SIZE:
1.
2.
3.
Lighting and power: #12 awg, unless otherwise indicated.
Control: # 14 awg.
Circuit over 75 feet in length from the point of supply to the first outlet shall be #
10 awg.
E.
Splices in branch circuit work shall be made by means of type 'r' "Scotchlock"
connectors.
F.
Electrical insulation tape shall be vinyl plastic type with pressure adhesive "scotch"
electrical type.
G.
Branch circuitry numbers indicated on the drawings on multi-circuit homeruns are for
identification of devices or equipment they are connected to and do not necessarily refer
to dimming panel circuit numbers. Assignment of branch circuit numbers shall be part
of this work and indicated on panel directories. Branch circuits shall be connected to
circuits on dimming panels so as to secure a reasonable balance all circuits. Where
more than one circuit with a common neutral is installed in the same conduit, each
phase wire shall be connected to a different leg of the system.
H.
All conductors shall be color coded throughout and numbered and tagged at each
junction box, pull box, panel and device with suitable fireproof tags or adhesive
identification bands.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 14
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
2.5
TAPS, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A.
All copper cable lug connections to copper bus bars remains and branches shall use
copper solderless connectors having either 2-bolt cast copper clamps, or compression
connectors, Thomas & Betts series 54000, with manufacturer's recommended
hexagonal dies and hydraulic compression tools.
B.
All copper conductors #10 awg and smaller shall be spliced with Thomas & Betts Stakon connectors series pt-1 or equal. All copper conductors #8 awg and larger shall be
terminated, spliced and tapped with t & b color-keyed compression connectors series
54000 or equal. For splices, the Burndy type KPU-C connector or equal will be
acceptable.
C.
Connectors for lighting fixtures from branch circuit wiring shall be made with twist-on
type connectors, t & b series pt-1 or equal.
2.6
CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS
A.
Except as otherwise indicated or specified, all wiring inside and above hung ceiling use
EMT.
B.
Liquid tight flexible, galvanized steel conduit, with continuous copper bonding
conductor, shall be used for connections, not exceeding 18 in length, to motors and at
other locations where vibration, movement or oil vapor atmospheres are encountered.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all wiring shall be installed concealed in
ceilings, walls, slabs, pipe chases and furred spaces whenever possible.
D.
Conduit and fittings shall conform to latest acceptable New York City code and all
other codes having jurisdiction.
E.
Conduit shall be 3/4" trade size minimum, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
F.
All conduits which are to remain empty for future introduction of conductors shall be
provided with a #12 nylon drag wire with identification tag at both ends.
G.
Metal clad cable (bx) can be used for lighting and appliance branch circuitry in voids of
ceiling and partitions, provided that this type of wiring is acceptable to the Brooklyn
College representative, and in compliance with governing electrical code. Verify all of
the above prior to submittal of bid proposal.
2.7
FITTINGS
A.
For rigid conduit, shall be of the threaded type. Fittings for EMT shall be steel, concrete
tight, with insulation throats, T&B series 5123 and 5120, or approved equal. Fittings for
flexible conduit shall be steel, with nylon insulated throats. Bushings for conduits one
(1") inch and larger shall be of the insulated type, T&B series 222, or approved equal.
Grounding bushings shall be O.Z. Type BLG, or approved equal. Conduit terminations,
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 15
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
except conduit for telephone, signal and other low tension services, shall have double
locknuts, t & b series 141.
2.8
JUNCTION BOXES
A.
2.9
Junction box and pull boxes shall be provided where indicated or specified and where
necessary to facilitate the installation of equipment or wiring.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Each outlet for lighting fixture, wall switch, wall receptacle, telephone or other use shall
be provided with an outlet box suitable for the use for which the outlet is to be put and
to the location in which it occurs, secured firmly in place and set true and square with
the finished surface.
B.
Connection to recessed ceiling fixtures supplied with pigtails may be arranged so that
more than one but not more than four, such fixtures are connected into a single outlet
box. No fixture shall be supplied from an outlet in another room.
C.
Ceiling outlets serving individual fixtures and installed in plastered ceilings or concrete
slabs shall be four (4) inch square with covers. Depth of boxes shall be as required by
code, to accommodate the conduits, number of wires, splices, and devices to be
installed. All outlets for the attachment of fixtures to be provided with fixture studs
securely anchored to the boxes.
D.
Through wall boxes for back to back wiring not permitted.
E.
Where more than one wiring device is mounted in the same location, such device shall
be gang mounted under a common faceplate.
F.
Junction boxes to be 4" x 4" x 2 - 1/8" deep with flat metal covers, unless otherwise
noted or required by code. Junction boxes above suspended ceiling for lighting shall be
4'11/16" x 4'11/16" x 2-1/8" deep, to be installed adjacent to recessed fixture in such
manner as to be accessible through the opening in the ceiling in which the fixture is
installed.
2.10
EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND NIGHT LIGHTS
A.
Shall be equipped with emergency battery packs.
B.
Shall be equipped with emergency battery packs.
2.11
A.
FASTENINGS, SUPPORTS, AND HANGERS
All parts of the electrical installation shall be adequately supported from the building
construction using approved clamp screws with the inserts of expansion anchors,
expansion bolts and toggle bolts" in no case shall the hung ceiling members or wires be
used to support conduit".
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 16
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
B.
2.12
All fastening, supports, clamps, anchors, and similar items shall be of type suitable for
the purpose.
WIRING DEVICES
A.
All devices shall be specification grade, U.L. Approved.
B.
Single pole switch, 20 amp, 125 volts.
C.
Duplex receptacle, 20 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire, 125 volt, ground type.
D.
Single receptacle, 20 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire, 125 volts, grounding type, GFI where
required.
E.
Color and type of all device plates shall be approved by architect prior to
purchase/installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Temporary Electric and Lighting
A.
Temporary Electric Services
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Electrical Contractor is cautioned to carefully consider the possible sources of
temporary electric service and the probable location of the General Contractor's
office.
The General Contractor will apply to the Client or local utilities for the temporary
electric service and will pay for all electric power used during construction,
including electric heating.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install and pay for all necessary conduit,
wire, metering, poles, switches, receptacles, lights and accessories to provide a
200 amp, 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire temporary electric service with the main
disconnect switch, meter, and a 42 circuit load center at a location specified by the
General Contractor.
Consult the client/utility company for fees required and include same in Electrical
Contract.
Labor, receptacles, boxes, fixtures, wire, etc. required by the various Contractors
inside their offices shall be paid for by the respective Contractors.
Lighting fixtures shall be placed every 40 ft. along each corridor or where
corridors do not occur, along the long axis of all rooms and areas greater than 25
ft. in length. Provide a 100 watt lamp in a rubber coated socket with wire guard,
spliced into branch feeder conductor at every 20 ft. The branch circuit wiring may
be 3-wire type "NMC" and the wire guard shall be bonded to the ground
conductor. Receptacle circuits shall consist of 1-gang handy box with grounded
duplex receptacles a maximum of 50 ft. on center with a maximum of 4 per circuit.
All receptacle circuits shall be protected by its own overcurrent device in a
panelboard. Install wiring and equipment above 6'-6" and below the finished
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 17
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
ceiling. Extend circuits as required and protect in an appropriate panelboard on
each floor level. Provide GFCI protected receptacles and circuits as required by
NEC and OSHA.
7. Contractors requiring extension cords shall provide their own cords and plugs up
to capacity of 20 amperes. For services to larger items of equipment and welders,
this Contractor shall extend proper feeders as requested at the expense of the
Contractors requiring the service.
8. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain the temporary light and power system for
the duration of the work and shall remove it from the site when directed.
Temporary wiring and equipment shall remain the property of the Electrical
Contractor.
9. The use of the permanent electrical system for temporary services during the latter
stages of construction shall be allowed through an appropriate metered branch
circuit breaker. Expedite completion of permanent system as practicable to this
end. Maintain the temporary system during this period.
10. Warranty periods on equipment, materials and systems commences upon Client’s
acceptance of the building or systems. Temporary use of permanent equipment
shall not jeopardize or alter warranty requirements.
11. The complete temporary service shall comply with the Client, utility OSHA, and
all Code requirements.
B.
Continuity of Service
1.
2.
3.
C.
Work shall be so planned and executed as to provide reasonable continuous
service of existing systems throughout the construction period. Where necessary
to disrupt services for short periods of time for connection, alteration or
switch-over, the Client shall be notified in advance and outages scheduled at the
Client's reasonable convenience.
Submit, on request, a written step-by-step sequence of operations proposed to
accomplish this work. The outline must include tentative dates, times of day for
disruption, downtime and restoration of services. Submit the outline sufficiently
in advance of the proposed work to allow the Architect or Engineer to review the
information with the Client. Upon approval, final planning and the work shall be
done in close coordination with the Client.
Shutdown of systems and work undertaken during shutdowns shall be bid as being
done during normal working hours. If the Client should require such work be
performed outside of normal working hours, reimbursement shall be made for
premium time expenses only, without mark-up.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the Owner for the new
installation of temporary lighting and power services tailored for this project and the
setting of temporary meters in accordance with the Utility Company's requirements.
He shall pay for the installation and maintenance of all temporary light and power
wiring, including, but not limited to conduits, wire, switches, fuse boxes, receptacles,
distribution panel boards, fused disconnect switches, ground fault interruption
equipment, fixtures, lamps, fuses and any other incidental material and/or equipment
required to provide sufficient illumination and power, as required by the state Labor
Board, O.S.H.A., or all other authorities having jurisdiction for all areas of the site
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 18
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
where work will be performed by this Contractor, his subcontractors, or any other
contractors.
D.
Irrespective of the union working hours for the electricians, the Electrical Contractor
shall maintain and pay the entire regular and overtime labor costs of keeping the
temporary light and power system energized from a period 15 minutes before the
established starting time of the building trade which starts work earliest to a period of
15 minutes after the established stopping time of the trade which stops work latest.
This shall apply to every working day of the week during the life of the contract, unless
otherwise directed, or until such time that the maintenance of the temporary light and
power system is no longer required by reason of the activation of and use of the
permanent light and power systems.
E.
When the electricians are entitled to a holiday or holidays under union rules and other
building trade workmen are required to work and do not have the same holiday or
holidays, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain and pay the entire overtime labor
costs of keeping the temporary light and power system energized for the full day or
those full days, as the case may be, including the extra 15 minutes before the start and
after the close of the working day, as stated in the preceding paragraph.
F.
Should this Contractor or any contractor require temporary light or power, or both,
before or after the hours set forth in the preceding paragraphs, this Contractor or other
contractors shall pay the extra cost of keeping the systems energized and in serviceable
condition.
G.
Remove the temporary light and power systems, when directed. This Contractor shall
replace and make good all damage to the permanent systems, as required, replacing all
damaged parts. Under no circumstances shall temporary wiring be left in finished hung
ceiling spaces.
H.
When the permanent lighting and power systems are installed and operational, this
Contractor shall make the changeover. The cost of making the changeover of the electric
services from the temporary lines to service from permanent lines shall be borne by this
Contractor.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Install electrical equipment as specified in individual specification sections, and in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Rough-in locations for fixtures and equipment shall be determined from the unit itself
or from the approved shop drawings.
C.
Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports (refer to Paragraph 3.2 Seismic
Protection).
1.
2.
3.
D.
Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated.
Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings.
Do not cut or weld to building structural members
Arrange for necessary openings to allow for admittance of equipment. Where
equipment cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for
building-in of boxes, sleeves, or other devices to allow later installation.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 19
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
E.
Install equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance.
1.
2.
F.
Maintain easy access to switches, motors, drives, pullboxes, receptacles, etc.
Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of relocation items, which interfere
with access.
Equipment Pads, Mats and Mounting
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Concrete pads for various pieces of equipment systems will be furnished by other
Division.
Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned pad layouts to the General Contractor.
Shop Drawings shall be used for dimensional guidance in sizing pads, anchor
bolts, locations, etc.
Pads shall be provided for floor-mounted equipment, equipment mounted on legs
and/or support stands and they shall conform to the shape of the piece of
equipment it serves with a minimum 3 in. margin around the equipment and
supports. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 in. high and made of a minimum 28-day,
3000 psi concrete reinforced with 6”x6”, 6/6 gauge welded wire mesh. Top and
sides of the pad shall be toweled to smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors,
with all corners bullnosed to 3 / 4” radius.
Pads shall be dowelled into slab with #4 bars at each corner embedded 3” and
grouted with non-shrink grout.
Concrete waterproof curbs shall be provided around all vertical bus floor
penetrations. These curbs shall be a 4 in. high and shall be poured as part of the
floor slab. Coordinate exact dimensions of slab penetration and curb with the
busduct manufacturer.
Furnish and install galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete
equipment pads, inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Bolts shall be the size and
number recommended by the Manufacturer of the equipment and as required for
seismic restraint. Anchor bolts shall be anchored to the structural floor slab and
shall be located by means of suitable templates. When equipment is placed on
vibration isolators, the equipment shall be secured to the isolator and the isolator
secured to the floor, pad, or supported as recommended by the vibration isolation
manufacturer.
Equipment pads for switchboards, switchgears, transformers shall have level
mounting channels embedded in the concrete as specified in the applicable
sections. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting
screws shall pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to the
partition studs or framework.
Rubber Mats
a.
b.
c.
Install a continuous one-piece rubber mats in front of each electrical
equipment such as switchboard, motor control center, switchgear, generator
paralleling switchgear, Uninterruptible Power Supply equipment, substation
transformers, each side of a generator set, etc.
Rubber mats when installed shall lay flat without curling.
Rubber mats shall conform to ASTM D 178, Type 2
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 20
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
G.
Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Expansion/Deflection
1.
2.
I.
Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs,
machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is
necessary, perform it prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitchpockets required. Advise the Architect and Engineer and obtain written
permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such
penetration is shown on the Drawings.
If Contractor penetrates any walls or surfaces after they have been waterproofed,
he shall restore the waterproof integrity of that surface as directed by the
Architect/Engineer at his own expense.
Pack space between conduits, sleeves, cable trays and seal unused sleeves in nonfire rated walls with non-combustible materials. Refer to specifications for details
and requirements.
Conduit enters the building through a concrete foundation wall below grade level;
a watertight entrance seal shall be used. The seal shall be OZ/Gedney.
Make penetrations through floors, walls and any damp-proofed/water-proofed
surfaces, damp-proof/waterproof by appropriate means to maintain integrity of
system penetrated. Refer to specifications for details and requirements.
Seal around penetrations and between conduits, cable trays, sleeves, etc and seal
unused sleeves, in fire rated walls with UL listed fireproofing material to maintain
integrity fire rating. Refer to specifications for details and requirements.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely placing of sleeves for all piping
passing through walls, partitions, beams, floors, and roofs, while the same are
under construction.
Equip all cable trays and conduits, including those embedded in concrete, which
cross building expansion or control joints, with expansion fittings.
Where conduits are subjected to expansion and movement in any directions or to
vibration transmitted by equipment or vehicular traffic, install a combination
expansion and deflection fittings.
Support
1.
2.
3.
Provide required supports and hangers for conduit and equipment, so that loading
will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Submittal of a bid shall be
deemed a representation that such bid has included allowable loadings and has
included in estimates the costs associated in furnishing required supports.
The design of the supports for conduits, busduct and equipment shall be certified
and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the work is to
be performed.
Where busduct, conduits, etc., are routed vertically through shafts, the Contractor
shall provide and install all necessary miscellaneous structural members to support
the loads imposed by the risers.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 21
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
4.
Where equipment (transformers, busducts, conduit racks, etc.) are supported from
structural slabs, the Contractor shall provide all miscellaneous structural members
to support the load plus a 250 lb. live load.
5. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings of the riser support system inside
vertical shafts to the project Structural Engineer for approval, including details of
how the riser support structure is to be attached to the building structure
6. Miscellaneous structural support members installed in Switchboard Rooms,
electric closets, central plants, Mechanical Rooms, and where exposed to public
view shall be galvanized.
7. Include supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for
work indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of
supporting the weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric
closets.
8. Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface
mounting, which is required in a freestanding position. Supporting frames or
racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support system steel
members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced
to form a substantial structure. They shall be firmly secured to the floor slab with
expansion anchors designed to support the system and the equipment. Racks shall
be of ample size to assure a skillful arrangement of all equipment mounted on
them and shall not impinge code required work space of other equipment, devices,
access panel, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc.
9. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts.
Maintain at least 1" air space between equipment and supporting wall. Groups or
arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels,
or bars. Prefabricated steel channels providing a high degree of mounting
flexibility, such as those manufactured by Kindorf, Glob-Strutt and Unistrut, may
be used for mounting arrays of equipment.
10. No equipment, including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings, shall depend
on electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support, except that threaded hub type
fittings having a gross volume not in excess of 100 cubic inches may be supported
from heavy wall conduit, where the conduit in turn is securely supported from the
structure within five inches of the fitting on two opposite sides.
11. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceilings media (tiles,
lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the
ceiling). If suspended ceilings are use to support lighting fixtures, they shall be
designed to support the weight of the fixtures. Branch circuit conduit up to 3/4"
may be permitted to be supported from ceiling hanger rods if the allowable loading
of the rods is not exceeded and approved by the Architect and Engineer.
12. For items, which are shown, as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening
to the building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable
auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging, tying to the building structural elements.
J.
DISSIMILAR METALS
1.
Dissimilar metals shall mean those metals, which are incompatible with one
another in the presence of moisture. Where dissimilar metals come in contact,
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 22
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
2.
K.
Voltage Check
1.
2.
3.3
paint the joint both inside and out with approved coating to exclude moisture from
the joint, or provide a suitable insulating barrier separating the metals.
Transitions in raceways, from one metal to a dissimilar metal shall only be made at
boxes or other enclosures.
At completion of job, check voltage at several points of utilization on the system,
which has been installed under this Contract. During test, energize all installed
loads.
Adjust taps on transformers to give proper voltage, which is 118 to 122 volts for
120-volt nominal systems and proportionately equivalent for higher voltage
systems. If proper voltage cannot be obtained, inform the Architect and the
Owner.
GROUNDING
A.
All enclosures and other noncurrent carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment,
raceway systems and equipment ground buses shall be effectively grounded to the
building grounding systems through the system ground conductors. Metallic conduits
and other raceways and enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined together
into a continuous electrical conductor, as to provide effective electrical continuity.
B.
Equipment located remotely from the ground conductors shall be grounded to the
nearest available cold water piping. Motor frames shall be grounded through their
conduits.
C.
Ground continuity shall be maintained throughout.
D.
Ground motors by connecting a conductor from a grounding bushing in the starter to the
motor frame. Conductor shall be installed in the conduit with the circuit conductors.
3.4
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A.
Heights of wall mounted outlets and equipment shall be in accordance with the
following (unless otherwise noted). Dimensions are above finished floor unless
otherwise noted).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outlets (receptacle and telephone) in walls, partitions or columns to center line:
1'-3" if mounted horizontally and 1'-6" if mounted vertically.
Switch (toggle) outlet in walls, partitions or columns -3'-10" to center line.
Individual motor starter - 5'-0" to center line.
Fire alarm pull station - 3'-10" to center line.
Group mounted (motor starters or distribution system switching devices) 6'- 6"
maximum to center line of highest pushbutton or switching device handle
requiring manual operation, 1'-0" minimum to bottom of lowest enclosure.
Fire alarm strobe - 6'-8" to center line.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 23
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
7.
8.
3.5
Mounting heights of pendant mounted lighting fixtures shall be as directed in the
field by the architect or as indicated on architectural drawings.
Details shown on architectural drawings and field instructions issued by the
architect take precedence over the above list and shall be adhered to.
SEISMIC PROTECTION
A.
Seismic restraints for equipment, conduits, cable trays, devices, luminaries, equipment
housekeeping pads and equipment supports shall be provided and shall comply with the
latest Seismic and applicable codes. Refer to the applicable specification sections for
other requirements.
B.
Seismic restraint design shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the State in which the work is to be performed.
3.6
EQUIPMENT NOISE AND VIBRATION
A.
Equipment and systems, as defined herein, shall be quiet and free of apparent vibration
while in operation.
B.
Vibration shall not be apparent to the senses in occupied areas of the building. Both
the balancing of rotating machinery and the installation of vibration isolators are
required.
C.
Any additional precautions deemed necessary to provide a quiet installation shall be
done as part of the Work of this Section, subject to review by the Engineer and without
additional cost to the Owner. After the systems are in operation, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to make any changes to equipment or Work
3.7
SETTING OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE
A.
3.8
Prior to final completion of the Project, set all protective device relays and internal
settings based on the accepted coordination study.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
The Contractor shall identify all piping, conduit, machinery, and equipment in
accordance with SECTION 26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION for ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS.
B.
The Contractor shall submit a schedule for equipment identification.
3.9
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Field verify openings indicated on the Drawings. Provide all cutting and patching
required for electrical work.
B.
Sleeves and inserts: Provide all sleeves, inserts, and openings necessary for the
installation of the Electrical Work. Provide sleeves in all floors (except where fire
proofing is required) and concrete walls.
C.
Openings for all electrical equipment shall be field verified:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 24
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.10
Special forming, recesses, chases, and curbs, for the correct reception and
installation of the electrical equipment, as shown on the Drawings, are specified in
other divisions.
Ascertain that provisions have been made for the Work. If such provisions are not
made in time, the Contractor shall bear all extra costs incurred in late cutting and
patching to accommodate the work.
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Where cutting, channeling,
chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is
necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of raceway, outlets or
other equipment, the work shall be carefully done and where required, fire rating
integrity shall be restored. Any damage to the piping, equipment or defaced finish
plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc. shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the
trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner. Refer to architectural
specifications for details and requirements.
The Contractor shall do no cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of unfinished
masonry, tile, floor slab, etc., unless he first obtains permission from the Architect
and Structural Engineer. If permission is granted, the Contractor shall perform
this work in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer.
If holes and/or sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes
necessary, it shall be done at no additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor
shall undertake no cutting or patching without first securing the Architect's written
approval.
Where other Trades are required to do cutting and patching, furnish to the
Construction Manager necessary information so that openings for this work can be
built into the floors and walls in time. Such cooperation is required to keep cutting
of walls and floors to a minimum.
Should Contractor neglect to perform preliminary work, and should cutting be
required in order to install equipment, conduits, etc, the expense of this cutting and
restoring of surfaces to their original condition shall be borne by this Contractor.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A.
Provide programming and all modifications required to the existing fire alarm terminal
cabinet and fire alarm control panel to accommodate system revisions, deletion of
existing devices and addition of new devices.
B.
New devices and system shall be capable of interfacing and operating with the existing
system. The contractor is responsible without additional cost to the owner for any
modifications and additional devices necessary should another manufacturer be
installed.
C.
Contact the existing fire alarm system maintenance vendor and designate this vendor as
a sub-contractor for fire alarm system installation. The fire alarm system maintenance
vendor is simplex grinnellinc. Contact Enver Perezic at office number 212-372-4200 or
cell number 917-416-8146.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 25
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
D.
3.11
The riser diagram is shown to provide a general representation of the connection of the
new and existing devices. The contractor is responsible for installing required wiring
based on the local code requirement.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protection: Fully protect all finished parts of the materials and equipment against
physical damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work and until
completion.
B.
During construction, cap all conduits to prevent the entrance of sand and dirt.
C.
Cleaning: After installation has been completed, the Contractor shall clean all systems
as follows:
1.
2.
Equipment with Factory Finish: Clean exterior thoroughly to remove grease, oil,
plaster, cement and dirt, and leave surfaces clean and polished.
Equipment to be painted:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
Clean exterior of piping and equipment exposed in completed structure,
removing rust, plaster, cement and dirt by wire brushing. Remove grease, oil
and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and solvents.
Equipment furnished under this Section shall have factory-applied finish. If
the factory finish is damaged during shipment, storage, installation, etc., it
shall be repainted by this Contractor subject to the Engineer’s approval.
Touch-up painting is acceptable only for minor finish damage.
Provide a heavy field coat of black asphalt paint on all steel conduits, cradles,
vibration isolating mounts, and the like, that will be encased or partially
encased in building construction, set in cement or fill, before items are built
into the general construction.
Where conduits, mounting channels, outlet, junction, or pull boxes are
mounted on a painted surface, or a surface to be painted they shall be
painted, by this contractor, to match the surface.
Contractor shall take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc.,
resulting from the installation of the work. Contractor shall remove from the
premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and keep the premises clean, subject to
the Architect/Engineer's instructions, which shall be promptly carried out.
Contractor shall clean up all luminaries and equipment at the completion of the
project.
All switchboards, switchgears, busway, panelboards, wireways, transformers,
transfer switches, trench ducts, cabinets, enclosures, etc. shall be thoroughly
vacuumed clean prior to energizing equipment and at the completion of the
project. Equipment shall be opened for observation by the Architect/Engineer as
required.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 26
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
3.12
FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A.
The entire electrical installation shall be pre-tested, inspected, thoroughly cleaned, and
damaged finishes touched up after final completion prior to final acceptance testing
being performed. Not less than 30 days prior to the final acceptance testing, furnish the
pre-test results and a test plan, to the Engineer for review, outlining all aspects of the
testing, including tests to be performed and the expected results.
B.
The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each
system is to be completed and outlining when tests will be performed. Completion
schedule shall be submitted to the Architect, Engineer, and Owner for review at the
time requested by the Construction Manager after the notice to proceed has been given
by the Owner. This schedule shall be updated periodically by the Contractor as the
Project progresses. Each update shall be submitted to the Architect, Engineer, and
Owner for review.
C.
Provide complete documentation of all component and system tests prior to Owner
acceptance and turnover of components or systems. In addition, the Owner reserves
the right to review all test objectives, test plans and test cases, and witness all
preoperational tests. Provide the Owner with a comprehensive schedule detailing the
preparation of testing documentation and the conduct of all component or system tests.
D.
Operate all electrical systems and equipment for a period of 24 hours, unless in the
opinion of the Engineer, a different test period is required, to prove the operation and
performance of a system and its equipment.
E.
Should the foregoing test reveal any defects, promptly correct such defects and re-run
the tests until the entire installation conforms to the requirements of these
Specifications and the Drawings.
F.
Tests requiring certified reports and those requiring factory or field inspection shall be
conducted and reported to the Engineer in conformance with standards specified in the
applicable sections.
G.
In addition to the tests outlined above, after completion of the electrical system and
prior to occupancy, the following equipment and devices, as a minimum, shall be
thermo graphically inspected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Feeder splices and Connections.
Transformer.
Panelboards.
All cable connections rated 100 amperes (#3 AWG) or greater.
H.
The inspection shall be made by an independent inspection company. The inspection
shall be made with all equipment, motors, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous loads
operating and with equipment covers removed.
I.
Inspection reports complete with color photographs of the infrared scan and control
photographs indicating the ambient temperature and any hot spots of each item
inspected shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Any equipment, connections
or devices indicated to be operating improperly performing equipment shall be replaced
or repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 27
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
J.
3.13
A.
The date for the final performance acceptance testing shall comply with the Project
construction schedule and shall be sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion
date to permit the execution of the testing by the Contractor prior to occupancy and the
closeout of the Contract. Specific attention is required for any special spaces such as
Tenant Areas, which will be governed, by a separate construction and turnover
schedule from that provided for the overall project. Any adjustments and/or
alterations, which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper and
satisfactory functioning of all equipment and systems, shall be completed prior to the
closeout of the Contract. Re-tests shall not relieve the Contractor of completion date
responsibility.
DEMONSTRATION AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
After completion of all testing, and prior to placing equipment or systems in operation,
demonstrate the features and operation of the equipment or systems to the Engineer,
Owner, operational and maintenance personnel so that they are familiarized with the
equipment and systems, in particularly the following equipment and systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Panelboards.
Transformer.
Lighting Control system
Fire alarm and smoke detection systems.
Other equipment and control systems shown on the Drawings.
B.
Provide the necessary accessories, test equipment, and personnel, for each
demonstration.
C.
Complete all arrangements for the demonstrations through the Engineer.
D.
Upon the completion of each demonstration or instructional session, obtain "sign-off"
from the Engineer and Owner. The "sign-off" shall state that the demonstration or
instructions for use were provided, that they were complete and were given to the
designated personnel.
E.
The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained specialist to supervise the
commissioning, startup, and operation of all equipment specified herein and to instruct
the Owner's operators during an operating instruction period at or near the Project site.
The operating instruction period shall be defined as straight time working hours and
shall not include nights, weekends, or travel time to and/or from the Project. See
individual sections of these specifications for additional instructions by manufacturertrained specialists.
F.
The Owner shall be notified in writing at least two (2) weeks before each operating
instruction period begins. The Contractor shall commence no instruction period until
the Owner has issued his written acceptance of the starting time.
3.14
A.
FINAL REVIEW
At a time designated, the entire installation shall be reviewed for compliance with the
Contract Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall be available at all times
during this Review.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 28
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
B.
The Contractor shall demonstrate prior to the Final Review that all systems and all
equipment have been properly adjusted and comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. After these demonstration tests are completed satisfactorily, but
prior to the Final Review field visit, by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a written certification that 1) attests to Contract Document compliance for
this Project, and 2) certifies that the equipment and materials installed in this Project
under this Section contain no asbestos or PCB.
C.
Certificates and Documents required herein shall be in order and presented to the
Architect and Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to the Final Review.
D.
After the Final Review, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the Work to
comply with these Specifications and the Drawings shall be accomplished immediately
in order to secure final acceptance of the Work.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
231600- 29
Electrical Common Work
June 30, 2010
SECTION 260519
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work
and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a
complete installation.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4
Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except
as otherwise shown or specified:
1.
2.
NFPA 70
NEMA WC 5
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
UL 83
UL 486A
UL 486C
UL 493
IEEE 82
National Electrical Code (NEC).
Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors
Splicing Wire Connectors
Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables
Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260000, the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical and
electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed
application.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
The Contractor shall submit "Megger" test report from testing agency to the Owner’s
Representative as specified in 3.1 for approval of the work.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 1
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new and
unused, and of current manufacturer.
1.
1.6
The Contractor shall provide a "Megger" insulation tester that applies a minimum of 500
volts direct current for the tests when requested by the Owner’s Representative at no
additional cost.
COORDINATION
A.
Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CABLES
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
General Cable.
Rome.
Or equal.
Conductors shall have Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed 600 volts insulation of type
specified below or elsewhere in the Specifications.
1.
Branch Circuits - Lighting and Power
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
#14 AWG and smaller, shall be solid conductors.
#12 AWG and larger, shall be stranded conductors.
The insulation shall be type THHN
Feeders (100A and more): the insulation shall be type XHHW-2 or THHN.
For conductors installed in exposed conduit outside of Buildings, in exposed conduit in
tunnel and conduit within or just under roofing material, provide type XHHW.
Control Circuits: Use 600 volts U.L. type THHN/THWN conductors except where subject
to abnormally high temperatures such as on or near boilers.
Wiring through fluorescent fixtures in continuous rows shall be type THHN.
C.
All conductors shall be copper. Aluminum conductors shall not be used for any type of wiring
on this project.
D.
Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except for control wiring where #14 AWG may be
used.
E.
Branch Circuit and Feeder Wiring for all systems shall be continuous from switch to terminal
or farthest outlet. No joint shall be made except in pull, junction, or outlet boxes, or in gutters.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 2
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
F.
All systems of wiring shall be so installed that when completed the systems will be free from
short circuits and from grounds, other than required grounds.
G.
Provide all conductors used for power, lighting, control signal and communications systems,
operating at 600 volts and below, with a minimum insulation rating of 600 volts.
H.
All conductors shall be delivered to the site on their original cable reels or in their original
unbroken packages and shall be inspected and approved by the Owner’s Representative before
opening.
I.
All conductors shall be new and shall have been manufactured within 12 months of the date of
delivery to the site and continuously stored where protected from the heat or weather.
J.
Types of conductor insulation for general use may be any of the following, subject to
limitations listed, in addition to those in the NEC.
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
2.2
Type XHHW - No restrictions, except do not use 90 degree C ampacity rating unless
terminations are rated for 90 degree C. Use for exterior and wet area applications.
Type THHN. Do not use for conductors in slab. Do not use in wet locations.
Use Type THHN or XHHW, (90 degrees C. rated) types for connecting fluorescent
fixtures and for running through fixture housings.
Use conductors such as type FEP with high temperature insulation as identified in the NEC
for connections to resistance heating elements or in other areas subject to temperature
exceeding the rating of XHHW.
Wire size ampacity shall equal or exceed its overload protective device. Where wire sizes
shown on the drawings are greater than the apparent ampacity requirements, the size shown
shall prevail to compensate for voltage drop.
CONNECTORS
A.
Connections to equipment shall be made with pressure type terminals. On stranded wire, use
spade type terminals or terminals approved for use with stranded wire. Connections shall
contain only single conductors unless approved for multiples.
1.
2.
For conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller, applied crimp type terminals shall be T&B
"Sta-Kon" or approved equal.
For No. 8 AWG and larger conductors, applied crimp type terminals shall be Burndy, T&B
or approved equal.
B.
Where tape is applied over wires and connectors on 600 volt or lower voltage applications, it
shall consist of a minimum of two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch "88" or Plymouth No. 4240
for both indoor and outdoor applications, except Scotch 33 Plus or Plymouth No. 4453 is
acceptable for use indoors. Underground splices shall be made using kits approved for the
application.
C.
Where fireproofing of cables is noted on the drawings or required by Code, each cable shall be
arc and fireproofed with one (1) half-lapped layer of Scotch Brand 77 Electric Arc and
Fireproofing Tape. Tape shall be secured with a 2-layer band of Scotch Brand 69 Glass
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 3
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
Electrical Tape over the last wrap. Installation shall comply with manufacturer's
recommendation.
2.3
LUBRICANTS
A.
When necessary to use a lubricant for pulling wires, lubricant must be listed by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. Only cable lubricants approved for the type of jacket material or insulation
shall be used, and must be of such consistency that it will dry completely when exposed to air.
Lubricant must leave no obstruction or tackiness that will prevent pulling out old wires or
pulling in new wires or additional wires, and, after drying, must leave a film of lubrication,
which will promote easy movement of the wires. The lubricant shall contain no waxes,
greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes. Lubricant shall be Ideal "Yellow 190",
3M “WL”” Wire Pulling Lubricant, or approved equal.
B.
It is not allowed to use oil, grease, graphite, or similar substances for pulling conductors in
raceways.
C.
Pulling of size #1/0 or larger conductors shall be done with an approved cable pull machine.
Other methods; e.g. using vehicles, and block and tackle to install conductors are not
acceptable.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Cable supports: Vertical cable supports shall be manufactured by O.Z. type "M” series, Adalet
"SVM" series, or equal.
B.
Insulating Tape: Insulating tapes shall be plastic self-adhering type manufactured by Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing "Scotch" #33 Electrical tape, Manville Bulldog #166, or equal.
C.
Conductor ties: Ties shall be plastic with cinching holders manufactured by T & B "Ty-Rap"
series, Panduit "Pan-Rap" series, or equal.
D.
Sealants: Conductor sealant shall be silicone type manufactured by Dow-Corning #795,
General Electric #SCS 1000 or equal.
2.5
SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052 thickness as
indicated and of length to suit application.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 4
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
D.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C.
Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing any wire.
B.
Clean all outlet and J-boxes before installing any wire.
C.
Branch circuit conductors shall be pulled without resorting to levers or heavy pulling devices.
D.
Do not install permanent wiring, without special permission from the Owner’s Representative,
until plastering is done and dirt removed.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Branch circuit conductor identification means shall be permanently posted at each panel board.
This identification shall be installed on the inside of the door and shall identify conductor
colors for each voltage system in the building.
B.
All wires, both low and line voltage, shall be installed in code approved raceways unless
exceptions are approved by the Owner’s Representative in writing.
C.
Branch Circuit Wiring Methods: Fluorescent Fixtures shall not be used as a raceway for branch
circuit conductors except where installed end-to-end to form a continuous assembly and UL
listed for through-wiring.
D.
Wiring in vertical raceways shall be supported with strain relief devices, Kellem's grips or
approved equal.
E.
Make all branch circuit and fixture joints for #10 AWG and smaller wire with connectors.
F.
Make all branch circuit joint of #8 AWG and larger with screw pressure lugs, and insulate with
electrical tape to 150% of the insulating value of the conductor insulation.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 5
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
G.
Tape all connections made with non-insulated type connectors with insulating tape to 150
percent of the insulating value of conductor insulation.
H.
Each circuit must correspond to the branch circuit number indicated on the panel schedule
shown on the Drawings except where departures are approved by the Owner’s Representative.
I.
Where conductors in conduit pass through exterior walls, a sealing compound of moistureresistant material shall be applied in the ends of the conduits to seal around the conductors.
J.
Tag all conductors of power circuits and the various signal systems. Conductors shall be tagged
in each junction box, pull box, wireways or auxiliary gutter and at each device, motor outlet,
panelboard, and switchboard or other conductor termination. Tag shall show feeder number,
date energized; voltage, what the cable feeds - "to" and "from", size, phase and origin,
indicating panelboard and circuit number. Cable tags shall, be non-corrosive type attached to
cable with "wire tie wraps".
K.
Wiring within all equipment enclosures shall be neatly grouped and tied together.
L.
Pigtails shall be extended from branch wiring in outlet boxes for attachment to devices. Loops
in through wiring will not be acceptable.
M.
Conductors in outlet boxes shall have a minimum of eight inches of extra conductors.
N.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
O.
Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
P.
Tighten bolted connections to manufacturer's recommended torque values.
Q.
Terminations for signal and control circuits shall utilize crimp-on spade lugs.
R.
Splices in damp or wet locations, or where located in pullboxes or manholes, shall utilize cast
resin type, watertight connections.
S.
Do not run conductors from different panelboards in same raceway.
T.
Do not run conductors with different voltages in same raceway.
U.
Re-tighten all bolt type connectors 24 to 48 hours after initial installation and before taping.
3.4
WIRE COLOR
A.
Conductor Color Coding and Identification: Conductors larger than #10 shall have colored tape
wrapped around each conductor and circuit number identification tags, in junction boxes, pull
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 6
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
boxes, manholes, switchgear, panels, cabinets, and wherever a break or termination in the
conductor occurs, etc. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall have color coded insulation as
follows:
1.
Wire Color Code
Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Ground
Switch Traveler, (3- or 4-way)
2.
3.5
208/120 V
White
Black
Red
Blue
Green
Switch Leg 120 V
--Black w/white stripe
Red w/white stripe
Blue w/white stripe
--Purple w/black stripe
Equipment ground conductor shall be green, and Isolated ground conductor shall be green
with yellow stripe.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, section 7.3.1.
B.
Prior to energizing conductors, test using a 500 Volt megger to determine insulation resistance,
and a check for short circuits.
C.
Tests shall be made prior to final connection of equipment.
D.
All conductors failing to comply with the manufacturers' minimum standard or
recommendations shall be replaced at Contractor's expense.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260519- 7
Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
June 30, 2010
SECTION 260529
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
Equipment supports.
Equipment anchoring and supports.
Fastening hardware.
Section 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems for products and
installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
Section 055000 – Metal Fabrications: Hangers.
Section 095300 – Acoustical Ceiling Suspension Assemblies.
Section 260533 – Raceway and Boxes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design support and anchorage systems to resist all gravity and seismic forces in accordance
with the requirements of the Building Code.
B.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
C.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
D.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260529- 1
Hangers & Supports for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
E.
1.5
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of 3 times the
applied force.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Submit dimensioned layout drawings, details, locations and structural calculations for gravity
and seismic support systems. Include plans, elevations and all necessary information to satisfy
the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Calculations shall be prepared and signed by a Registered
Structural Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for
field assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Unistrut;
Cooper B-Line, Inc.;
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
1.
2.
Hot-dip galvanized, cast malleable iron, one hole type strap with cast clamp-backs and
spacers as required.
OZ/Gedney "14-G" series strap and "141G" series spacer; Efcor "231" series strap and
"131" series spacer; Thomas & Betts "1276" series strap and "1350" series spacer, or
equal.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260529- 2
Hangers & Supports for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1).
2).
3).
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1).
2).
3).
3.
4.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Ramset/Red Head;
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Drilled sleeve type expansion anchors, Ramset "Dynabolt," "Red-Head" RM series or
equal.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
a.
5.
Remington.
ITW Ramset.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Pressed galvanized steel, spot insert, with oval slot capable of accepting support nuts
of 1/4-inch to 1/2-inch diameter thread.
Unistrut No. M24 with "M2506" series nut; Superstrut No. 425 with "AB-102" series
nut, Kinline No. 279 with "660" series nut, or equal.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Galvanized rod, sized for the load unless otherwise shown or specified.
deck inserts
a.
b.
Steel plate 3/16-inch thick with threaded galvanized steel rod sized for load.
Superstrut No. C-475 series, Kinline No. 293 series, or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
260529- 3
Hangers & Supports for Electrical
Brooklyn College
Systems
Brooklyn, NY
June 30, 2010
Project #6032.20
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
D.
3.2
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide supporting devices as noted in other Sections of Division 26.
B.
Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using
precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.
C.
Use hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry walls.
D.
Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.
E.
Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete surfaces.
F.
Powder activated anchors may only be used if first accepted in writing by the Architect.
G.
Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.
H.
Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
I.
Do not drill structural steel members unless first accepted in writing by the Architect.
J.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a
neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
K.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with a minimum of four anchors. Provide
additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately support
cabinets and panels.
L.
Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards
in stud walls.
M.
Anchor free-standing equipment on concrete pads where indicated.
3.3
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
260529- 4
Hangers & Supports for Electrical
Brooklyn College
Systems
Brooklyn, NY
June 30, 2010
Project #6032.20
B.
3.4
LAYOUT
A.
Layout support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to support
equipment loads.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260529- 5
Hangers & Supports for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
SECTION 260533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation
required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Rigid steel conduit and fittings.
Flexible metallic conduit and fittings.
Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit and fittings.
Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings.
Outlet boxes.
Pull and Junction boxes.
Floor boxes.
Miscellaneous products.
Related work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related
work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to
produce a complete installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
RGS: Rigid Galvanized Steel.
B.
IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit.
C.
FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit.
D.
LFMC: Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit.
E.
EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except
as otherwise shown or specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ANSI C80.1 ANSI C80-3 ANSI/NEMA FS 1 ANSI/NFPA 70 FS WW-C-563A -
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated
Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated
Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies
National Electrical Code (NEC)
Electrical Metallic Tubing
260533- 1
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.5
FS WW-C-566 FS WW-C-581 NEMA TC 2NEMA TC 3 NEMA
NEMA OS-1
Supports
NEMA OS-2
Supports
NEMA 250
UL 1 UL 6 UL 651 UL 797 -
Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit
Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit
Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit
PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
FB-1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies
Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)
Flexible Metal Conduit
Rigid Metal Conduit
Rigid Nonmetallic Electrical Conduit
Electrical Metallic Tubing
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260000, the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical and
electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed
application.
Submit manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide written instructions for raceway
products requiring glues, special tools, or specific installation techniques.
Submit samples for each fitting (2 samples of each type).
List of conduit types indicating where each type will be used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new.
1.
B.
Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the project unless
otherwise submitted and approved by the Owner’s Representative.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS)
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
Allied Tube and Conduit
Or equal
Rigid or Immediate Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS or IMC):
1.
Provide standard weight, highest quality prime steel that is hot-dipped galvanized inside
and out. It should have uniform wall thickness with smooth and defect free interior.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 2
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Fitting shall be zinc coated, ferrous metal and threaded type. Split or bolt-on type is not
acceptable.
All fittings, couplings and connectors shall be threaded type.
Treads shall be hot dipped galvanized after cutting. Electro-galvanizing is not permitted.
Grounding bushings, malleable iron; insulated; Steel City BG-801; Midwest Series GLL.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
AFC
Alflex
Or equal
B.
Conduit: Provide conduit manufactured from single strip, standard weight steel hot-dipped
galvanized on all four sides prior to conduit fabrication. Flexible aluminum and flexible lightweight steel conduit will not be allowed.
C.
Fittings: Flexible Conduit Connectors and Couplings: Provide die cast fittings of the type that
screw into the inside of the conduit with threaded edges at 90 degrees to the fitting body to
insure a force fit. Binding screw type will not be acceptable. Fittings shall be manufactured by
AFC, O-Z Gedney, T&B, Steel City or equal.
D.
General: flexible conduit and fittings shall provide positive ground continuity. Include a
separate green grounding conductor in each run.
2.3
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Sealtite Flexible type “UA”
Flex-Seal type “XL”
Or equal
B.
Conduit: Liquid-tight conduit shall be manufactured from single strip standard weight steel, hot
dipped galvanized on all four sides prior to conduit fabrication, and shall be provided with an
extruded polyvinyl chloride cover.
C.
Fittings: Fittings shall be malleable iron, zinc plated, with locknut and O-ring seal and slim
diameter with small turning radius. Fittings shall be manufactured by O-Z Gedney-4Q series,
T&B- 5200 series or Appleton Flexible Fittings-ST series.
D.
General: Liquidtight conduit and fittings shall provide positive ground continuity. Include a
separate green grounding conductor in each run.
2.4
ELECTRICAL METALIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Allied Tube and Conduit
Western
Or equal
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 3
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
B.
Conduit: Provide tubing of high grade steel electrically welded with exterior protective coating
of hot galvanized zinc, applied by the electro galvanized process. Interior surface shall be
coated with aluminum lacquer or enamel. Tubing shall be dipped in a chromic acid bath to
chemically form a corrosion-resistant protective coating of zinc chromate over galvanized
surface.
C.
Fittings: Fitting shall be steel, watertight, gland ring compression type, wrench tightened
connectors and couplings. Die Cast, set screw or indenter types will not be acceptable. Fittings
shall be manufactured by Appleton, O-Z Gedney, Cooper/Crouse-Hinds or equal.
2.5
WIREWAY
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Wiremold
B-line
Or equal
B.
Provide metal wireway where indicated on drawings or as required. The size shall be minimum
6”x6” unless otherwise noted. The finish shall be rust inhibiting primer coating with grey
enamel finish.
C.
Outdoor units shall be raintight with screw covers and furnished with full gaskets.
2.6
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Standard Outlet Box:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Appleton
Steel City
Raco
Or equal
Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized pressed steel and plugged holes, and shall be
hot dipped galvanized or sherardized.
The minimum box size shall be 4” square by 2-1/8” deep.
Telephone and data outlets shall be a minimum of 4-11/16” square by 2-1/8” deep.
Light fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture-supporting device, as required by
the unit to be installed.
Switch Outlets: Use solid gang boxes for three or more switches for mounting behind a
common single plate.
Fire Alarm boxes shall be 4” square with plaster rings to suit type of device. Special boxes
shall be as specified in Section 28 31 00.
For boxes concealed in walls or ceiling, provide the solid gang, galvanized steel knockout
type. Sectional boxes shall not be used.
Light fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture-supporting device, as required by
the unit to be installed.
Concrete Box:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 4
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
D.
Provide galvanized steel, 4” octagon rings with mounting lugs, backplate and adapter ring
as required.
Select height as necessary to position knockouts above concrete reinforcing steel
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Boxes, type “FS” or “FD”:
1.
2.
Provide galvanized cast iron alloy; flat flanged, surface mounted junction box with
threaded hubs and mounting lugs as required.
Furnish box with cast cover plate of same material as the box with ground flange, neoprene
gasketed, and stainless steel screws.
E.
Cast Metal Pull and Junction Box: Provide standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes
wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron boxes with bolt-on,
interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets. Manufactured by O.Z. Gedney,
Alhambra Foundry Co. or equal.
F.
Flush mounted pullboxes and junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover
retaining screws, prime coated.
2.7
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Box
1.
2.
Provide standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use minimum
16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA 1 boxes, sized to Code requirements with covers
secured by cadmium plated machine screws located 6 inches on centers.
ANSI/NEMA OS 1.
B.
Cast Metal Pull and Junction Box: Provide standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes
wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron boxes with bolt-on,
interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets. Manufactured by O.Z. Gedney,
Alhambra Foundry Co. or equal.
C.
Flush mounted pullboxes and junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover
retaining screws, prime coated.
D.
Precast Concrete Boxes: Provide high density reinforced concrete pull and junction box with
end and side knockouts and non-settling shoulders. Use cast iron lid with hold down bolts or
use traffic rated covers in areas subject to vehicular traffic. Manufactured by Associated,
Quickset, Jensen/Brooks or equal.
E.
Cast Flush Floor Box:
1.
2.
3.
Single or multi-gang floor boxes shall be cast iron with brushed aluminum coverplates and
carpet flange (or any type of flange required for other types of floors) for flush applications
in concrete floor. Furnish with provisions for adjustments before and after pour. Provide
with all accessories such as receptacles, compartment dividers, coverplates, options, rings,
etc. as indicated for application on drawings.
Furnish the box in either shallow or deep sizes as determined by the concrete floor depth
and in ganged configurations shown on drawings.
Use Walker #880 series or equal.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 5
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Sleeves shall be zinc coated galvanized steel pipe or 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal.
B.
Sealant: Fire rated equal to wall or ceiling penetrated. Silicon foam Dow-Corning #2001, 3M,
"Pensil #851," or approved equal. Sealant compound for exterior walls shall be moistureresistant material made by 3M, GE, Dow-Corning or equal.
C.
Conduit unions shall be "Erickson" couplings manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Type 4Series manufactured by O-Z/Gedney or equal.
D.
Conduit seals shall be Crouse-Hinds Type "EYS" or EZS," Appleton Type "ESUF" or
"ESUM," or approved equal, with sealing compound as recommended by the manufacturer for
hazardous or refrigerated areas.
E.
Conduit Outlet Body: Provide Cadmium plated cast iron alloy, oblong conduit outlet bodies
with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasket, cast iron covers where required. Condulets
shall be cast iron with threaded hubs and gasket. Type "LBD" or "LBDN" series, manufactured
by Appleton, Crouse-Hinds or equal.
F.
Expansion couplings shall be OZ Type "AX" or "DX," Crouse-Hinds Type "XJ" or "SD" or
equal, complete with bonding jumper.
G.
Conduit unions shall be "Erickson" couplings manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Type 4Series manufactured by O-Z/Gedney or equal.
H.
Anchors not cast into concrete shall be expansion shield type, Phillips "Red Head," Hilti, or
equal.
I.
Acoustic pads shall be pliable, putty-like pads, one-eighth-inch thick. Manufactured by Lowry
Pads, L.H. Dotty or equal.
J.
In areas having special membrane waterproofing in or on the floor slab, a Josam 26420, or
equal approved by the Architect, riser sleeve with clamping ring and auxiliary conduit sleeve
extending 4 inches above finished floor or 8 inches above finished roof shall be used.
Waterproofing membrane for roof floor construction shall be secured by the clamping ring.
These are to be used in areas having special membrane waterproofing in or on the floor slab
and at roof decks.
K.
Multiple conduits extending through the roof may be fitted with a manufactured pipe curb
weatherproofing assembly equal to Pate, Pca, Lpca and Mpca as an alternative to that specified
in paragraph 2.7 above.
L.
Escutcheon plates shall be split-ring chromium plated pressed steel. Plates shall be sized to
cover the surface penetration and sleeve. Plates shall be installed on exposed piping in finished
rooms and areas where conduits penetrate walls, floors, ceilings or overhead structure.
2.9
SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A.
Sleeves and formed openings shall be placed in walls, partitions, floor slabs and poured
concrete roof decks for the passage of conduit, cable, wireway and cable tray. Sleeves and
formed openings are not required:
1.
In floor slabs on grade.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 6
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Where conduit is installed before the wall, partition or slab is constructed.
Openings are cut for conduit passage and patched with equal or comparable material to
close the space around the conduit.
In stud and gypsum board or plaster walls and partitions, which are not fire-rated.
For conduit passing thru masonry walls and partitions and stud and gypsum board or
plaster walls and partitions. Sleeves are required however, for which expansion,
contraction and other movement can be expected.
In core drilled openings in solid concrete not requiring water protection. Sleeves are
required, however, at core drilling thru hollow pre-cast slabs and concrete block walls, to
facilitate containment of required firestopping material.
In large floor openings for multiple pipe and duct risers, which are within a fire-rated shaft,
unless the opening is to be closed off with concrete or other material after conduits, are set.
B.
Sleeves for passage of conduit and cables shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe or galvanized
rigid conduit. Rectangular sleeves for cables, wireway and cable tray shall be 18 gauge
galvanized steel in poured concrete floors, walls and roof decks; 26 gauge galvanized sheet
steel in other than poured concrete.
C.
Sleeves shall be sized to afford 0.25" to 0.75" clearance space.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of raceway and box installation to verify
conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with
installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
PREPARATION
A.
Raceway:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Boxes:
1.
2.
3.3
Deliver conduits and raceways to site in standard lengths, and store in dry and enclosed
locations.
Installation of raceways shall be coordinated with building structure and other trades, and
shall be complete with bends, fittings, junction, and pull boxes to meet all codes and make
complete operating systems.
Provide the type of conduit permitted in these Specifications or required for each location
or condition per applicable codes and jurisdictions whichever is more stringent.
Install all outlet boxes flush with building walls, ceilings and floors except where boxes
are installed in mechanical and electrical rooms, in cabinetry, above accessible ceilings or
where exposed work is called for on the Drawings.
Locate pullboxes and junction boxes in concealed locations above removable ceilings
(shall be accessible) or exposed in electrical rooms, utility rooms or storage areas.
INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A.
General
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 7
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
1.
Conduit and raceway shall not be run in foundation, column, concrete slab, nor in the plane
of the concrete shear wall without written approval of the Owner’s Representative for each
conduit run.
2. Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to cabinet, junction box, pull
box and shall enter and be secured to all boxes, etc., in such a manner that each system will
be mechanically and electrically continuous from service to all outlets.
3. Junction boxes or pull boxes shall be installed to avoid excessive runs and bends between
outlets.
4. Conceal conduit above ceiling, below floors or in walls, unless otherwise noted.
5. A separate conduit shall be installed for each homerun indicated on the Drawings.
6. Wherever conduit extends through roof, furnish and install galvanized sheet metal
flashing. Flashing shall extend six inches above roof.
7. From each panel which is flush mounted in a wall, stub from top of the panel, a minimum
of four 1-inch conduits to the nearest ceiling space or other accessible location and cap for
future use.
8. Paint conduits with identifying colors for each system, per Section 26 05 53.
9. In long runs of conduit, provide sufficient pull boxes inside buildings to facilitate pulling
wires and cables. Support all pull boxes from structure independent of conduit supports,
with spacing not to exceed 200 feet. These pullboxes are not necessarily indicated on
drawings. Pull boxes shall be provided for every 100 feet of telecommunications conduit
runs.
10. Conduit support shall be dedicated to support the conduit system only and shall not
support any other item.
B.
Size of Conduits
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
The size of the conduits for the various circuits shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
No conduit shall be smaller than 3/4" unless otherwise noted.
1/2" conduit may be used for switch leg only up to 3 wires plus ground from switch to first
J-box.
Conduit size shall be increased to facilitate the pulling of wires.
Conduit size shall be increased to the next larger size where it shall be installed in slab or
underground.
Minimum conduit size for underground shall be 1".
Conduit Placement
1.
Conduit Supports:
a.
b.
c.
Conduits larger than 1 inch shall be suspended with pipe hangers. Pipe hangers for
individual conduits shall be Grinnell #108 and #110R, Super Strut #M-718-5R, or
equal, malleable iron split pipe rings, suspended from hanger rods. Rods shall be
3/8-inch for 2-inch and smaller conduits, and 1/2-inch for 2-1/2-inch and larger
conduits.
Concealed areas: Support conduits 1-inch and smaller with pipe clamps either
suspended from structural slabs with a rod at least 3/8 –inch diameter with
adjustable pipe ring, or mounted on wall form channel supports. Attach to
concrete with Phillips "Red Head," Hilti, or equal drilled anchors of appropriate
load capacity.
Hangers and racks shall be attached to concrete with insets, set at the time the
concrete is poured, and to steel members with beam clamps or machine bolts.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 8
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
d.
2.
Where two or more conduits 1-1/2 inch and larger are suspended from ceiling, use
trapeze type hanger suspended from rods.
Where rigid metal conduits and electrical metallic tubing are supported from Building
members, supports shall be installed as follows:
a.
Conduit Sizes
1).
2).
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
3/4" to 1-1/4" within 18" of each outlet inclusive and on either side of
couplings and fittings and at a spacing not to exceed 8 feet.
1-1/2" and larger within 3 feet of each junction or pullbox and terminal
cabinet and at a spacing not to exceed 8 feet.
When conduits are supported from trapezes, the supports shall be spaced not more
than 8 feet apart.
Conduit trapezes shall consist of suitable Unistrut or Kindorf fittings, or equal, in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendation.
Secure exposed conduit runs on concrete, plaster or other construction in place with cast
conduit clamps affixed with metallic expansion anchors or toggle bolts and cadmium
plated machine or lag screws.
All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel to and perpendicular to the building
structure.
Do not strap or fasten rigid conduit to mechanical equipment, or to equipment subject to
vibration or mounted on shock absorbing bases.
Conduits which are installed above dry type or suspended ceilings shall not be secured to
ceiling support wires. Support such conduit independent of ceiling suspension systems.
Support conduit to structure above suspended ceilings 8" minimum above ceiling to allow
removal of ceiling tile. Do not support from T-bars or T-bar hanger wires. Maintain two
inch clearance above recessed light fixtures.
Support conduits adjacent to walls with preformed channels.
Provide plated or galvanized hangers, rods, channels and metallic support and fastening
material.
Do not use perforated metal strap or wood as support material.
Conduit 1-inch and smaller, in metal and stud partitions, shall be tied to the furring
channels with 2# 14 gauge galvanized tie wire spaced not more than 5 feet apart. Conduits
1 inch and smaller for service to lighting fixtures (other than home runs) may be supported
in the same way.
Conduit clamps and hanger rods attached to concrete structures shall be secured by
machine bolts or rods screwed into anchors. Anchors not cast into the concrete shall be of
the expansion shield type, Phillips "Red Head," Hilti, or equal.
Provide independent support for conduits rising from floor for motor connections if over
18 inches above floor.
Do not support any conduit to motor, ductwork or mechanical equipment.
Conduit shall not be run closer than 12 inches to any hot water pipe, steam pipe, heater
flue or vent. Maintain minimum of 6" clearance between conduit and other piping.
Provide condulets as required. Conduit bends will not be permitted around the corners of
beams, walls or equipment. All condulet covers shall be accessible. Condulets 2 inches or
larger shall be Crouse-Hinds Type "LBD," Appleton "LBD," or equal.
Conduits in furred spaces shall be routed to clear access openings.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 9
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
18. Where steel conduits enter a concrete floor below a surface mounted panelboard, they shall
be encased in a concrete curb of sufficient height to match the height of the finished base
tile.
19. Holes for conduits through existing concrete walls, manhole, or floors shall be made by the
"core-drill" method. The size and location shall be approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
20. Upon completing the installation of any run of conduit, the runs shall be tested to see that
they are free from all obstructions and have a smooth interior. Each end of each conduit
run shall be plugged with "pennies" and bushings and left plugged until ready to pull
circuit wires.
D.
Cuts and Joints
1.
Cut conduit squarely and ream ends to remove burrs. Close open ends of conduits, unless
in a closed box or cabinet, with approved conduit caps or closures as soon as installed and
keep closed until ready to pull in conductors.
2. Ream the ends of all conduits, and clean conduits before pulling conductors.
3. Use pipe joint compound (pipe dope) and oil applied to the male threads only and tighten
joints securely. For underground or under slab conduits, apply a heavy coat of Pabco P &
B No. 2 paint after installation to surfaces within 6" on both sides of fittings and to areas
where wrenches or other tools have been applied. On exposed conduits, repair scratches
and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabar", or
equal.
4. Where conduit is underground, under slabs or grade, exposed to the weather, or in wet
locations, make joints liquid tight and gas tight.
5. Cut threads on rigid conduit to standard taper and to length such that bare metal exposed
by the threading operation will be completely covered by the couplings or fittings used. In
addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that joints will become secure and wrench tight
before conduit ends butt together in couplings and before conduit ends butt into the ends or
shoulders or other fittings. Securely tighten threaded connections.
6. For rigid steel conduit use conduit unions to connect two rigidly held conduits. Running
thread will not be accepted.
7. Right and left hand couplings shall not be used.
8. Secure rigid conduits to panels, pull boxes, wireways and enclosures with locknuts, inside
and out, and provide high impact plastic or insulated throat steel bushings at terminations
in pull boxes, wireways, signal cabinets, boxes and enclosures. For rigid steel conduit,
provide steel insulating bushings with plastic liner. For EMT provide insulated throat
connectors secured with locknut on interior of box or enclosure. For flex conduit, provide
insulated throat steel twist-in connectors secured with locknut on interior of the box or
enclosure, or steel twist-in connectors with plastic bushing, and locknut. At panelboards,
switchboards and gear specified with ground bus, terminate conduits with ground bushing
bonded to ground bus with code size conductor. Use approved couplings or unions;
running thread, threadless coupling, or split coupling connections are not permitted.
9. Use insulated bushings and locknuts on all conduits where entering pullboxes, junction
boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets and similar enclosures, and for all signal and telephone
conduit terminated in cabinets or backboards. For 1-inch or larger bushings, shall be with
grounding lugs, O.Z. Type BLG. or equal. Bushings shall be installed before any wire is
pulled.
10. Conduit connections to panel cabinets and pull boxes shall have grounding wedge lugs
between the bushing and the box or locknuts designed to bite into the metal.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 10
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
11. Where conduits or wireways cross expansion joint, provide approved expansion or
deflection fittings, or combinations of fittings that allow deflection in all directions. For
seismic joints provide liquidtight flex.
E.
Sleeve
1.
2.
3.
F.
Wherever conduits pass through concrete walls, suspended slabs or metal deck floors
furnish and install sleeves of ample size to permit installation of conduit. Sleeves shall be
installed prior to pouring of concrete and shall have ends flush with the wall or extend 2
inches above floor surfaces. Verify locations with the Owner’s Representative.
Finish around Sleeves: Rough edges shall be finished smooth. Space between conduit and
sleeves where conduit passes through exterior walls shall be sealed to permit movement of
conduit, but prevent entrance of water. Space between conduit and sleeves where conduits
pass through fire rated interior walls and slabs shall be sealed with approved materials to
provide a fire barrier conforming to the requirement of the Codes as listed in General
Requirements.
Sleeve shall be 1" to 2" bigger than conduit size.
Empty Conduit
1.
G.
3.4
For 1-1/2” and smaller conduits, provide nylon or polypropylene ropes, 1/8-inch O.D., in
all conduits more than 5 feet in length left empty for future use. Minimum of 5 feet of
rope shall be left at each end of the conduit.
2. For 2” and larger conduits, provide nylon or polypropylene ropes, 3/8-inch O.D., in all
conduits more than 5 feet in length left empty for future use. Minimum of 5 feet of rope
shall be left at each end of the conduit.
3. Tag all empty conduits at each accessible end with a permanent tag identifying the purpose
of the conduit and the location of the other end. In wet, corrosive outdoor or underground
locations, use brass, bronze, or copper 16 gauge tags or lead tags secured to conduit ends
with #16 or larger galvanized wire. Inscribe on the tags, with steel punch dies, clear and
complete identifying information.
4. Cap the open ends of conduits with approved manufactured conduit seals until ready to
pull in conductors.
5. All open ends of conduits for communications cabling shall be furnished with plastic
bushing.
Conduit crossing building expansion joints shall have expansion provisions with grounding
continuity; use special expansion fittings or other NEC approved method.
INSTALLATION - BOXES
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install outlet boxes at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings or specified
herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit
coordination requirements of other trades.
Locate switch outlet boxes on the latch side of doorways unless otherwise indicated.
Locate outlet boxes above hung ceilings having concealed suspension systems, adjacent to
openings for removable recessed lighting fixtures or ceiling access panel.
Do not install outlet boxes back-to-back, separate boxes by at least 6". In fire rated walls
separate boxes by at least 24” and wall stud.
Adjust position of outlet boxes in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines.
Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for boxes.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 11
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
B.
Provide fire-proofing pad add additional sheet rock as necessary to maintain original fire
rating of walls where boxes are installed on rated walls.
For boxes mounted in exterior walls, make sure that there is insulation behind outlet boxes
to prevent condensation in boxes.
For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and
mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust mounting height to agree with required
location for equipment served.
Provide separate pull boxes and J-Box for different voltage conductors. Also provide
separate boxes for general loads, communications, fire alarm, lighting, signal and
miscellaneous systems.
In concrete or drywall construction, set recessed boxes so that the front of the plaster ring
or front of the box for those without plaster rings is not more than 1/4” behind the final
finished surface. Set all recessed boxes in other types of construction so that the fronts are
flush with the finished surface. Where these settings are not achieved, provide a 24-gauge
or heavier galvanized steel liner flush with finished surface.
For outlets flush in exterior walls, use weatherproof joints and connections all around.
Outlets shall have cast covers and be fitted with gaskets.
Covers for flush outlets shall finish flush with plaster or other finished surface.
Label the cover of each accessible junction box with panel and circuit designation and
function per Section 26 05 53.
Paint the outside and inside of all boxes containing fire alarm devices with red paint.
Provide acoustic pad or membrane around all outlet boxes and switches located in party
walls of offices, meeting rooms and all quiet areas.
Install boxes in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, as shown on drawings
and as specified herein.
Locate electrical boxes as shown on Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and Code compliance.
Install junction or pullboxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than
270 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for
the cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not shown on the Drawings.
Install raised covers (plaster rings) on all outlet boxes in stud walls or in furred, suspended
or exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.
Use extension rings with blank covers for making exposed conduit connections to flush
wall or ceiling boxes.
Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.
Conduits entering boxes shall be thru tight-fitting bored or punched holes, or threaded
hubs, and shall be secured firmly.
For boxes not specified or indicated, use boxes and mounting height as required by
equipment and recommended by equipment manufacturer.
J-Boxes shall not be installed on mechanical or vibrational equipment unless used for
power or control of the same equipment. No J-Box shall be installed on air ducts or pipes.
Install galvanized steel coverplates on boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings
and on surface mounted outlets.
Provide cast metal boxes with gasketed cast metal cover plates where boxes are exposed in
damp or wet locations.
Use conduit outlet bodies to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit
direction only. Do not make splices in conduit outlet bodies.
Provide precast concrete boxes in exterior planting areas, walkways, roads etc. Provide 6”
deep gravel base under each box.
Supports:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 12
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Provide boxes installed in metal stud walls with brackets designed for attaching directly to
the studs or mount boxes on specified box supports.
Mount boxes, installed in suspended ceilings of gypsum board or lath and plaster
construction, to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.
Support boxes independently of conduit system.
Support boxes, installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels,
directly from the structure above wherever pendant mounted lighting fixtures are to be
installed from the box.
Support boxes, mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings, directly from the
structure above.
APPLICATION
A.
Rigid steel conduit (RGS or IMC) shall be used for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
EMT conduit shall be used for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Feeder for 208 volt and higher.
EMT conduit shall be used for all sizes up to 1-1/2 inches in dry locations as in stud
partitions and furred ceiling space.
EMT conduit may be used up to 4-inches for Telecommunication and Voice/Data System.
EMT conduit may be used up to 1-1/2 inches for Fire Alarm System wiring where conduit
is concealed and where it is not main run and riser.
EMT conduit shall not be used for underground, exterior, where it is prohibited and where
rigid steel conduit is required.
Flexible steel conduit shall be used in dry locations where indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Where required by Code.
Where exposed to weather.
Where in slabs and in concrete.
Where exposed to physical damage
In electrical, mechanical, or any machine room.
Where exposed and below 7'-6" of above finished floor.
In corrosive area.
In damp and wet locations.
In utility areas & loading dock.
Fire alarm main runs and risers.
Where required by Code.
For connection to recessed light fixture from junction box or pull box, maximum of 6'.
Where structural condition prevents the use of other type of conduit and for a maximum
length of 24".
For final connection to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment. Lengths shall be
limited to a minimum of 24" and maximum of 36".
Minimum length of flexible steel conduit shall be 24" and maximum of 72" unless
otherwise noted.
Liquidtight Flexible conduit shall be installed in lieu of the flexible steel, as follows:
1.
2.
Where required by Code.
In plenum area.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 13
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.6
In damp and/or wet location.
Where exposed to weather.
Between the seismic joints.
For connections to electric water heaters
Any connections made below sinks.
Provide polyvinyl covers listed for the application of area of use.
Minimum length of flexible liquidtight conduit shall be 24" and maximum 72" unless
otherwise noted.
SEISMIC BRACING
A.
Provide seismic bracing for conduits three 3/4", or two 1", and/or one 1-1/2" and larger or multi
size combination, wherever conduit is suspended more than 10" to the bottom of the conduit
from its anchoring point on the structure. All such bracing as described herein or below shall be
run from the raceway to the structure, and anchored to the latter in an approved manner.
B.
Provide diagonal bracing every 16' to the structure from hangers and changes in direction.
C.
Seismic bracing as described above shall be provided immediately upon completion of each
conduit run, to prevent obstruction of conduits by other utilities or construction work.
3.7
SEAL
A.
Conduits terminating where termination is subject to moisture or where conduit penetrates
exterior wall shall be sealed.
B.
Seal all conduits from exterior outlets at first interior junction to prevent moisture from entering
the building through the conduit. Slope exterior conduits away from the building.
C.
Seal all fire rated wall or ceiling penetrations. Sealant material and method shall be UL listed.
D.
Provide conduit seal for all conduits that passes through the following areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
As indicated on the Drawings.
Classified (hazardous) area.
Conduits serving sump pump and sewage ejector pits.
Refrigerated area.
Temperature controlled rooms such as cold room or warm room.
BENDS
A.
Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, bends in conduit 2 inches or larger for
underground conduit shall have a radius or curvature of the inner edge, equal to not less than 10
times the internal diameter of the conduit. Any deviations from this radius shall be approved
by the Owner’s Representative.
B.
Conduit connections to pull boxes shall be made with a long radius. Bends for 600-volt cable
shall have a radius of not less than five (5) times the diameter of the cable. Shielded cables
rated above 600 volts shall have a bending radius of not less than 12 times the cable overall
diameter. Nesting of conduits shall be made when two or more conduits are run in parallel.
C.
Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. For the serving utilities, make
large radius bends to meet their requirements.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 14
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
D.
For bends and offsets in conduit 1 inch and larger, use larger radius factory fittings or a
hydraulic bender. Replace flattened, deformed or kinked conduit.
E.
Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring mandrel as
required to assure full inside diameter at all bends.
3.9
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260533- 15
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems
June 30, 2010
SECTION 260548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation
required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.
Vibration Isolation
B.
Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work
and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a
complete installation.
C.
Description of work: Provide vibration isolation for electrical equipment to prevent the
transmission of vibration forces and structure transmitted sound to the building structure as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C.
Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
1.3
Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
Component Response Modification Factor: 3.5; for distributed systems (bus ducts,
conduits and cable tray).
Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5; for equipment.
Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.246.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.073.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
b.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260548- 1
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
3.
B.
Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined
loads.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and
anchorage devices.
Field-fabricated supports.
Seismic-Restraint Details:
a.
b.
c.
1.4
Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate
association with vibration isolation devices.]
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the
basis for approval (tests or calculations).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new
B.
Unless prior written approval of the Owner’s Representative is obtained, all materials and
systems specified in this Section shall be purchased from a single vibration isolation materials
manufacturer, who has supplied vibration isolation system equipment for at least 5 years, to
assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials used.
C.
The completed installation must control vibration and noise to within the specified limits.
Systems, equipment, or parts that vibrate or generate vibration unduly or that generate or emit
undue noise while in operation shall: (1) be adjusted, repaired, or replaced as appropriate to
obtain acceptable levels of vibration or noise, or (2) be supported on or fitted with suppression
or absorption devices or means that effectively prevent the transmission of vibration or noise
beyond the offending item. Undue noise and vibration is defined as that which exceeds the
manufacturer's specifications or the limits established in these specification.
D.
Replace, at no extra cost to the owner, isolators that do not produce the required deflection, are
incorrectly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which do not produce the
required isolation as approved.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260548- 2
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
E.
After completion of vibration isolation installation, provide field inspection by qualified
manufacturer's representative to ensure that all vibration isolators are installed in accordance
with manufacturer's printed recommendations and provide a written report.
F.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
G.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismicrestraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
H.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturer
1.
All vibration isolation mounts shall be supplied by one of the following manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
B.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Mason Industries Inc.
Kinetics
Vibration Mountings & Controls Inc.
Provide vibration isolators with either known un-deflected heights or other markings so
that, after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified,
thus determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct
degree of vibration isolation is being provided according to the design.
Provide isolators that operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve.
Furnish load versus deflection curves from the manufacturer that are linear, over a
deflection range 50% above the design deflection.
Where specific type of vibration isolation hardware equipment is not shown or specified,
furnish isolators recommended by the isolation manufacturer compatible with equipment
arrangements shown.
All neoprene mountings shall have a shore hardness of 40-65 after minimum aging of 30
days, or corresponding open-aging.
Vibration Isolators
1.
Neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.3". All metal surfaces
shall be neoprene covered and have friction pads both top and bottom. Bolt holes shall be
provided on the bottom and a tapped hole and cap screw on top. Steel rails shall be used
above the mountings under equipment such as small vent sets to compensate for the
overhang. Mountings shall be type ND as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260548- 3
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
2.
D.
Mount Type FS (Spring Mounting): Laterally stable spring isolators (single or multiple
steel springs) seismic restraint housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical pads
between the base-plate and the support. Spring diameter shall be no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at design load. Springs shall be so designed that the ratio
of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately 1. Provide all mountings with
leveling bolts, rigidly bolted to the equipment. Provide height saving mounting brackets
where applicable, height adjustment bolts. Isolators shall be Mason Type “SLR” or
equal.
Seismic-Restraint Devices
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and
application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least 1.2 times the maximum seismic forces to which they
will be subjected.
Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of
slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end
and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with
corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type
and size of attachment devices.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of equipment installation to verify
conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with
installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
PREPARATION
A.
Housekeeping pads shall be provided for all floor mounted electrical equipment. Unless
otherwise indicated, pads shall be 4” high with #4 reinforcing rods 12”on center each direction,
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260548- 4
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
1-1/2” above bottom of pad. For thicker pads provide #4 rods both top and bottom 2” below and
above.
B.
Foundation drawings, details, templates, pipe sleeves, vibration isolators, foundation bolts and
anchored plates shall be provided by the Contractor.
C.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all base and foundation dimensions and bolt
locations.
D.
All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written
instructions and all certified submittal data.
E.
Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, in
stresses or misalignment.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
All electrical conduits 2 1/2" (64mm) in diameter and larger, cable trays and ladder trays shall
be restrained with cable restraints or solid brace to meet design loading.
B.
Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or both ends if the electrical run is less than the
specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each electrical services turn and at
each end of the electric run.
C.
Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per electric run.
Transverse restraints for one electric section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a duct
for an electric section connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4' of the
intersection of the electric run and if the restraints are sized for the larger electric run.
D.
Wall mounted panels, transformers and motor starters shall be mounted with bushings. Floor
mounted panels shall be mounted on bushings.
E.
Connection to the structure must be made with a non-friction connection.
F.
Exclusions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
All conduit less than 2 1/2" (64mm) diameter suspended by individual hanger rods.
All conduits suspended by clevis hangers where the distance from the top of the pipe to
the suspension point is 12" or less.
All trapezed conduits, bus ducts and cable trays where the distance from the suspension
point to the trapeze member is 12" or less.
If any suspension location in the run exceeds the above, the entire run must be braced.
G.
Electrical connections to vibration isolation equipment shall be flexible, having a fully-looped
flex (or grossly slack shallow U) installed on isolated equipment with static deflection over
0.1". Flexible conduit to be at least 3 feet or 20 diameters long, whichever is the longer.
H.
All floor supported transformers located within the building shall be mounted on vibration
isolation Type ND neoprene mounts.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260548- 5
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
I.
No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades
the noise and vibration control system herein specified.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260548- 6
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation
required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.2
Electrical equipment nameplates
Panelboard directories
Wire and cable identification
Junction box identification
Warning and caution signs
Engraved device coverplates
Related work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and
properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260500: Electrical Requirements, the
following items:
1.
2.
Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein.
Submit a nameplate schedule to the Owner’s Representative for review before the
nameplates are installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Conduit and wire markers: Manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Brady or equal.
B.
Inscription Tape: Manufactured by Kroy, Merlin or equal.
2.2
NAMEPLATES
A.
Type NP: Engraved, plastic lamacoid labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates.
1.
2.
Engrave lamacoid tags 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 4 inches in length,
1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
Engraved nameplates shall be punched for mechanical fasteners.
B.
The lettering shall be Condensed Gothic with space between the lines equal to the width of the
letters.
C.
Color and letter height as specified in Part 3: Execution.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260553- 1
Identification for Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
2.3
PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES
A.
Directories: A 6 inch x 8 inch minimum size circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic
covering shall be provided inside the inner panel door.
B.
Circuit numbering: Starting at the top, odd numbered circuits in sequence down the left hand
side and even numbered circuits down the right hand side.
2.4
WIRE AND TERMINAL MARKERS
A.
2.5
Provide self-adhering, pre-printed, machine printable or write-on, self-laminating vinyl wrap
around strips. Blank markers shall be inscribed using the printer or pen recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
CONDUCTOR PHASE MARKERS
A.
2.6
Colored vinyl plastic electrical tape, 3/4" wide, for identification of phase conductors. Scotch
35 Brand Tape, Manville or equal.
ENGRAVED DEVICE COVERPLATES
A.
Coverplate material shall be as specified in Section 262726: Wiring Devices.
B.
Engraving:
1.
2.
2.7
1/8” high letters
Paint filled letters – Black for normal power.
INSCRIPTION TAPE LABELING
A.
Coverplate material shall be as specified in Section 262726: Wiring Devices.
B.
Provide self-adhesive labeling tape:
1.
2.
1/8” high letters
Clear tape with Black lettering for normal power.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of identification device installation to verify
conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with
installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
NAMEPLATES
A.
B.
Nameplates for normal power system distribution equipment and devices shall be black w/white
lettering.
Nameplates for emergency power system distribution equipment and devices shall be red
w/white lettering.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
260553- 2
Identification for Electrical Systems
Brooklyn College
June 30, 2010
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
C.
Nameplates for signal systems equipment and devices shall be blue /white lettering.
D.
Nameplates for Fire Alarm systems equipment and devices shall be red w/white lettering.
E.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using machine screws.
F.
The lettering on the nameplate shall indicate the name of equipment, the specific unit number,
voltage, phases, which panel, switchboard or motor control center the equipment is served from,
or to where it provided power to, and any other reference data pertinent to the operation.
Names and numbers shall coincide with those listed on the drawings. Sample: Panel 3A;
277/480 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, fed from US-1.
G.
Provide type 'Nameplate' color coded nameplates that present, as applicable, the following
information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Equipment or device designation
Amperage, KVA or horsepower rating, where applicable
Voltage or signal system name
Source of power or control
Typical examples:
a.
b.
H.
Minimum letter height shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Transformers: “TB/S; 45kVA fed from USB”.
Disconnects: “AH-1; 25HP; fed from MCCB”
For panelboards and switchboards. 1/2-inch letters to identify equipment designation.
Use 1/4-inch letters to identify the remaining items.
For individual circuit breakers, disconnect switches and motor starters in switchboards
use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8- inch letters to identify
the remaining items.
For individual mounted circuit breakers, disconnect switches, enclosed switches and
motor starters use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8-inch letters
to identify the remaining items.
For equipment cabinets, terminal cabinets, control panels and other cabinet enclosed
apparatus use 1/4-inch letters to identify equipment designation.
PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES
A.
Provide typewritten directories arranged in numerical order denoting loads served by room
number or area for each circuit.
B.
Fill out branch circuit directory indicating circuit number and area served, rooms, group of
rooms, lighting, convenience outlets, motors, etc. Card index shall be neatly typed.
C.
Mount panelboard directories in a metal frame under clear plastic cover inside every
panelboard.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260553- 3
Identification for Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
3.4
WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboards, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes
and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting
circuits and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings
for control wiring.
B.
Provide colored phase markers for conductors as noted in Section 260519. Apply colored,
pressure sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 3 inches from terminal
points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no
tension to prevent possible unwinding. Do not cover cable identification markings by taping.
3.5
JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.6
The cover of junction, pull, and connection boxes for lighting, power and signal systems,
located above suspended ceilings and below ceilings in non-public areas, shall be clearly
marked with a permanent ink felt pen. Identify the circuit(s) (panel designation and circuit
numbers) contained in each box, unless otherwise noted or specified.
WARNING, CAUTION AND INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Provide warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or
where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of
the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic lamacoid instruction signs with legend
where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install
butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.
B.
Elevator Machine Rooms(s): Provide warning sign for each elevator controller disconnect to
read "Warning - Part of the Control Panel is not De-energized by this Switch."
C.
Elevator car light and fan switch: Provide signage indicating elevator number serving and
function of each switch.
D.
Warning signs to be included on doors or immediately above doors of all electrical equipment
rooms, vaults or closets containing equipment energized above 150 volts to ground. The sign
shall state "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE", with "DANGER" in 1-1/2" letters and "HIGH
VOLTAGE" in 1 inch letters.
3.7
ENGRAVED OR LABELED DEVICE COVERPLATE
A.
Application:
1.
Provide engraved coverplates for devices as outlined below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Receptacles
Outlets in surface raceways.
Multi-ganged (four or more) switch arrangement.
Special purpose switches, i.e. projection screens, shades, exhaust fans, etc.
Each receptacle outlet shall be engraved with 3/16” black filled letters, circuit number and panel
name; Example
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260553- 4
Identification for Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
1.
3.8
LP-1A/23
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Conduit and junction boxes:
1.
2.
Color code or label all junction boxes and exposed conduit at 10 ft. intervals. Coding
shall be painted or labels of the pre-manufactured type permanently mounted with metal
or plastic band.
Provide a color identification scheme under heavy plastic cover hanging in the electrical
rooms; identification shall be:
a.
b.
Normal - Black
Fire Alarm - Red
B.
All conduit for signal system shall be color coded with 6" wide spray paint for every 10' of
length as follows:
C.
All outlet boxes (inside and outside) for signal system shall be color coded.
3.9
INSTALLATION
A.
Nameplates shall be secured with either #4 Phillips, round head corrosion resistant steel
self-tapping screws or with pop rivets, one on each end.
B.
Signs shall be permanently mounted with cadmium plated, steel screws.
C.
Receptacles shall have circuit number and panelboards identification label permanently attached
to face of respective cover plate.
D.
Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
Contractor shall provide OSHA warning signs where required by National Electrical
Code and OSHA.
Low and medium voltage equipment enclosures, vaults, doors and fences shall be
provided with "DANGER KEEP OUT" warning signs, showing proper voltage.
Non-load-break disconnects and cutouts shall have "CAUTION" warning sign to read
"DO NOT OPEN UNDER LOAD".
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
260553- 5
Identification for Electrical Systems
June 30, 2010
SECTION 262200
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This section includes labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation
required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1. Dry type ventilated transformers.
Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work
and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a
complete installation.
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except
as otherwise shown or specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ANSI C57
ANSI/NEMA ST 1
NEMA ST 20
ANSI/NEMA TP-1
Transformers
a.
5.
1.3
Pertaining to Power/Distribution Transformer.
Specialty Transformers
Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution
For Reference only. US DOE does not consider NEMA TP-1 efficiency levels to
reflect low life cycle cost. Transformers in this specification are substantially more
efficient than NEMA TP-1 levels, meeting US Department of Energy proposed
Candidate Standard Level (CSL) 3 efficiency.
ANSI/NEMA TP-2
Standard Test Method for Measuring Energy Consumption of
Distribution Transformers
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260500, the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical and
electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
Insulation system impregnate data sheet as published by supplier.
Basic Performance characteristics including insulation class, temperature rise, core and
coil materials, impedances & audible noise level, unit weight
Inrush Current (typical 3 cycle recovery)
a.
b.
Short Circuit Current data: Primary (Sym. O/P S/C) & Secondary (L-N/G S/C)
Efficiency Data
1).
2).
3).
4).
No load and full load losses per NEMA ST20
Linear load Efficiency data @ 1/6 load
Linear load efficiency data @ 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 & full load
Linear Load Efficiency @ 35% loading tested per NEMA TP-2.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 1
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
5).
5.
6.
7.
1.4
Efficiency under K7 load profile at 15%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% of nameplate
rating.
c. Copy of Linear & Nonlinear load test report for a representative 75kVA transformer
Description of manufacturer’s factory nonlinear load test program.
I
a. n light of the significant degradation of transformer performance when feeding
nonlinear load compared to linear load, it is mandatory that the manufacturer test the
transformers under nonlinear load representative of real world load mix.
Transformers that have not been subject to testing under nonlinear load will not be
considered for this project due to the uncertainty related to their real world
performance.
b. Given the lack of a standard for testing transformers under nonlinear load, the
manufacturer must have a nonlinear Load Test Program operating in the production
environment that is audited and documented per quality standard ISO 9001.
c. The nonlinear load bank shall consist of a phase-neutral loading with a k7 profile,
representative of a mix of typical commercial equipment.
d. Meters and CTs shall both be revenue class accurate. CTs shall be operated within
their approved accuracy loading range. Dual meters shall gather simultaneous
primary and secondary energy and harmonic data. Meter and CT details including
model, accuracy, serial numbers and calibration information.
e. Efficiency: Measurements shall be taken at multiple load levels and plotted to show
compliance with specification and correlation to the designed efficiency curve.
f.
Efficiency shall be determined purely by measurements using method and
instrumentation per NEMA TP-2 Standard. Other methods are not acceptable.
g. Harmonic data including current and Voltage THD at the different load levels shall
be included with the test report.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
EMF test result at full rated current
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new.
1.
1.5
Contractor shall pay for the services of a qualified testing laboratory to perform the
specified tests. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative at least five (5)
working days in advance of performance of work requiring testing. The Contractor shall
provide all material required for testing
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Protect from potential damage from weather and construction operations. Store so condensation
will not form on or in the transformer housing and if necessary, apply temporary heat where
required to obtain suitable service conditions.
B.
Handle transformer using proper equipment for lifting and handling, use when necessary lifting
eye and/or brackets provided for that purpose.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 2
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Transformer shall carry a 25-year pro-rated warranty, which shall be standard for the product
line.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Powersmiths
Culter Hammer
Square D
GENERAL
A.
Copper-wound, 3-phase, common core, ventilated, dry-type, isolation transformer built to
NEMA ST20 and relevant NEMA, UL and IEEE standards; shall be U.L. and CSA Listed and
bear the label.
B.
All terminals, including those for changing taps, must be readily accessible by removing a front
cover plate. Windings shall be continuous with terminations brazed or welded.
C.
Provide ground bar kit and neutral to ground bond jumper terminated at ground bar. Provide
mechanical lugs mounted on the ground bar for input ground bond, output ground bond and
external ground.
2.3
BASIC REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Type: ANN, convection air cooled
B.
Insulation Class: 220°C system
C.
Temperature rise: 130°C
D.
Taps: 2 x ± 2.5% (2FCAN, 2FCBN)
E.
Core construction: high grade non-aging, fully processed silicon steel laminations or better
F.
Coil conductors: continuous copper windings, with terminations brazed or welded up to 75kVA
and bolted 112.5 kVA and up.
G.
Inrush current: 10 times full load rating (max.)
H.
Excitation current: 5% of full load current rating (max.)
I.
Enclosure: Ventilated NEMA 3R enclosure designed to prevent hand or rod contact with live
parts.
J.
Enclosure Finish: ANSI 61 Grey suitable for UL50.
K.
Anti-vibration pads shall be used between the core and the enclosure
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 3
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
L.
Transformer shall be UL listed.
M.
Ground core & coil assembly to enclosure with a flexible copper grounding strap or equivalent.
N.
Mounting:
1.
2.
Ventilated units up to 750 lbs.: Suitable for wall, floor or ceiling mounting (drip plate
required).
Ventilated units over 750 lbs.: Suitable for floor mounting only.
O.
EMF level, not to be higher than 10mG top, 10mG side and 10mG at one meter.
P.
Enclosures shall be fabricated of heavy gage sheet steel construction. Enclosure shall have
suitable ventilating openings. Enclosure shall be provided with lifting lugs and jacking plates
as required.
Q.
Transformers shall be furnished complete with mounting channels and mounting bolts. Metal
parts, excepting cores and core mounting frames shall be cleaned, rust-proofed and be given a
heavy coating of an inert primer.
R.
All transformers shall have a basic impulse insulation level of 10 KV. The following tests shall
be done at the factory:
1.
2.
3.
S.
Applied voltage test to each winding and from each winding to ground.
Induced voltage test - two times normal voltage.
Ratio, polarity and sound level: Sound level tests shall be performed in test rooms with an
ambient sound level not exceeding 24 dBs.
Sound levels shall meet NEMA ST-20 and not exceed the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
15-50 KVA
51-150 KVA 151 to 300 KVA 301 to 500 KVA -
45 dB
50 dB
55 dB
60 dB
T.
Transformers shall have a minimum overload capacity per ANSI Standard. Certified
temperature test of electrical duplicate units shall be supplied upon request.
U.
Terminal compartments for both primary and secondary lines shall be located in the bottom of
the transformer to ensure termination of cable leads in ambient temperature levels and to
provide for side or bottom entrance of conduit.
2.4
POWERSMITHS E-SAVER ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
A.
Electrostatic Shield: Each winding is independently single shielded with a full-width copper
electrostatic shield.
B.
200% rated neutral, UL Listed & Labeled K-Rating: K-7 or higher.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 4
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
C.
Insulation System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shall be NOMEX-based with an Epoxy Co-polymer impregnant for lowest environmental
impact, long term reliability and long life expectancy
Class: 220 degrees C
Impregnant Properties for low emissions during manufacturing, highest reliability and life
expectancy.
Epoxy co-polymer
VOC: less than 1.65 lbs/gal (low emissions during manufacturing)
D.
Maximum No Load Losses shall not exceed: 120W, 75kVA.
E.
Efficiency at 15% loading shall meet or exceed: 75kVA: 98.2%.
F.
DOE 10 CFR Part 430 CSL 3 Efficiency requirements tested per NEMA TP-2: 75kVA: 98.6%.
G.
Efficiency under k-7 nonlinear load at 50% of nameplate rating: 75kVA: 98.4%
H.
Impedance:
I.
Enclosure type: NEMA 2, drip-proof.
J.
Maximum Footprint for 130 degree C rise model in a NEMA 1 enclosure: 33” Wide x 22”
Deep x 40” High for 75kVA.
Between 3.5% and 5.8% unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of transformer installation to verify
conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with
installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
PREPARATION
A.
Insure all conduit stub-ups for bottom entry into transformer are in place and located as
required per shop drawings.
B.
Where noted on the drawings provide a 4” high concrete housekeeping pad beneath equipment.
Coordinate actual sizes of equipment base with shop drawings and extend pad 3” in all
directions beyond overall dimension of base. Provide reinforcing bars as required structurally
within pad to insure proper support of equipment.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install transformer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Transformers shall be installed to provide adequate air circulation for the removal of the heat
they produce, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
C.
Transformers not specifically designed for wall mounting, shall be spaced a minimum of 6"
from adjacent walls, and equipment.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 5
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
D.
Transformers shall be anchored and braced to withstand seismic forces.
E.
Loosen and/or remove all shipping bolts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
All floor supported transformers located within the building shall be mounted on vibration
isolation Type ND neoprene mounts to suppress the transformer noise from the building
structure. Select and arrange the mounts in accordance with the weight and mounting of the
transformers. These mounts are in addition to any internal vibration pads. Vibration isolating
mounts shall be seismically rated for the application.
G.
All conduits shall be isolated form the transformer enclosures by the use of neoprene grommets
at conduit entrances to enclosure and the use of a grounding bushing. Flexible jumpers shall be
installed for grounding continuity from enclosure to conduits or bus ducts.
3.4
TERMINATIONS
A.
Provide all transformers with lugs for both primary and secondary conductor sizes for
conductors shown on Drawing. Connect lug to termination point with appropriate size bolt, nut
flat and Belleville washers.
B.
Provide high-pressure compression lugs, for primary and secondary phase and neutral
terminations for transformers 45 KVA and larger. Utilize only the tool and dies designed for
uses in installing the lugs provided.
C.
Use flexible conduit indoors in dry locations or liquidtight flexible conduit in damp/wet
locations, 24” minimum in length, for primary and secondary connections to transformer case.
Make connections to side panels of enclosure, except for floor mounted transformers fed from
directly below enclosure.
D.
Where feeders come from the floor below, they shall terminate at the end of transformer
enclosure with a metal grounding bushing with neoprene throat insert. Ground the bushing to
the transformer enclosure.
3.5
GROUNDING
A.
Provide transformer with a dual rated four-barrel solderless grounding lug with a 5/8" -11
threaded hole. Drill transformer enclosure with 11/16" bit and attach lug to enclosure utilizing
a torque bolt and Dragon Tooth transition washer. Connect the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Primary feeder ground.
Secondary feeder ground.
Grounding electrode.
Main bond jumper to neutral (when present).
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.7
Provide transformer nameplate as described in Section 260553.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing shall be performed under provisions of Section 260126.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 6
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
3.8
ADJUSTING
A.
The Contractor shall set the taps on all transformers, which are a part of this contract as
necessary to provide satisfactory operating voltages with all present loads energized, including
the new loads and any existing loads. A check shall be made in the presence of the Owner’s
Representative at a panel fed from each transformer that is the farthest from the transformer.
B.
The Contractor shall provide all instruments and accessories required to perform the checks.
Voltmeters shall be accurate with 3/4 or 1% and shall have scales permitting the voltage
readings to be made on the upper half of the scale. Calibration of the meters shall be
satisfactory to the owner.
C.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
CLEANING
A.
Prior to energizing of transformer the contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of enclosure
of all construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using manufacturer's approved methods and
materials.
B.
Upon completion of project prior to final acceptance the contractor shall thoroughly clean both
the interior and exterior of transformer per manufacturers recommended materials and methods.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
C.
Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes, or other finish damage suffered during installation.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262200- 7
Low Voltage Distribution Transformer
June 30, 2010
SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
1.2
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Distribution & Power Panelboards.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3
A.
Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to the UBC.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
1.4
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards.
Submit structural calculations for equipment anchorage.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Complete bill of material listing all components.
Warranty.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 1
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
E.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
F.
FS W-C-375 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service
G.
FS W-P-115 Power Distribution Panel
H.
NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
I.
NEMA PB 1 Panelboards
J.
NEMA PB 1.1
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
262416- 2
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
K.
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7
A.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
COORDINATION
1.8
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
WARRANTY
1.9
A.
Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by 1-year parts and labor
warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty shall
begin upon acceptance by the Owner’s Representative.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Hazardous Areas, Loading Dock: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 3
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
Finishes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and
pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Door in door construction
Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover.
C.
Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom to suit incoming feeder.
D.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
E.
Conductor Connectors: Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains, neutral,
ground and branch circuit breaker wiring shall be suitable for the type of conductor specified.
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
G.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals; coordinate with short circuit study results.
DISTRIBUTION & POWER PANELBOARDS
2.2
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
1.
2.
3.
B.
Enclosures
1.
2.
C.
Cutler Hammer
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Panel box shall be galvanized code gauge sheet steel with removable end walls.
Enclosures shall be surface mounted.
Fronts
1.
2.
Provide a four piece front to cover wiring gutter and wiring access areas.
Hinged door fronts shall be provided with door-in-door.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 4
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
3.
D.
Interiors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
An inner door shall cover the circuit protective devices and shall be able to be locked.
Panelboard interior shall be designed and assembled such that circuit protective devices
shall be solidly connected to the distribution panel vertical bus. The bus bars shall be
attached to the feeder device by bolts and to the vertical bus by bolts and anti-turn
methods.
Circuit breaker connectors shall be designed so that circuit breakers may be removed
without disturbing adjacent devices.
Panelboards shall have three vertically aligned bus bars.
Bus bars shall be copper. The bus bars shall have sufficient cross sectional area to meet
UL 67 temperature rise requirements through actual tests. The bus bars shall be standard
density rated for 1000 amperes per square inch copper.
Bus bars shall be phase-sequenced and rigidly supported by high impact resistant,
insulated bus supporting assemblies to prevent vibration or short circuit mechanical
damage.
Neutral bus shall be fully rated or 200 percent rated where indicated on the drawings.
All solderless terminations shall be suitable for copper UL listed wire or cable and shall
be tested and listed in conjunction with appropriate UL standards. Terminations shall be
rated for use with conductor ampacity as assigned in the NEC 75 degree C table.
Ground wire terminations shall be provided as an optional kit for installation by
panelboard installer without voiding UL label.
Main and Branch Devices
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Main circuit breakers shall be RMS sensing circuit breaker.
Single pole branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick break, and trip indicating,
molded-case circuit breaker and shall not exceed 10% of the total number of poles.
Circuit breaker case shall have ON/OFF and International I/O position indicators.
Breaker faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC
ratings.
Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed and shall be date coded on breaker case.
Breakers shall be UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load
markings. Circuit breakers shall be able to mount in any operating position.
All circuit protective devices shall have a short circuit interrupting capacity as shown on
the plans.
Main breakers and lugs shall be convertible by installer for top or bottom incoming feed.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
2.3
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cutler Hammer.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 5
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
C.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
D.
Ratings
Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be rated as indicated in drawings.
Maximum current ratings for mains, sub-feeds and branches, respectively, shall be as
specified in drawings.
Enclosure
1.
2.
E.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Bus bars
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G.
Boxes shall be a nominal 20 inches wide and 6 inches deep with wire bending space per
National Electric Code.
Fronts shall be reinforced steel with concealed hinges and concealed trim adjusting
screws.
Hinged door fronts shall be provided with door-in-door construction.
All door locks shall be corrosion proof with retractable latches and shall be keyed for a
single key.
Interiors shall permit top or bottom incoming cables.
The bus bars shall be phase sequenced, fully insulated and supported by high impact
Noryl (or equal) interior base assemblies.
Bus bars shall be fabricated using copper with minimum bus size of 225Amps.
a.
Copper bus bars shall have sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL 67
temperature rise requirements through actual tests to provide a current density of
1000A per square inch.
Bus bars shall be mechanically supported by zinc finished galvanneal steel frames to
prevent vibration and damage from short circuits.
Terminations shall be UL tested and listed and suitable for UL copper wire.
Provide [1] continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall have sequentially phased
branch circuit connectors for bolt-on branch circuit breakers.
Split solid neutral bus shall be plated and located in main compartment for all incoming
neutral cables to be same length.
Two hundred percent (200%) rated neutral shall be provided on 120/208V panels where
indicated on schedules or contract drawings.
Lugs shall be rated for 75 degree C terminations.
Main lugs for copper conductors shall be bolted compression lugs.
Lug bodies shall bolt in place, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Circuit Breakers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The main circuit breaker shall be RMS sensing type circuit breaker.
Molded case circuit breakers shall be bolt-on devices.
All circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
[2] [3] pole breakers shall have internal common trip crossbars for simultaneous tripping
of each pole.
Circuit breakers shall not be restricted to any mounting location due to physical size.
Main and sub-feed circuit breakers may be vertically or horizontally mounted.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 6
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Branch breaker panelboard connections shall be copper to copper.
All panelboard terminations shall be rated as indicated in drawings.
All breakers shall have an over center mechanism and be quick make and quick break.
All breakers shall have handle trip indication and a trip indicator in window of circuit
breaker housing.
Breaker handle and faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity.
Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have standard ON/OFF markings.
Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits
HACR Type circuit breaker for use with motor, heating, air-conditioning and
refrigeration equipment, with the UL Mark.
Where indicated in schedules provide the following type CB:
a.
b.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through
ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A groundfault protection (6-mA trip).
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
2.4
A.
Surge Protection Device Description, refer to Section 264313.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
3.2
A.
Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Panelboard cabinets shall be rigidly supported in place independent of the conduits with two
rows of Unistrut. Set panels plumb and symmetrical with building lines in conformance with
PB1.1. Furnish and install all construction channel bolts, angles, etc., required to mount the
equipment furnished under this Section.
C.
Mounting height shall be 6’-0” to top of panelboard or 6’-6” to the centerline of highest
mounted breaker handle.
D.
Provide mounting hardware brackets, busbar drillings and filler pieces for all unused spaces.
E.
"Train" interior wiring; bundle and clamp, using specified plastic wire wraps specified under
Section 260519.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 7
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
F.
Replace panel pieces, doors, or trim exhibiting dents, bends, warps or poor fit that may impede
ready access, security or integrity.
G.
Conduits terminating in concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at panelboards shall have
ground bushings and bonding jumpers installed interconnecting all such conduits and the
panelboard.
H.
Check and tighten all bolts and connections with a torque wrench using manufacturer's
recommended values.
I.
Provide two 1” and two 3/4" spare conduits stubbed-out of flush mounted panelboards to the
nearest accessible ceiling space or other accessible location and cap for future use.
J.
Visually inspect panelboard for rust and corrosion. If signs of rust and corrosion are present,
restore or replace panelboard to new condition.
K.
In damp and wet locations mount panelboards with a minimum one inch of air space between
cabinet and the wall or other supports.
L.
All surfaces of surface mounting cabinets and fronts shall be given one coat of metal primer and
a finish coat of baked on gray enamel.
M.
Panelboards located in mechanical areas shall have weatherproof gaskets on trims and doors.
N.
Provide close up plugs in all unused openings in the cabinet.
O.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
P.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
IDENTIFICATION
3.3
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a
computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
262416- 8
Panel Boards
Brooklyn College
June 30, 2010
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
B.
1.
C.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
c.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment:
1)
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
E.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
3.5
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
PROTECTION
3.6
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262416- 9
Panel Boards
June 30, 2010
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Wall-box motion sensors.
Isolated-ground receptacles.
Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
Cord and plug sets.
Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00, the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical
and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed
application.
Provide color finishes for Owner’s Representative to select from.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Submit one sample of each type of device and cover plate.
Where engraved device coverplates are noted on the drawings or in the specifications,
conform to the requirements of Section 26 05 53.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 1
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
NEMA WD 1 General Purpose Wiring Devices
E.
NEMA WD 2 Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps
F.
NEMA WD 5 Specific–Purpose Wiring Devices
G.
NEMA WD 6 Wiring Device Configurations
H.
WS-896-E
Federal Specification
I.
WC-596-F
Federal Specification
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Hubbell; CR 5253IG.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 2
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
b.
c.
2.
2.3
Leviton; 5362-IG.
Pass & Seymour; IG6300.
Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent
on removable parts.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description: Straight blade, feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
B.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.4
Cooper; GF20.
Pass & Seymour; 2084.
SNAP SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B.
Switches, 120 V, 20 A:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224
(four way).
Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4 (four way).
Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V.
Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V.
Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."
Key-Operated Switches, 120 V, 20 A:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 3
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.5
Cooper; 2221L.
Hubbell; HBL1221L.
Leviton; 1221-2L.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,
with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B.
Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
C.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1.
D.
2.6
600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated
when "OFF.".
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCH (MOTION SENSOR)
A.
Wall sensor switch shall be infrared type, dual-voltage operation, 120/277V and compatible
with electronics ballasts fully adjustable time-delay and sensitivity with heavy-duty IR Fresnel
lens. Model #SOM101 by Hubbell or equal. For rooms with bi-level switching provide Model
#SOM102 by Hubbell or equal with color same as switches.
B.
Ceiling sensor shall be dual technology (ultrasonic and infrared sensing) type. Cover 500 - 2000
square feet. Model #OMNI-DT/OMNI-DT-RP by Hubbell or equal.
C.
Ceiling sensor control unit (switch pack) shall be 120/277V and installed in J-box next to
lighting circuit J-box.
2.7
COVERPLATES
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide all coverplates with rounded edges and corners, smooth and free of grooves,
embossing or other embellishment.
Provide mounting screws to match the plate finish.
Provide gang type coverplates where two or more devices are installed at one location.
Individual gangable coverplates are not acceptable.
Provide plates of one design, throughout the project unless otherwise specified.
Metal Coverplates
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 4
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide smooth, stainless steel plates, American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Type 302,
0.040" thick with satin smooth finish.
Provide removable plastic film to protect coverplates during installation. Remove film at
time of final acceptance.
Use Hubbell #S Series or equal.
Weatherproof Coverplates
1.
General
a.
b.
c.
2.
While in use covers:
a.
b.
D.
Provide weatherproof coverplate for one GFCI receptacle. Provide gasketed,
spring loaded, vertically self-closing covers suitable for use in damp and wet
locations while a plug is inserted into the receptacle as described in NEC.
Use Pass & Seymour clear cover #WIUC10 series for GFCI receptacles or equal.
Material / Finish
1.
2.8
Provide weatherproof coverplate for one GFI receptacle. Provide gasketed, spring
loaded, vertically self-closing covers suitable for use in damp and wet locations as
described in UL 514 and NEC.
Furnish base plates, covers, hinge pins, spring and screws with corrosion resistant
type material.
Use Hubbell, die-cast aluminum cover #WP-26 series for GFCI receptacles or
equal.
As Selected by architect, unless otherwise noted.
SURFACE RACEWAY
A.
Wiremold AL 4000 series raceway shall have (2) two wiring compartments with field
removable cover(s). Multiple compartment raceway shall have an integral dividing barrier
isolating wiring compartments and provided with fittings that maintain the separation of
compartments.
B.
Covers must be removable with a standard straight blade screwdriver without marring.
Raceways having two covers must allow each cover to be removed separately without allowing
access into the compartment(s) enclosed by the other cover.
C.
Raceway shall be manufactured of extruded #6063-T5 aluminum with a heavy etched
Architectural Class II clear anodized finish (AA-C22A31).
D.
Provide duplex receptacle every 24” and modular communication below.
1.
E.
In lab areas provide GFCI type receptacles.
Wiring Devices
1.
Wiring devices and other connectors shall be factory installed, electrically wired, and
covers labeled with (insert labeling choice) as identified in the building plans. Each
receptacle shall be identified noting the panel number and circuit number from which it is
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 5
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
fed. Receptacles rated higher than a NEMA 5-20R configuration shall also be provided
with voltage, phase and amperage identified in the same manner. Raceway sections shall
be provided with 12" [304.8mm] pigtails at feed locations for ease of installation.
Grounding shall be maintained by means of factory installed NEC sized grounding
conductor(s) and utilize insulation displacement connectors as required.
F.
Communication Outlets
1.
G.
Fittings
1.
H.
The multioutlet assembly is to consist of factory assembled product with a full
complement of fittings including, but not limited to, elbows (90º, internal and external),
slide couplings for joining raceway sections, blank end caps for closing open ends of the
raceway, and flat tees.
Communication Devices and Accessories
1.
2.9
Raceway covers shall have either holecut provision for communications outlets, if
Wiremold Interlink Cabling System data connectors are used, or the voice and data/LAN
outlets shall be factory mounted to the cover plates. The raceway must be capable of
containing, but not limited to, snap-in modular jacks (3-pair, 4-pair, 4-pair keyed and
MMJ), coaxial and F-connectors and communication grommets. Wiring connections of
these devices shall be completed at the jobsite by the appointed contractor.
The raceway manufacturer will provide a complete line of connectivity outlets and
modular inserts for UTP (including Category 5), STP (150 ohm) Fiber Optic, Coaxial and
other cabling types with face plates and bezels to facilitate mounting. A complete line of
preprinted station and port identification labels, snap-in icon buttons as well as write-on
station identification labels shall be available.
FINISHES
A.
Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
Computer Wiring Devices: Blue.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange [As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B.
Install devices with the vertical centerline plumb and with all edges of the device flush against
the adjacent wall surfaces.
C.
Mount switches at 42” above finished floor unless otherwise noted.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 6
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
D.
Manual dimmers shall be installed in individual outlet boxes. Do not install in ganged boxes
with other devices.
E.
De-rate ganged dimmer switches as instructed by manufacturer. Do not use common neutrals in
dimmer circuits.
F.
Mount receptacles vertically with the centerline 18” above finished floor and with grounding
slot at bottom.
G.
Mount GFCI receptacles above counters in bathrooms and at counters within 6'-0" of sinks,
whether indicated as GFCI type or not.
H.
Cover plates on pressed steel outlet boxes in furred areas, attics, etc., or exposed in mechanical
equipment rooms shall be of the same material as the outlet box.
I.
Cover plates in locations concealed from public view shall have the circuit numbers and source
feed point hand labeled with marking black pen (permanent marker). See Section 260553 for
labeling.
J.
All low voltage wiring for controls, occupancy sensors, etc., shall be in conduit.
K.
Provide labeling for all lock switches, pilot switches, switches from which equipment or circuit
controlled cannot be readily seen, three or more switches under a common plate and for
switches as indicated.
L.
Provide coverplates for all outlet boxes, switches, receptacles, etc.
M.
Install blank coverplates on all outlet boxes in which no device is required or installed.
N.
Provide coverplates that completely cover wall opening and seat against wall.
O.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
P.
Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 7
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
a.
b.
c.
Q.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
R.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
S.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
3.3
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet
boxes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
2.
3.
B.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
Test proper polarity of all receptacles.
Test ground continuity of all wiring devices
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 8
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
5.
6.
7.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262726- 9
Wiring Devices
June 30, 2010
SECTION 262813
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches
enclosed controllers and motor-control centers.
Spare-fuse cabinets.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to
accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,
local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ambient temperature adjustment information.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262813- 1
Fuse
June 30, 2010
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single
source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
two of each size and type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
Littelfuse, Inc.
SPARE-FUSE CABINET
A.
Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and keycoded cam lock and pull.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 25 percent spare capacity
minimum.
Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch high letters on exterior of door.
Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse
manufacturer.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262813- 2
Fuse
June 30, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
B.
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
FUSE APPLICATIONS
A.
Cartridge Fuses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Feeders Class: RK1, time delay
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
Other Branch Circuits: Class J, fast acting.
Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
B.
IDENTIFICATION
C.
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262813- 3
Fuse
June 30, 2010
SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Fusible switches.
Nonfusible switches.
Receptacle switches.
Shunt trip switches.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to IBC.
1.
1.5
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data
on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262816- 1
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
June 30, 2010
5.
6.
B.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.6
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
B.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262816- 2
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
June 30, 2010
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Cutler Hammer.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
General Electric
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [240] or [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
B.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
Provide UL listed lugs; 75°C rated, for copper conductors, suitable for size and number
of conductors indicated on the drawing.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [240] or [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262816- 3
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
June 30, 2010
B.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Provide UL listed lugs; 75°C rated, for copper conductors, suitable for size and number
of conductors indicated on the drawing.
SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable
product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
Littelfuse, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
General Requirements: Comply with [ ASME A17.1,] UL 50, and UL 98,
with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with
Class J fuses.
Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism
and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three
padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.
Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from source of enough capacity to
operate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.
Accessories:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.5
Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.
Oiltight red ON pilot light.
interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and
closed.
Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.
Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac coil voltage.
Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with
NFPA 72.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
B.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers shall be RMS sensing circuit breaker; Inverse time-current
element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
C.
Adjustable short time and magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 150 A and larger.
D.
Features and Accessories:
1.
2.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Provide UL listed lugs; 75°C rated, for copper conductors, suitable for size and number
of conductors indicated on the drawing.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262816- 4
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
June 30, 2010
3.
4.
2.6
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
Provide Shunt Trip for Elevator Power Supply: Trip coil energized from separate circuit,
with coil-clearing contact.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,
to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
[Kitchen] [Wash-Down] Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4].
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 8.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262816- 5
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
June 30, 2010
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study".
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262816- 6
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
June 30, 2010
SECTION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:
1.
2.
1.3
Full-voltage manual.
Full-voltage magnetic.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CPT: Control power transformer.
B.
MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
C.
MCP: Motor circuit protector.
D.
N.C.: Normally closed.
E.
N.O.: Normally open.
F.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
G.
SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to IBC.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
1.5
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections,
details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.
1.
Show tabulations of the following:
a.
b.
Each installed unit's type and details.
Factory-installed devices.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 1
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
c.
d.
e.
2.
Nameplate legends.
Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in
combination controllers.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip
settings.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reducedvoltage solid-state controllers.
G.
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and
arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.
H.
Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have
been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload
protection suit actual motors to be protected.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 2
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
D.
1.7
IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage.
B.
If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per
controller.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including
conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but
no fewer than three of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: 3 of each type and color installed.
Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish two spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller
installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Cutler Hammer.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 3
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
A.
Fractional Horsepower Manual Starters: AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, fullvoltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit and
toggle operator.
B.
Manual Motor Starters
1.
2.
3.
4.
AC general purpose Class A manually operated non-reversing full-voltage controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower, with integral overload relay and pushbutton
operator.
Provide red pilot light and auxiliary contacts, 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Provide provisions for padlocking in the OFF position.
The starter shall have accessories such as auxiliary contacts, trip alarm, undervoltage
release, and shunt trip available for field installation.
C.
Starter size and number of poles shall be as required for connections shown on drawings.
Furnish in conformance with NEMA ICS 2.
D.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor and Type 3R for outdoor applications, unless
otherwise noted.
2.3
FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A.
General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general
purpose, Class A.
B.
Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1.
2.
Configuration: Non-reversing.
Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to
allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
All starters shall be such that disconnection of power conductors shall automatically
disconnect control power.
Each starter unit shall have the following accessories:
a.
b.
c.
6.
7.
8.
Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating,
manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
Two N.O. and two N.C. auxiliary contacts.
Heavy-duty oil tight H-O-A switch.
Heavy-duty oil tight pilot lights with push-to-test feature; Green for motor OFF;
Red for motor running and Amber for alarm condition or power available. Multispeed motors shall be equipped with additional pilot light for indication of each
speed (high and low).
The operating handle shall have a means to lock the handle in the OFF position.
Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary
fuses of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot,
indicating, and control devices.
Bimetallic Overload Relays:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 4
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
C.
External overload reset push button.
Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller,
OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1.
MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
2.4
Inverse-time-current characteristic.
Class 20 tripping characteristic.
Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected
motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
Ambient compensated.
UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply
with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current
element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short
circuits.
Front-mounted, adjustable instantaneous/short time trip settings for circuit-breaker
frame sizes 100 A and larger.
Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.
All starters shall be full-voltage, non-reversing, (FVNR), minimum NEMA size 1, unless
otherwise noted.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
Indoor Locations Mechanical Areas Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping NonCorrosive Liquids: Type 12.
Hazardous Areas: Type 8.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 8
enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and
temperature swings.
B.
Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed
outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
C.
Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to
direct and extended sun exposure.
D.
Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 5
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacture’s instructions and as specified
herein. Maintain code clearances in front of all equipment.
B.
Check full load ampere and service factor rating of each motor after installed and furnish the
proper size overload heater elements to protect the motor.
C.
Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structuralsteel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying
with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D.
Provide a permanent directory card with frame and transparent protector with typewritten
information identifying each motor by number, location, service, HP, electrical characteristics,
full load amps and overload heater size. Directory shall be displayed on the front of the motor
controller.
E.
The interlock and control wiring, which are required but not prewired, shall be done in the field.
F.
Motor starters and disconnect switches shall be conveniently accessible; all NEC / NYCEC
minimum clearances from walls, pipes, ducts, equipment, etc., shall be maintained. Locate as
inconspicuously as possible in finished spaces.
G.
Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
H.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
I.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Fuses."
J.
Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors have been installed.
K.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven
equipment.
L.
Comply with NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 6
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
A.
Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1.
C.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting
motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before
starting the motor(s).
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E.
Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed
controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
G.
After installation and connection to load, each controller shall be independently tested at full
load by an approved agency. Submit reports for the following:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 7
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
1.
3.5
Preset the thermal overload relay setting at 125% of the fla (Full Load amps) of the
driven equipment motor. Operate the driven equipment for a minimum of two (2) hours.
If the thermal overload relay operates, gradually increase the setting in 5% increments till
the operation is successful. Indicate hp rating of the driven load and provide final
overload relay settings at the controller.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
B.
Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable
instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere
ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts.
If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without
tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA
Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of
a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.
C.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers and to use and reprogram microprocessorbased, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
262913- 8
Enclosed Controllers
June 30, 2010
SECTION 264313
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes field-mounted TVSS for low-voltage 120 V power distribution and control
equipment.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed TVSS.
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral TVSS.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
C.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also, transient voltage
surge suppression.
D.
NTRL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
E.
TOV: Temporary Over Voltage
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. Include listed documents:
1.
2.
3.
B.
SVR ratings
Symmetrical fault current withstand ratings
Independent third Party Test Lab report showing device is capable of surviving specified
number of 8x20us waveform.
Product Certificates: For SPDs, signed by third-party NRTL testing agencies certifying
compliance with the following standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
UL 1283.
UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 Revision (effective 2/9/2007)
IEEE C62.34 Secondary Surge Arrester .
NEMA LS-1 (1992) Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices..
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
264313- 1
Transient-Voltage suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits
June 30, 2010
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For TVSS devices to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
E.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance
of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E.
Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power
Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for
Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits."
F.
Comply with NEMA LS 1 1992, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices."
G.
Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters,"
H.
Comply with UL 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors." and listed as a SPD device.
I.
Tested and listed by a NRTL as a complete assembly to a symmetrical fault current rating
greater than or equal to the rating of the connected panel, in accordance with NEC Article 285
J.
Fed by a fuse or circuit breaker in Panel Board with SVR rating to include fuse or breaker in
series with SPD.
K.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
L.
Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
264313- 2
Transient-Voltage suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits
June 30, 2010
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location of field-mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate clearances for
maintenance.
B.
Coordinate TVSS devices with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Wall Mounted SPD: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fails in materials or
workmanship within fifteen years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A.
Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module mounted
externally to the Panelboard, with EMI Filtering (also known as sine-wave-tracking) type with
the following features and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Fuses, rated at 200 thousand ampere interrupting capacity (AIC).
Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
Integral disconnect capable of passing full rated surge current, or dedicated fuse or
breaker.
Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing.
Field Replaceable protection module.
Utilizing copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
Monitoring system capable of indicating the number of transient surges, over voltages,
under voltage events.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status. Coordinate with the building power monitoring and control system.
Field testable with test data from factory provided for comparison
Senses percentage of protection available indicating true protection level available
Monitors neutral-to-ground voltage and current
Panelboards rated 600 Amps & above
Panelboards rated 400 Amps Buss
Panelboards rated 225 Amps Buss
Panelboards rated 100 Amps Buss
150 kA per mode/300 kA per phase.
125 kA per mode/250 kA per phase.
100 kA per mode/200 kA per phase.
80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of [480Y/277]
[208Y/120], 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1.
Line to Neutral:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
[900 V for 480Y/277]
264313- 3
[400 V for 208Y/120].
Transient-Voltage suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits
June 30, 2010
2.
3.
D.
[500 V for 208Y/120].
[500 V for 208Y/120].
Line to Line:
Line to Ground:
[2000 V for 480 V] [1000 V for 240 V].
[1500 V for 480 V] [800 V for 240 V].
EMI-RFI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and evaluation
procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1-1992
1.
2.2
[900 V for 480Y/277]
[900 V for 480Y/277]
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 240 or 480-V, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta
circuits shall be as follows:
1.
2.
E.
Line to Ground:
Neutral to Ground:
Attenuation: 30dB or greater from 50kHz to 100MHz
SUPPRESSORS FOR ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARD EXTENSIONS
A.
Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, with
EMI Filtering (also known as sine-wave-tracking) type with the following features and
accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Fuses, rated at 200 thousand ampere interrupting capacity (AIC).
Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
Integral disconnect capable of passing full rated surge current or dedicated fuse or
breaker.
Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing.
Field Replaceable protection module.
Utilizing copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
Monitoring system capable of indicating the number of transient surges, over voltages,
under voltage events.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status. Coordinate with the building power monitoring and control system.
Field testable with test data from factory provided for comparison
Senses percentage of protection available indicating true protection level available
Monitors neutral-to-ground voltage and current
Panelboards rated 600 Amps & above
Panelboards rated 400 Amps Buss
Panelboards rated 225 Amps Buss
Panelboards rated 100 Amps Buss
150 kA per mode/300 kA per phase.
125 kA per mode/250 kA per phase.
100 kA per mode/200 kA per phase.
80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of [480Y/277]
[208Y/120], 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1.
2.
Line to Neutral:
Line to Ground:
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
[900 V for 480Y/277]
[900 V for 480Y/277]
264313- 4
[400 V for 208Y/120].
[500 V for 208Y/120].
Transient-Voltage suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits
June 30, 2010
3.
D.
[900 V for 480Y/277]
[500 V for 208Y/120].
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 240 or 480-V, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta
circuits shall be as follows:
1.
2.
2.3
Neutral to Ground:
Line to Line:
Line to Ground:
[2000 V for 480 V] [1000 V for 240 V].
[1500 V for 480 V] [800 V for 240 V].
ENCLOSURES
A.
Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.
B.
Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment shall be installed following manufacturer's recommendations and guidelines in
compliance with NEC Article 280/250 for grounding and bonding; NEC Article 110-9 and 11010 for over-current protection.
B.
All TVSS devices specified in this specification section shall be designed and installed such that
normal operation of the system shall not be impaired by the installation of these devices.
C.
Suppressors shall be installed as close as practical to the electric panel to be protected,
consistent with available space.
D.
Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor
and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground. SPD shall not be integrated with
Switchgear or Switchboard as recommended by IEEE-1100, Section 8.4.2.5.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1.
2.
B.
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation
requirements.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance
with test parameters.
After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
264313- 5
Transient-Voltage suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits
June 30, 2010
3.
Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Do not energize or connect electrical equipment to their sources until TVSS devices are
installed and connected.
B.
Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS
installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately
after the testing is over.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
maintain TVSS devices.
Roosevelt Hall Renovation
Brooklyn College
Brooklyn, NY
Project #6032.20
264313- 6
Transient-Voltage suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits
June 30, 2010